The International British Yeoward School

 Puerto de la Cruz, Tenerife, Canary Islands

Monthly Archives: March 2020

Capital of spain weather: Washington, DC Weather Forecast and Conditions – The Weather Channel

Опубликовано: March 31, 2020 в 11:12 am


Категории: Miscellaneous

weather by month, temperature, precipitation, when to go

The climate of Madrid is moderately continental, with quite cold, relatively rainy winters and hot, sunny summers.

The city is the capital of Spain and is located in the center of the Meseta, the plateau that occupies the interior of the country, at an altitude ranging between 570 and 740 meters (1,870 and 2,430 feet). The city center is at 655 meters (2,150 feet).

At Cuatro Vientos airport, the average temperature of the coldest month (January) is of 6.5 °C (43.5 °F), that of the warmest month (July) is of 26 °C (79 °F). Here are the average temperatures.

Madrid – Average temperatures (1991-2020)
Month Min (°C) Max (°C) Mean (°C) Min (°F) Max (°F) Mean (°F)
January 1. 9 10.8 6.3 35 51 43.4
February 2.5 12.8 7.6 37 55 45.8
March 5.1 16.4 10.8 41 62 51.4
April 7.4 19 13.2 45 66 55.7
May 11 23.8 17.4 52 75 63.3
June 15.8 29.8 22.8 60 86 73
July 18.6 33.4 26 65 92 78.8
August 18.6 32.9 25.8 65 91 78.4
September 14.9 28 21. 4 59 82 70.6
October 10.4 21.3 15.8 51 70 60.5
November 5.3 14.6 10 42 58 50
December 2.6 11.4 7 37 52 44.6
Year 9.6 21.2 15.35 49.2 70.2 59.5

Precipitation is not abundant, since it amounts to 455 millimeters (18 inches) per year, in fact, the landscape of the plateau is semi-arid, especially during the summer months. The rains, however, are quite frequent from October to April. In May, and more rarely in summer, some thunderstorms can break out in the afternoon, but generally, from June to August it almost never rains.

Here is the average precipitation.

Madrid – Average precipitation
Month Millimeters Inches Days
January 40 1.6 6
February 35 1.4 6
March 25 1 5
April 50 2 7
May 55 2.2 8
June 30 1.2 4
July 15 0.6 2
August 15 0.6 2
September 25 1 3
October 50 2 6
November 55 2. 2 7
December 60 2.4 7
Year 455 17.9 63

Winter, from December to February, is relatively cold.

The rains, brought by Atlantic depressions, are quite frequent, but generally not abundant.

Days can be mild, especially when the Azores anticyclone settles on the Iberian Peninsula, bringing periods of good weather even in winter, with highs around 13/15 °C (55/59 °F), but nights remain typically cold, with minimum temperatures near freezing (0 °C or 32 °F). Sometimes, at night and in the early morning, especially in December and January, fog can form.

There may be some cold and windy days, with maximum temperatures around or below 5 °C (41 °F).

Every now and then, even cold waves can occur.

The lowest temperatures are reached in the north-east of the city (see Torrejón de Ardoz, Alcalá de Henares). In this area, at Barajas airport, 610 meters (2,000 ft) above sea level, the record cold was set, even -15 °C (5 °F) in January 1945 and February 1963. Thereafter, the temperature reached -10 °C (14 °F) a few times (after the year 2000, it happened in December 2001 and in January 2005), although in January 2021, it dropped to -13 °C (8.5 °F). At Cuatro Vientos airport, on the southwestern outskirts of the city, the record is -13 °C (8.5 °F), recorded in January 2021. The previous record was -11.5 °C (11.5 °F) and dated back to February 1963.

Snowfalls in Madrid are usually rare and not abundant. However, snow is a bit more frequent in the northern districts of the city, which are located at a higher altitude. Light snowfalls can be observed every year or almost, but a significant accumulation is rarely observed. In January 1952, the snow reached 30 centimeters (12 inches) in some areas. In March 1971, 20 cm (8 in) of snow fell in the center, and up to 30 cm (12 in) in the northern districts. In December 1977, 20 cm (8 in) fell on the north side. In February 1984, 15 cm (half a foot) of snow fell homogeneously in the city, while in February 2005, snow depth reached 10 cm (4 in). In January 2009, the snow reached 15 cm (6 in).

The snowfall of January 2021, when the snow reached half a meter (20 in), was therefore the most abundant of the post-war period, but we must probably go back to that of November 1904 to find a similar or greater thickness.

Summer, from June to August, is hot and sunny.

There is often scorching heat during the day, in fact, the temperature easily reaches 35/36 °C (95/97 °F), and almost every year 40 °C (104 °F), however, the air is dry, so the heat is more bearable. In addition, at night, the temperature becomes fairly cool, hovering typically from 15 °C to 20 °C (59 to 68 °F). However, in the hottest periods, the temperature drops to acceptable values only late at night, also because the sun sets late because of the time zone adopted (the sun sets at 9. 45 pm in mid-July and at 9.10 pm in mid-August). Generally, the maximum temperature is recorded around 5 pm, and at 8 pm the heat is still intense.

The heat record was set in August 2021: 43 °C (109.5 °F) at Barajas airport and 42 °C (108 °F) at Cuatro Vientos. The previous records were 42 °C (108 °F) at Barajas (in July 1995) and 41 °C (105.5 °F) at Cuatro Vientos (in August 2018).

The city empties in the summer, those who work in Madrid return to their place of origin, while locals go on vacation to the sea. Those who stay in the city go out after dark, or go in search of coolness in the mountains north of the city (the Sierra de Guadarrama).

Spring and autumn are mild and variable, with sunny periods, but also the passage of Atlantic disturbances, which bring clouds and rain. Spring, being the most contrasted season of the year, is also the windiest.

In both seasons, there are pleasantly warm and sunny days, but the temperature drops rapidly after sunset.

The amount of sunshine in Madrid is great in summer, when clear skies prevail: in July, there are on average 12 hours of sunshine per day. Sunny days are possible throughout the year: after all, even from November to January, there are no less than 4/5 hours of sunshine per day.

Indeed, with 2,800 hours of sunshine per year, Madrid is one of the sunniest cities in Spain and in all of Europe. Here are the average sunshine hours per day.

Madrid – Sunshine hours
Month Average Total
January 5 160 February 6 175 March 7 220 April 8 240 May 9 280 June 10. 5 315 July 11.5 365 August 11 335 September 8.5 250 October 6.5 205 November 5.5 160 December 4.5 135 Year 7.8 2835

Best Time

The best periods to visit Madrid are spring and autumn, in particular, you can choose the month of May, and from mid-September to mid-October. In June, it can already be hot. In April, it can be a bit cold, especially in the first half of the month, and at night, also in the second half of the month, when the days are generally pleasant.

September, too, is a good month, but it can still be hot at the beginning, while during the month, the first rains can occur. In October, the air is often mild, but the days are getting shorter, the rains are more frequent, and it can get a bit cold at night.

Those who can stand the heat can choose July and August, but they must be prepared to stroll around the city in very hot weather.

The temperature range between day and night is often high, so it is useful to dress in layers and to bring something warm: even in midsummer, you may want a sweatshirt for the evening (or maybe late at night, when the city is still alive).

Also, in the summer it is useful to bring a sun hat and … to drink a lot.

Madrid – Weather by month

Based on the period 1991-2020

(January – February – March – April – May – June – July – August – September – October – November – December)

In January, the coldest month of the year, the weather in Madrid is usually quite cold. The average temperature is of 6.3 °C (43 °F), with a minimum of 1. 9 °C (35.5 °F) and a maximum of 10.8 °C (51.4 °F).
On the coldest nights of the month, the temperature usually drops to around -3 °C (26.5 °F). However, it dropped to -10 °C (14 °F) in January 2005.
On the warmest days of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 17 °C (62.5 °F). However, it reached 20.6 °C (69.1 °F) in January 2003.
Precipitation amounts to 40 mm (1.6 in), distributed over 6 days.
The day lasts on average 9 hours and 40 minutes.
There are on average 5 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 53% of the time.
The average humidity is 69%.
The average wind speed is 9 kph (6 mph).

In February, the weather in Madrid is usually quite mild. The average temperature is of 7.6 °C (46 °F), with a minimum of 2.5 °C (36.6 °F) and a maximum of 12.8 °C (55 °F).
On the coldest nights of the month, the temperature usually drops to around -2.5 °C (27.5 °F). However, it dropped to -7 °C (19. 4 °F) in February 2010.
On the warmest days of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 19 °C (66 °F). However, it reached 23 °C (73.4 °F) in February 2020.
Precipitation amounts to 35 mm (1.4 in), distributed over 6 days.
The day lasts on average 10 hours and 40 minutes.
There are on average 6 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 57% of the time.
The average humidity is 60%.
The average wind speed is 10 kph (6 mph).

In March, the weather in Madrid is usually mild. The average temperature is of 10.8 °C (51 °F), with a minimum of 5.1 °C (41.3 °F) and a maximum of 16.4 °C (61.5 °F).
On the coldest nights, which normally occur at the beginning of the month, the temperature usually drops to around -1 °C (30.5 °F). However, it dropped to -6 °C (21.2 °F) in March 2004.
On the warmest days, which normally occur at the end of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 23.5 °C (74. 5 °F). However, it reached 28 °C (82.4 °F) in March 2015.
Precipitation amounts to 25 mm (1 in), distributed over 5 days.
The day lasts on average 12 hours and 0 minutes.
There are on average 7 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 59% of the time.
The average humidity is 53%.
The average wind speed is 12 kph (7 mph).

In April, the weather in Madrid is usually mild. The average temperature is of 13.2 °C (56 °F), with a minimum of 7.4 °C (45.3 °F) and a maximum of 19 °C (66.1 °F).
On the coldest nights, which normally occur at the beginning of the month, the temperature usually drops to around 2 °C (35.5 °F). However, it dropped to -1 °C (30.2 °F) in April 2005.
On the warmest days, which normally occur at the end of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 26.5 °C (79.5 °F). However, it reached 30.4 °C (86.7 °F) in April 2005.
Precipitation amounts to 50 mm (2 in), distributed over 7 days.
The day lasts on average 13 hours and 20 minutes.
There are on average 8 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 60% of the time.
The average humidity is 52%.
The average wind speed is 12 kph (7 mph).

In May, the weather in Madrid is usually very mild. The average temperature is of 17.4 °C (63 °F), with a minimum of 11 °C (51.8 °F) and a maximum of 23.8 °C (74.8 °F).
On the coldest nights, which normally occur at the beginning of the month, the temperature usually drops to around 4.5 °C (40.5 °F). However, it dropped to -1.2 °C (29.8 °F) in May 1991.
On the warmest days, which normally occur at the end of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 31.5 °C (89 °F). However, it reached 36 °C (96.8 °F) in May 2015.
Precipitation amounts to 55 mm (2.2 in), distributed over 8 days.
The day lasts on average 14 hours and 30 minutes. So the days are long.
There are on average 9 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 62% of the time.
The average humidity is 46%.
The average wind speed is 10 kph (6 mph).

In June, the weather in Madrid is usually warm to hot. However, there are remarkable differences between night and day. The average temperature is of 22.8 °C (73 °F), with a minimum of 15.8 °C (60.4 °F) and a maximum of 29.8 °C (85.7 °F).
On the coldest nights, which normally occur at the beginning of the month, the temperature usually drops to around 9.5 °C (49.5 °F). However, it dropped to 7 °C (44.6 °F) in June 2002.
On the warmest days, which normally occur at the end of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 36.5 °C (98 °F). However, it reached 40 °C (104 °F) in June 2012.
Precipitation amounts to 30 mm (1.2 in), distributed over 4 days.
The day lasts on average 15 hours and 0 minutes. So the days are long. June 21, the summer solstice, is the longest day of the year in the Northern Hemisphere.
There are on average 10.5 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 70% of the time.
The average humidity is 37%.
The average wind speed is 11 kph (7 mph).

In July, the hottest month of the year, the weather in Madrid is usually warm to hot. However, there are remarkable differences between night and day. The average temperature is of 26.0 °C (79 °F), with a minimum of 18.6 °C (65.5 °F) and a maximum of 33.4 °C (92.2 °F).
On the coldest nights of the month, the temperature usually drops to around 13 °C (55 °F). However, it dropped to 9.2 °C (48.6 °F) in July 1996.
On the warmest days of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 38.5 °C (101 °F). However, it reached 40.2 °C (104.4 °F) in July 2015.
Precipitation amounts to 15 mm (0.6 in), distributed over 2 days.
The day lasts on average 14 hours and 40 minutes. So the days are long.
There are on average 11.5 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 80% of the time.
The average humidity is 33%. Hence, the air is normally dry.
The average wind speed is 11 kph (7 mph).

In August, the weather in Madrid is usually warm to hot. However, there are remarkable differences between night and day. The average temperature is of 25.8 °C (78 °F), with a minimum of 18.6 °C (65.5 °F) and a maximum of 32.9 °C (91.3 °F).
On the coldest nights of the month, the temperature usually drops to around 13 °C (55 °F). However, it dropped to 9 °C (48.2 °F) in August 2005.
On the warmest days of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 38 °C (100.5 °F). However, it reached 41 °C (105.8 °F) in August 2018.
Precipitation amounts to 15 mm (0.6 in), distributed over 2 days.
The day lasts on average 13 hours and 40 minutes.
There are on average 11 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 79% of the time.
The average humidity is 35%.
The average wind speed is 10 kph (6 mph).

In September, the weather in Madrid is usually warm. However, there are remarkable differences between night and day. The average temperature is of 21.4 °C (71 °F), with a minimum of 14.9 °C (58.9 °F) and a maximum of 28 °C (82.4 °F).
On the coldest nights, which normally occur at the end of the month, the temperature usually drops to around 9.5 °C (48.5 °F). However, it dropped to 5 °C (41 °F) in September 2005.
On the warmest days, which normally occur at the beginning of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 34 °C (93.5 °F). However, it reached 39.5 °C (103.1 °F) in September 2016.
Precipitation amounts to 25 mm (1 in), distributed over 3 days.
The day lasts on average 12 hours and 25 minutes.
There are on average 8.5 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 67% of the time.
The average humidity is 43%.
The average wind speed is 9 kph (6 mph).

In October, the weather in Madrid is usually very mild. The average temperature is of 15.8 °C (61 °F), with a minimum of 10.4 °C (50.8 °F) and a maximum of 21.3 °C (70.3 °F).
On the coldest nights, which normally occur at the end of the month, the temperature usually drops to around 4.5 °C (40.5 °F). However, it dropped to 1 °C (33.8 °F) in October 2012.
On the warmest days, which normally occur at the beginning of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 28 °C (82.5 °F). However, it reached 33 °C (91.4 °F) in October 2004.
Precipitation amounts to 50 mm (2 in), distributed over 6 days.
The day lasts on average 11 hours and 5 minutes.
There are on average 6.5 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 59% of the time.
The average humidity is 56%.
The average wind speed is 9 kph (5 mph).

In November, the weather in Madrid is usually mild. The average temperature is of 10.0 °C (50 °F), with a minimum of 5.3 °C (41.6 °F) and a maximum of 14.6 °C (58. 3 °F).
On the coldest nights, which normally occur at the end of the month, the temperature usually drops to around -0.5 °C (31 °F). However, it dropped to -5 °C (23 °F) in November 2008.
On the warmest days, which normally occur at the beginning of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 21 °C (70 °F). However, it reached 24 °C (75.2 °F) in November 1996.
Precipitation amounts to 55 mm (2.2 in), distributed over 7 days.
The day lasts on average 9 hours and 55 minutes.
There are on average 5.5 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 54% of the time.
The average humidity is 66%.
The average wind speed is 9 kph (6 mph).

In December, the weather in Madrid is usually quite mild. The average temperature is of 7.0 °C (45 °F), with a minimum of 2.6 °C (36.7 °F) and a maximum of 11.4 °C (52.4 °F).
On the coldest nights of the month, the temperature usually drops to around -3 °C (27 °F). However, it dropped to -8 °C (17. 6 °F) in December 2009.
On the warmest days of the month, the temperature usually reaches around 16.5 °C (62 °F). However, it reached 19 °C (66.2 °F) in December 2008.
Precipitation amounts to 60 mm (2.4 in), distributed over 7 days.
The day lasts on average 9 hours and 20 minutes. December 21, the winter solstice, is the shortest day of the year in the Northern Hemisphere.
There are on average 4.5 hours of sunshine per day. So, the sun shines 47% of the time.
The average humidity is 70%. Hence, the air is normally humid.
The average wind speed is 8 kph (5 mph).

Madrid Climate, Weather By Month, Average Temperature (Spain)

In Madrid, the summers are short, hot, dry, and mostly clear and the winters are very cold and partly cloudy. Over the course of the year, the temperature typically varies from 33°F to 92°F and is rarely below 23°F or above 99°F.

Based on the beach/pool score, the best time of year to visit Madrid for hot-weather activities is from late June to late August.

coldcoolwarmhotwarmcoolcoldJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDecNowNow88%88%48%48%clearovercastprecipitation: 1.9 inprecipitation: 1.9 in0.2 in0.2 inmuggy: 0%muggy: 0%0%0%drydrybeach/pool score: 8.6beach/pool score:

Madrid weather by month. Click on each chart for more information.

The hot season lasts for 2.9 months, from June 15 to September 10, with an average daily high temperature above 83°F. The hottest month of the year in Madrid is July, with an average high of 91°F and low of 63°F.

The cool season lasts for 3.7 months, from November 14 to March 5, with an average daily high temperature below 58°F. The coldest month of the year in Madrid is January, with an average low of 33°F and high of 51°F.

Average High and Low Temperature in Madrid

Average High and Low Temperature in MadridhotcoolcoolJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0°F0°F10°F10°F20°F20°F30°F30°F40°F40°F50°F50°F60°F60°F70°F70°F80°F80°F90°F90°F100°F100°FJan 1550°FJan 1550°FJul 2392°FJul 2392°F33°F33°F64°F64°FJun 1583°FJun 1583°FSep 1083°FSep 1083°FNov 1458°FNov 1458°FMar 558°FMar 558°F57°F57°F58°F58°F40°F40°F36°F36°FNowNow

The daily average high (red line) and low (blue line) temperature, with 25th to 75th and 10th to 90th percentile bands. The thin dotted lines are the corresponding average perceived temperatures.

Average Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
High 51°F 54°F 61°F 65°F 73°F 84°F 91°F 90°F 81°F 69°F 58°F 51°F
Temp. 41°F 44°F 50°F 54°F 61°F 72°F 78°F 77°F 69°F 58°F 48°F 42°F
Low 33°F 34°F 39°F 43°F 50°F 58°F 63°F 63°F 56°F 48°F 40°F 34°F

The figure below shows you a compact characterization of the entire year of hourly average temperatures. The horizontal axis is the day of the year, the vertical axis is the hour of the day, and the color is the average temperature for that hour and day.

Average Hourly Temperature in Madrid

Average Hourly Temperature in MadridJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec12 AM12 AM2 AM2 AM4 AM4 AM6 AM6 AM8 AM8 AM10 AM10 AM12 PM12 PM2 PM2 PM4 PM4 PM6 PM6 PM8 PM8 PM10 PM10 PM12 AM12 AMNowNowvery coldvery coldvery coldcoldcoldcoolcomfortablecomfortablewarmwarmhotvery cold

very cold

The average hourly temperature, color coded into bands. The shaded overlays indicate night and civil twilight.

© Esri, et al.

Compare Madrid to another city:


In Madrid, the average percentage of the sky covered by clouds experiences significant seasonal variation over the course of the year.

The clearer part of the year in Madrid begins around June 11 and lasts for 3.0 months, ending around September 12.

The clearest month of the year in Madrid is July, during which on average the sky is clear, mostly clear, or partly cloudy 86% of the time.

The cloudier part of the year begins around September 12 and lasts for 9.0 months, ending around June 11.

The cloudiest month of the year in Madrid is December, during which on average the sky is overcast or mostly cloudy 51% of the time.

Cloud Cover Categories in Madrid

Cloud Cover Categories in MadridclearercloudiercloudierJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0%100%10%90%20%80%30%70%40%60%50%50%60%40%70%30%80%20%90%10%100%0%Jul 2188%Jul 2188%Dec 1648%Dec 1648%Jun 1168%Jun 1168%Sep 1269%Sep 1269%NowNowclearmostly clearpartly cloudymostly cloudyovercast

mostly clear
partly cloudy
mostly cloudy

The percentage of time spent in each cloud cover band, categorized by the percentage of the sky covered by clouds.

Fraction Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Cloudier 48% 44% 44% 42% 39% 28% 14% 20% 34% 46% 49% 51%
Clearer 52% 56% 56% 58% 61% 72% 86% 80% 66% 54% 51% 49%

A wet day is one with at least 0.04 inches of liquid or liquid-equivalent precipitation. The chance of wet days in Madrid varies throughout the year.

The wetter season lasts 8.4 months, from October 1 to June 14, with a greater than 14% chance of a given day being a wet day. The month with the most wet days in Madrid is May, with an average of 6. 6 days with at least 0.04 inches of precipitation.

The drier season lasts 3.6 months, from June 14 to October 1. The month with the fewest wet days in Madrid is July, with an average of 1.8 days with at least 0.04 inches of precipitation.

Among wet days, we distinguish between those that experience rain alone, snow alone, or a mixture of the two. The month with the most days of rain alone in Madrid is May, with an average of 6.6 days. Based on this categorization, the most common form of precipitation throughout the year is rain alone, with a peak probability of 23% on April 29.

Daily Chance of Precipitation in Madrid

Daily Chance of Precipitation in MadridwetwetdryJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0%0%10%10%20%20%30%30%40%40%50%50%60%60%70%70%80%80%90%90%100%100%Apr 2923%Apr 2923%Jul 194%Jul 194%Jan 119%Jan 119%Oct 114%Oct 114%Jun 1414%Jun 1414%NowNowrain

The percentage of days in which various types of precipitation are observed, excluding trace quantities: rain alone, snow alone, and mixed (both rain and snow fell in the same day).

Days of Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Rain 4.9d 4.2d 4.5d 6.2d 6.6d 3.9d 1.8d 2.0d 3.2d 6.0d 5.9d 5.2d
Mixed 0.1d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d
Any 5.2d 4.4d 4.6d 6.2d 6.6d 3.9d 1.8d 2.0d 3.2d 6.0d 5.9d 5.4d

To show variation within the months and not just the monthly totals, we show the rainfall accumulated over a sliding 31-day period centered around each day of the year. Madrid experiences some seasonal variation in monthly rainfall.

The rainy period of the year lasts for 9.9 months, from September 4 to July 2, with a sliding 31-day rainfall of at least 0.5 inches. The month with the most rain in Madrid is October, with an average rainfall of 1.8 inches.

The rainless period of the year lasts for 2.1 months, from July 2 to September 4. The month with the least rain in Madrid is July, with an average rainfall of 0.3 inches.

Average Monthly Rainfall in Madrid

Average Monthly Rainfall in MadridrainrainJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0 in0 in1 in1 in2 in2 in3 in3 in4 in4 inOct 271.9 inOct 271.9 inJul 310.2 inJul 310.2 inMay 81.4 inMay 81.4 inMar 50.8 inMar 50.8 inSep 40.5 inSep 40.5 inJul 20.5 inJul 20.5 inNowNow

The average rainfall (solid line) accumulated over the course of a sliding 31-day period centered on the day in question, with 25th to 75th and 10th to 90th percentile bands. The thin dotted line is the corresponding average snowfall.

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Rainfall 1.0″ 0.9″ 0.8″ 1.3″ 1.3″ 0.8″ 0.3″ 0.3″ 0.7″ 1.8″ 1.6″ 1.2″

The length of the day in Madrid varies significantly over the course of the year. In 2022, the shortest day is December 21, with 9 hours, 17 minutes of daylight; the longest day is June 21, with 15 hours, 4 minutes of daylight.

Hours of Daylight and Twilight in Madrid

Hours of Daylight and Twilight in MadridJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0 hr24 hr4 hr20 hr8 hr16 hr12 hr12 hr16 hr8 hr20 hr4 hr24 hr0 hr12 hr, 8 minMar 2012 hr, 8 minMar 2015 hr, 4 minJun 2115 hr, 4 minJun 2112 hr, 10 minSep 2312 hr, 10 minSep 239 hr, 17 minDec 219 hr, 17 minDec 21nightnightdayNowNow

The number of hours during which the Sun is visible (black line). From bottom (most yellow) to top (most gray), the color bands indicate: full daylight, twilight (civil, nautical, and astronomical), and full night.

Hours of Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Daylight 9.7h 10.7h 12.0h 13.3h 14.5h 15.0h 14.7h 13.7h 12.4h 11.1h 9.9h 9.3h

The earliest sunrise is at 6:44 AM on June 14, and the latest sunrise is 1 hour, 57 minutes later at 8:40 AM on October 29. The earliest sunset is at 5:48 PM on December 7, and the latest sunset is 4 hours, 1 minute later at 9:49 PM on June 27.

Daylight saving time (DST) is observed in Madrid during 2022, starting in the spring on March 27, lasting 7. 1 months, and ending in the fall on October 30.

Sunrise & Sunset with Twilight and Daylight Saving Time in Madrid

Sunrise & Sunset with Twilight and Daylight Saving Time in MadridJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec2 AM4 AM6 AM8 AM10 AM12 PM2 PM4 PM6 PM8 PM10 PM12 AM2 AMJun 146:44 AMJun 146:44 AM9:49 PMJun 279:49 PMJun 27Dec 75:48 PMDec 75:48 PM8:40 AMOct 298:40 AMOct 29Mar 27DSTMar 27DSTDSTOct 30DSTOct 30daynightnightnightnightSolarMidnightSolarMidnightSolarNoonSunriseSunsetNowNow

The solar day over the course of the year 2022. From bottom to top, the black lines are the previous solar midnight, sunrise, solar noon, sunset, and the next solar midnight. The day, twilights (civil, nautical, and astronomical), and night are indicated by the color bands from yellow to gray. The transitions to and from daylight saving time are indicated by the ‘DST’ labels.

The figure below presents a compact representation of the sun’s elevation (the angle of the sun above the horizon) and azimuth (its compass bearing) for every hour of every day in the reporting period. The horizontal axis is the day of the year and the vertical axis is the hour of the day. For a given day and hour of that day, the background color indicates the azimuth of the sun at that moment. The black isolines are contours of constant solar elevation.

Solar Elevation and Azimuth in Madrid

Solar Elevation and Azimuth in MadridJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec12 AM12 AM2 AM2 AM4 AM4 AM6 AM6 AM8 AM8 AM10 AM10 AM12 PM12 PM2 PM2 PM4 PM4 PM6 PM6 PM8 PM8 PM10 PM10 PM12 AM12 AM0000101010202020303030304040505060607000010101010202020303040405050602673NowNow


Solar elevation and azimuth over the course of the year 2022. The black lines are lines of constant solar elevation (the angle of the sun above the horizon, in degrees). The background color fills indicate the azimuth (the compass bearing) of the sun. The lightly tinted areas at the boundaries of the cardinal compass points indicate the implied intermediate directions (northeast, southeast, southwest, and northwest).

The figure below presents a compact representation of key lunar data for 2022. The horizontal axis is the day, the vertical axis is the hour of the day, and the colored areas indicate when the moon is above the horizon. The vertical gray bars (new Moons) and blue bars (full Moons) indicate key Moon phases.

Moon Rise, Set & Phases in Madrid

Moon Rise, Set & Phases in MadridJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec12 AM12 AM4 AM4 AM8 AM8 AM12 PM12 PM4 PM4 PM8 PM8 PM12 AM12 AMJan 2Jan 2Jan 18Jan 18Feb 1Feb 1Feb 16Feb 16Mar 2Mar 2Mar 18Mar 18Apr 1Apr 1Apr 16Apr 16Apr 30Apr 30May 16May 16May 30May 30Jun 14Jun 14Jun 29Jun 29Jul 13Jul 13Jul 28Jul 28Aug 12Aug 12Aug 27Aug 27Sep 10Sep 10Sep 25Sep 25Oct 9Oct 9Oct 25Oct 25Nov 8Nov 8Nov 23Nov 23Dec 8Dec 8Dec 23Dec 23

The time in which the moon is above the horizon (light blue area), with new moons (dark gray lines) and full moons (blue lines) indicated. The shaded overlays indicate night and civil twilight.

We base the humidity comfort level on the dew point, as it determines whether perspiration will evaporate from the skin, thereby cooling the body. Lower dew points feel drier and higher dew points feel more humid. Unlike temperature, which typically varies significantly between night and day, dew point tends to change more slowly, so while the temperature may drop at night, a muggy day is typically followed by a muggy night.

The perceived humidity level in Madrid, as measured by the percentage of time in which the humidity comfort level is muggy, oppressive, or miserable, does not vary significantly over the course of the year, remaining a virtually constant 0% throughout.

Humidity Comfort Levels in Madrid

Humidity Comfort Levels in MadridJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0%0%10%10%20%20%30%30%40%40%50%50%60%60%70%70%80%80%90%90%100%100%Feb 30%Feb 30%Jul 260%Jul 260%NowNowdrydryhumidhumid


The percentage of time spent at various humidity comfort levels, categorized by dew point.

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Muggy days 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.1d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d 0.0d

This section discusses the wide-area hourly average wind vector (speed and direction) at 10 meters above the ground. The wind experienced at any given location is highly dependent on local topography and other factors, and instantaneous wind speed and direction vary more widely than hourly averages.

The average hourly wind speed in Madrid experiences mild seasonal variation over the course of the year.

The windier part of the year lasts for 3.4 months, from January 27 to May 7, with average wind speeds of more than 7. 9 miles per hour. The windiest month of the year in Madrid is April, with an average hourly wind speed of 8.4 miles per hour.

The calmer time of year lasts for 8.6 months, from May 7 to January 27. The calmest month of the year in Madrid is September, with an average hourly wind speed of 7.2 miles per hour.

Average Wind Speed in Madrid

Average Wind Speed in MadridwindyJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0 mph0 mph3 mph3 mph5 mph5 mph6 mph6 mph8 mph8 mph20 mph20 mph22 mph22 mph24 mph24 mphApr 58.7 mphApr 58.7 mphSep 167.1 mphSep 167.1 mphJan 277.9 mphJan 277.9 mphNowNow

The average of mean hourly wind speeds (dark gray line), with 25th to 75th and 10th to 90th percentile bands.

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Wind Speed (mph) 7. 7 8.2 8.3 8.4 7.7 7.4 7.5 7.3 7.2 7.6 7.8 7.7

The predominant average hourly wind direction in Madrid varies throughout the year.

The wind is most often from the west for 2.0 weeks, from April 4 to April 18 and for 6.2 months, from April 26 to October 31, with a peak percentage of 33% on August 4. The wind is most often from the north for 1.1 weeks, from April 18 to April 26 and for 5.1 months, from October 31 to April 4, with a peak percentage of 32% on April 21.

Wind Direction in Madrid

Wind Direction in MadridNWWNJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0%100%20%80%40%60%60%40%80%20%100%0%NowNowwestnorthsoutheast


The percentage of hours in which the mean wind direction is from each of the four cardinal wind directions, excluding hours in which the mean wind speed is less than 1. 0 mph. The lightly tinted areas at the boundaries are the percentage of hours spent in the implied intermediate directions (northeast, southeast, southwest, and northwest).

To characterize how pleasant the weather is in Madrid throughout the year, we compute two travel scores.

The tourism score favors clear, rainless days with perceived temperatures between 65°F and 80°F. Based on this score, the best time of year to visit Madrid for general outdoor tourist activities is from late May to early October, with a peak score in the second week of September.

Tourism Score in Madrid

Tourism Score in Madridbest timeJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec002244668810107. score

The tourism score (filled area), and its constituents: the temperature score (red line), the cloud cover score (blue line), and the precipitation score (green line).

The beach/pool score favors clear, rainless days with perceived temperatures between 75°F and 90°F. Based on this score, the best time of year to visit Madrid for hot-weather activities is from late June to late August, with a peak score in the last week of July.

Beach/Pool Score in Madrid

Beach/Pool Score in Madridbest timeJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec002244668810108. score

The beach/pool score (filled area), and its constituents: the temperature score (red line), the cloud cover score (blue line), and the precipitation score (green line).


For each hour between 8:00 AM and 9:00 PM of each day in the analysis period (1980 to 2016), independent scores are computed for perceived temperature, cloud cover, and total precipitation. Those scores are combined into a single hourly composite score, which is then aggregated into days, averaged over all the years in the analysis period, and smoothed.

Our cloud cover score is 10 for fully clear skies, falling linearly to 9 for mostly clear skies, and to 1 for fully overcast skies.

Our precipitation score, which is based on the three-hour precipitation centered on the hour in question, is 10 for no precipitation, falling linearly to 9 for trace precipitation, and to 0 for 0.04 inches of precipitation or more.

Our tourism temperature score is 0 for perceived temperatures below 50°F, rising linearly to 9 for 65°F, to 10 for 75°F, falling linearly to 9 for 80°F, and to 1 for 90°F or hotter.

Our beach/pool temperature score is 0 for perceived temperatures below 65°F, rising linearly to 9 for 75°F, to 10 for 82°F, falling linearly to 9 for 90°F, and to 1 for 100°F or hotter.

Definitions of the growing season vary throughout the world, but for the purposes of this report, we define it as the longest continuous period of non-freezing temperatures (≥ 32°F) in the year (the calendar year in the Northern Hemisphere, or from July 1 until June 30 in the Southern Hemisphere).

The growing season in Madrid typically lasts for 7.6 months (232 days), from around March 28 to around November 15, rarely starting before February 27 or after April 22, and rarely ending before October 27 or after December 7.

Time Spent in Various Temperature Bands and the Growing Season in Madrid

Time Spent in Various Temperature Bands and the Growing Season in Madridgrowing seasonJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0%100%10%90%20%80%30%70%40%60%50%50%60%40%70%30%80%20%90%10%100%0%50%Mar 2850%Mar 2850%Nov 1550%Nov 1590%Apr 2290%Apr 2290%Oct 2790%Oct 2710%Feb 2710%Feb 2710%Dec 710%Dec 70%Jan 200%Jan 20Aug 1100%Aug 1100%NowNowvery coldcoldcoolcomfortablewarmhot

very cold

The percentage of time spent in various temperature bands. The black line is the percentage chance that a given day is within the growing season.

Growing degree days are a measure of yearly heat accumulation used to predict plant and animal development, and defined as the integral of warmth above a base temperature, discarding any excess above a maximum temperature. In this report, we use a base of 50°F and a cap of 86°F.

Based on growing degree days alone, the first spring blooms in Madrid should appear around March 12, only rarely appearing before March 1 or after March 30.

Growing Degree Days in Madrid

Growing Degree Days in MadridJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0°F0°F500°F500°F1,000°F1,000°F1,500°F1,500°F2,000°F2,000°F2,500°F2,500°F3,000°F3,000°F3,500°F3,500°F4,000°F4,000°FMar 1288°FMar 1288°FJun 10900°FJun 10900°FJul 181,800°FJul 181,800°FDec 313,910°FDec 313,910°FNowNow

The average growing degree days accumulated over the course of the year, with 25th to 75th and 10th to 90th percentile bands.

This section discusses the total daily incident shortwave solar energy reaching the surface of the ground over a wide area, taking full account of seasonal variations in the length of the day, the elevation of the Sun above the horizon, and absorption by clouds and other atmospheric constituents. Shortwave radiation includes visible light and ultraviolet radiation.

The average daily incident shortwave solar energy experiences extreme seasonal variation over the course of the year.

The brighter period of the year lasts for 3.2 months, from May 13 to August 21, with an average daily incident shortwave energy per square meter above 7.0 kWh. The brightest month of the year in Madrid is July, with an average of 8.1 kWh.

The darker period of the year lasts for 3.5 months, from October 28 to February 13, with an average daily incident shortwave energy per square meter below 3. 2 kWh. The darkest month of the year in Madrid is December, with an average of 2.0 kWh.

Average Daily Incident Shortwave Solar Energy in Madrid

Average Daily Incident Shortwave Solar Energy in MadridbrightdarkdarkJanFebMarAprMayJunJulAugSepOctNovDec0 kWh0 kWh2 kWh2 kWh3 kWh3 kWh4 kWh4 kWh5 kWh5 kWh5 kWh5 kWh6 kWh6 kWh7 kWh7 kWh8 kWh8 kWh9 kWh9 kWh20 kWh20 kWhJul 68.3 kWhJul 68.3 kWhDec 202.0 kWhDec 202.0 kWhMay 137.0 kWhMay 137.0 kWhAug 217.0 kWhAug 217.0 kWhOct 283.2 kWhOct 283.2 kWhFeb 133.2 kWhFeb 133.2 kWhNowNow

The average daily shortwave solar energy reaching the ground per square meter (orange line), with 25th to 75th and 10th to 90th percentile bands.

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Solar Energy (kWh) 2.3 3. 4 4.8 6.1 7.1 8.0 8.1 7.2 5.6 3.8 2.5 2.0

For the purposes of this report, the geographical coordinates of Madrid are 40.417 deg latitude, -3.703 deg longitude, and 2,182 ft elevation.

The topography within 2 miles of Madrid contains only modest variations in elevation, with a maximum elevation change of 472 feet and an average elevation above sea level of 2,114 feet. Within 10 miles contains only modest variations in elevation (781 feet). Within 50 miles contains significant variations in elevation (6,617 feet).

The area within 2 miles of Madrid is covered by artificial surfaces (100%), within 10 miles by artificial surfaces (61%) and cropland (19%), and within 50 miles by cropland (50%) and trees (19%).

This report illustrates the typical weather in Madrid, based on a statistical analysis of historical hourly weather reports and model reconstructions from January 1, 1980 to December 31, 2016.

Temperature and Dew Point

There are 3 weather stations near enough to contribute to our estimation of the temperature and dew point in Madrid.

For each station, the records are corrected for the elevation difference between that station and Madrid according to the International Standard Atmosphere , and by the relative change present in the MERRA-2 satellite-era reanalysis between the two locations.

The estimated value at Madrid is computed as the weighted average of the individual contributions from each station, with weights proportional to the inverse of the distance between Madrid and a given station.

The stations contributing to this reconstruction are:

  • Adolfo Suárez Madrid–Barajas Airport (LEMD, 95%, 9 mi, northeast, -184 ft elevation change)
  • Salamanca Airport (LESA, 2. 7%, 101 mi, west, 413 ft elevation change)
  • Valladolid Airport (LEVD, 2.5%, 107 mi, northwest, 591 ft elevation change)

LEMD, 95%9 mi, -184 ftLESA, 3%101 mi, 413 ftLEVD, 3%107 mi, 591 ft

© Esri, et al.

To get a sense of how much these sources agree with each other, you can view a comparison of Madrid and the stations that contribute to our estimates of its temperature history and climate. Please note that each source’s contribution is adjusted for elevation and the relative change present in the MERRA-2 data.

Other Data

All data relating to the Sun’s position (e.g., sunrise and sunset) are computed using astronomical formulas from the book, Astronomical Algorithms 2nd Edition , by Jean Meeus.

All other weather data, including cloud cover, precipitation, wind speed and direction, and solar flux, come from NASA’s MERRA-2 Modern-Era Retrospective Analysis . This reanalysis combines a variety of wide-area measurements in a state-of-the-art global meteorological model to reconstruct the hourly history of weather throughout the world on a 50-kilometer grid.

Land Use data comes from the Global Land Cover SHARE database , published by the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations.

Elevation data comes from the Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) , published by NASA’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory.

Names, locations, and time zones of places and some airports come from the GeoNames Geographical Database .

Time zones for airports and weather stations are provided by .

Maps are © Esri, with data from National Geographic, Esri, DeLorme, NAVTEQ, UNEP-WCMC, USGS, NASA, ESA, METI, NRCAN, GEBCO, NOAA, and iPC.


The information on this site is provided as is, without any assurances as to its accuracy or suitability for any purpose. Weather data is prone to errors, outages, and other defects. We assume no responsibility for any decisions made on the basis of the content presented on this site.

We draw particular cautious attention to our reliance on the MERRA-2 model-based reconstructions for a number of important data series. While having the tremendous advantages of temporal and spatial completeness, these reconstructions: (1) are based on computer models that may have model-based errors, (2) are coarsely sampled on a 50 km grid and are therefore unable to reconstruct the local variations of many microclimates, and (3) have particular difficulty with the weather in some coastal areas, especially small islands.

We further caution that our travel scores are only as good as the data that underpin them, that weather conditions at any given location and time are unpredictable and variable, and that the definition of the scores reflects a particular set of preferences that may not agree with those of any particular reader.

Please review our full terms contained on our Terms of Service page.


Provincia de Madrid, Madrid, Spain

© Esri, et al.

Spain in May: Travel Tips, Weather & More


In most areas of Spain, May means the sun is now officially the rule rather than the exception. This is particularly true in Barcelona, which enjoys delicious averages of 68°F (20°C). You’ll also find pleasant weather in the islands and other coastal resort areas. Average high temperatures in Mallorca (72°F/22°C), Canary Islands (74°F/23°), Ibiza (72°F/22°C), and Marbella (76°F/24°C) can indeed be high, but often they hover in the high 60s (Fahrenheit). 

For those arriving and spending time in Madrid, highs are a pleasant 72°F (22°C), with lows occasionally dipping below 50°F (10°C) at night. Spain’s northern Atlantic coast and Basque Country is a bit chillier, with highs around 66°F (18°F) and lows in the low 50s (Fahrenheit). Regardless of where you visit in Spain, though, May is a good month to start enjoying some fun in the sun. 

Crowds & Costs

May is the last month to take advantage of lower airfares before the summer prices kick into high gear. Discounts on hotels in the more popular destinations like Barcelona and Madrid will be negligible due to the pleasant weather and the proximity of May to summer. For the reasons stated above, visitors will be starting to arrive in places like Barcelona and Madrid, but the crowds won’t be as thick as you can count on in June to August. 

Where to Go

May is a great month to visit Madrid because it’s right before the time when summer heatwaves make a visit to the capital an endurance test rather than a pleasant vacation. Take advantage of the more moderate weather and plan some outdoor activities, be it a walking/cycling/segway tour of the city, visiting the Prado Museum, strolling the famous El Retiro Park, a “secret” foodie tour of local markets/tapas bars, or perhaps a day trip to the rock formations at Cuenca and the Enchanted City.

Also, if you’re in Madrid during the middle of the month, be sure to attend the Festival of San Isidro (more on this below), which features a dizzying array of events and parties. Aside from that, you can’t go wrong heading for the Mediterranean coast. Everywhere from Barcelona down to Málaga and Cádiz in the Andalusia region will be ripe for fun in the sun due to the pleasant weather. 

Plan your trip to Spain

Customize your trip with help from a local travel specialist.

Plan Your Trip

What to Do

May might be the month of most controversy, as mid-May officially kicks off bullfighting season. Whether you view these contests as a cultural touchstone or a relic of barbarism from a bygone age, bullfighting, for the moment, does still exist in this country (although it’s been outlawed in Barcelona). Travelers with an interest in Hemingway’s Spain can attend weekly bullfighting events in Madrid (at the Plaza de Toros) and Andalusia (in the cities of Málaga and Ronda, among others), and Valencia (at the Plaza de Toros).

For a different kind of culture, you could opt for a food tour of the country. Like Italy and France, Spain is a nation that puts a premium on cuisine, and its gastronomy has become the stuff of legend. After enjoying the food in Madrid, you could head to the Mediterranean coast and partake of the tapas culture in the Andalusia region as well as in Barcelona. You should also visit the coastal city of Valencia, which is the birthplace of Spain’s most famous dish, paella. 

Then there’s what many view as the Holy Grail of food destinations in Spain: San Sebastián. This historic city on the northern Atlantic coast is famous for pintxos, which are tapas-like small plates and single bites that you can find in various bars and cafés here. Walk into any of these eateries in San Sebastián’s historic center and simply point at the morsels that strike your fancy, and you’ll be living the gastronomic dream in no time. 

Events in May

Festival of San IsidroMadrid. The 15 of May kicks off this raucous festival celebrating the patron saint of the city of Madrid. Over a week of festivities, local Madrileños don traditional garb and dance the chotis, a 19th-century hybrid ballroom dance popularized in Madrid. Needless to say, there’s copious drinking, dancing, and general merrymaking. 

Traveling to Spain in March? Check out these great itineraries

Best of Barcelona & Ibiza – 8 Days. This eight-day itinerary is an ideal Mediterranean holiday that takes advantage of May’s pleasant weather. Kick off the trip in Barcelona and then jet off to Ibiza for five days of white-sand beaches and sparkling seas. 

Highlights of Spain’s Capital & Andalusia – 10 Days. Start in the capital city with a walking tour, then make your way south with a stop in Cordoba, followed by the cultural scene of Seville. Madrid is a great destination if you’re going to be in Spain during the Festival of San Isidro. 

More Helpful Information 

Spain in April
Spain in June
Best Time of Year to Visit Spain
How Many Days to Spend in Spain

Spain in November: Travel Tips, Weather & More


November sees the arrival of late-fall rains and storms. During this month, many places in the nation, including the famously sunny Mediterannean coast, will have more cloudy and wet days. If you’re planning on visiting Basque Country, know that offshore storms often hit the northern Atlantic coast first and hardest. This is also one of the chillier of Spain’s regions during November, as cities like San Sebastián and Bilbao see average highs in the low 60s (Fahrenheit), which dip into the mid-40s at night.

Madrid is a tad cooler than the north, with an average high of 59°F (15°C) and temps dipping into the low 40s at night. Even temperatures in Barcelona and the party-mad island of Ibiza are mostly too chilly for beach fun, as average highs typically only reach the low-to-mid-60s. Your best bet for finding sunbathing and (possibly) swimming weather is in Spain’s southern Andalusia region and the Canary Islands, as temperatures here still peak in the 70s.

Crowds & Costs

Although Spain is never completely tourist-free—it’s too beautiful a country for that prospect to ever become a reality—the crowds will be decidedly thin by November. At the very least, this means you won’t have to contend with masses of people and the most famous sites in the country, be it the museums of Madrid and Barcelona, the City of Arts and Sciences in Valencia, and the ancient basilicas and grand plazas throughout the country.

The weather might not be ideal in November, but at least you can take advantage of low-season prices. With no major holidays this month (other than All Saints Day; more on that below), you can book cheap flights throughout most of November. You should also be able to score discounts of up to 30% and possibly more on hotels in most of the major cities throughout the country. 

Where to Go

November is perfect to discover Spain’s southern Andalusia region, as the oppressive heat in summer makes walking tours of historic cities like Málaga, Córdoba, and Seville an arduous task. While you could certainly opt for a drive around Marbella and the Costa del Sol, a rainout would ruin that coastal scenery; best to keep any road-tripping plans to the interior of Andalusia. The ancient mountaintop city of Ronda, one of the most evocative places in the country, would be a perfect stop on a November itinerary. 

Really, it’s impossible for any of Spain’s historic cities to be ruined by lousy weather. Even though some days might be rainy and gloomy, Madrid is a solid prospect, despite the cooler temps. The beautiful fall foliage on display in El Retiro Park is reason enough to go, and if rainouts are an unfortunate reality, spend time indoors in Madrid at the Museo de Prado or in Barcelona at the Museu Nacional d’Art de Catalunya and the Picasso Museum

What to Do

If you have your sights set on a beach holiday, then the most optimum location in November is likely the Canary Islands. Tenerife, in particular, enjoys higher temperatures during the day than almost anywhere else in Spain, often peaking in the mid-70s (Fahrenheit). The water may still be chilly, but if you’re determined, you can enjoy a dip in the sea. Plus, many cloudless days will likely yield the perfect weather to go sunbathing. 

One of the best activities in Tenerife that can be enjoyed is whale watching. There are resident pods of pilot whales and bottlenose dolphins in these waters year-round, so November is as good a month to embark on a tour as any. If you’d like to spot migratory sperm whales, head to the southernmost edge of Andalusia and the town of Tarifa, which runs whale-watching boat tours off the coast.

And if you’re in Spain in early November and want to imbibe, head to Andalusia. November marks their annual weeklong celebration of sherry, and it’s quite a party (more on this below). 

Events in November

All Saints Daynationwide. November 1 is a national holiday to celebrate and honor deceased relatives and friends. Businesses are closed, and many people observe the holiday by placing flowers on the graves of friends and relatives. 

International Sherry WeekJerez de la Frontera. This annual event usually occurs in early November and is held in Andalusia’s southwestern city of Jerez de la Frontera (where sherry was invented). It’s a fun weeklong celebration featuring sherry tastings, sherry pairing menus, sherry cocktails, and other sherry-themed events. 

Traveling to Spain in November? Check out these great itineraries

Best of Andalusia’s Interior – 8 Days. This eight-day cultural tour takes you from Seville to Granada in Spain’s southernmost region of Andalusia. The interior is the perfect area of Andalusia to visit in November, as the inclement weather can be a wild card for coastal trips. 

Highlights of Central & Southern Spain – 12 Days. This complete itinerary highlights some of Spain’s most enchanting cities, featuring Madrid, Sevilla, and Barcelona. These are great cities to visit in November, as there are plenty of restaurants and museums to enjoy if it’s rainy outside. 

More Helpful Information

Spain in October
Spain in December
Best Time of Year to Visit Spain
How Many Days to Spend in Spain

The Best Time To Visit Madrid, Spain

One of Europe’s most vibrant and enticing cities, Madrid rewards travelers with unforgettable experiences at any time of the year. Each season, however, has something unique to offer, whether is glorious festivals, amazing weather, or affordable prices. So, deciding when to go really depends on your budget, and what you want to see and do in the Spanish capital.

To help you plan the trip of your dreams, we’ve created a guide breaking down the best time to visit Madrid according to weather, activities & events, and value for money. Have a look below!

Find Places To Stay In Madrid, Spain

Weather in Madrid

Madrid has a Mediterranean climate and its high altitude (2,188 ft above sea level) and distance from the moderating effect of the sea, means that temperatures vary from season to season.  

Winters are cold and mostly sunny, but rain, sporadic snowfalls, and frosts can occur between December and February. Summers are hot, dry, and mostly clear, with temperatures peaking at around 32ºC during the warmest month, July.

Madrid, alongside Athens, is the driest capital in Europe, meaning rainfall is limited throughout the year. Precipitation is usually concentrated in the autumn and spring.

Madrid Travel Seasons

Shoulder Season: March-May, September-October

The shoulder season in Madrid corresponds to the Spring (March-May) and Fall (September-October) seasons, respectively. Temperatures are comfortable, reliably hovering around pleasant 20ºC, and there aren’t as many tourists if compared to the bustling summer months. 

Proving balmy weather and fewer crowds, the shoulder season creates the most perfect conditions for those seeking to explore the top attractions in Madrid — from the Royal Palace to the Santiago Bernabéu Stadium —  without facing massive lines of tourists.

Peak Season: June-August and Christmas Time

The summer months of June to August are the high season in Madrid. Temperatures can get scorchingly hot, rising as high as 32ºC, making it a challenge to explore the city on foot sometimes. Accommodations and flights are usually pricier at this time of year, which brings a thick inflow of tourists from all around the world. 

During the summertime, many locals are on vacation, meaning that some businesses will be closed. 
However, summer is the most vibrant and colorful season in the city. The Spanish capital only comes alive with a robust lineup of events, tapas bars are buzzing with cheerful people, and the long-lasting daylight hours create the perfect setting for watching the sunset at the best Madrid rooftops.

Travelers who don’t mind the cold weather will benefit from visiting Madrid during the wintertime. Temperatures are cooler and can plummet as low as 3ºC, but they usually hover at around 8ºC.

Low Season: November, January-February

Travelers who don’t mind the cold weather will benefit from visiting Madrid during the wintertime. Temperatures are cooler and can plummet as low as 3ºC, but they usually hover at around 8ºC.

Aside from the crisp weather, this season also brings more affordable rates for flights and accommodation, making it a great option for budget travelers visiting Madrid.

However, during the cheerful holiday season, in mid-December, the city is again crowded and overall prices tend to rise.

So, if you’re seeking to save money while visiting Madrid, the best option would be to travel to the city between January and February.

Best Time To Visit Madrid, Spain

For Pleasant Weather

May to mid-June is a prime time for those seeking to experience pleasant weather while visiting Madrid. During these Spring months, you’ll find pleasant temperatures, which can peak at around 24ºC. 

Aside from mild temperatures, Spring in Madrid also brings sunny and clear days, as well as occasional mountain air and light showers, that create exceptional freshness.

This comfortable climate design a glorious setting for exploring the city on foot, and enjoying a myriad of outdoor activities such as visiting Madrid’s lush urban parks like El Retiro and Parque del Oeste.

Fall is a great alternative to Spring. The weather is crisp, the crowds are light, and the golden foliage is a treat to sore eyes!

For Lowest Prices & Fewer Crowds

The low season months of November, January, and February are great times for travelers seeking to visit Madrid on a budget. Hotel prices, as well as flight rates, tend to get lower as there are fewer tourists visiting the city before and after Christmas.

January also happens to be the prime shopping season in Madrid. This means that you’ll be able to enjoy not only affordable accommodation prices but possibly score amazing discounts in the city’s world-class stores.

Named rebajas, the sale season for clothing in Madrid normally begins on January 7th and lasts until March and even April. Discounts start at 20%, reaching up to 70%. 

Recommended Read: The Top 6 Hostels In Madrid
The 7 Best Places For Shopping in Madrid

For Activities & Events

Truth be told: Madrid is home to a host of top-caliber festivals that keep tourists and locals on their toes all year round. So, from January until December, travelers can enjoy a variety of bustling events that range from typical Spanish celebrations to electrifying music concerts.

Springtime, for instance, is filled with dazzling festivities. In April, there are the famous Semana Santa celebrations (Holy Week), considered one of the best festivals in Spain, May is when Dos de Mayo, takes place to commemorate the day that Spain gained independence.

The summertime also brings an array of dazzling events such as the colorful Madrid’s Pride, one of Europe’s largest, and Noches del Botánico, which features a range of taking place all month long in the Royal Botanical Gardens.

If you’re visiting the Spanish capital during fall or winter, no need to worry about missing Madrid’s vibrant summer festivals — as these colder seasons also spoil travelers with a selection of fabulous events. Spain’s national day, October 12, is commemorated with military processions and street celebrations throughout the entire city, while the holiday season brings a variety of Christmas Markets to Madrid!

Browse. Book. Stay.  

CuddlyNest provides all accommodations to all travelers at the best price. Find unlimited travel inspiration on our blog and social media channels.

You Might Also Like:

Spain Travel Apps
The 7 Best Places For Shopping in Madrid
10 Best Hotels In Madrid, Spain
The 11 Best Tapas Bars in Madrid
The 12 Best Neighborhoods in Madrid
Madrid With Kids: 12 Fun Things To Do In The City
Best Museums In Madrid, Spain
Tourist Attractions in Barcelona
Best Cities to visit in Spain
La Tomatina Festival, Spain
Eating Tapas In Granada, Spain
Vegan Restaurants in Alicante, Spain
A Complete Guide To The 15 Best Festivals In Spain
The 10 Best Spanish Cheese You Should Try
The Ultimate Guide to Lobos Island, Spain

Madrid, Spain – April Weather

What’s the Weather Like in Madrid in April

Rain and Average Sunshine Hours

April in Madrid can be summed up in one word rainy! Having said that, provided you bring your umbrella, you can easily explore the city to your heart’s content. It’s not all bad news however, because despite the fact that you can expect an average of 50mm of rain throughout April, around 10 days, there are also 7 hours of sunshine per day to enjoy, which makes Madrid a great destination during this month of the year.


Temperature-wise, you can expect an average of 11°C, with an average high of a very warm 17°C, and a low of 5°C during the evenings, making an evening walk very comfortable indeed. Clothing-wise, bring light layers but make sure to wrap up warm during the evenings to ward off the cold. 

Madrid Hotels in April

Barcelo Emperatriz Hotel

Located in the upmarket Salamanca neighbourhood, Barcelo Emperatriz Hotel easily stands as one of the most lavish boutique accommodations in the city and is ideal for visitors who don’t want to spare any luxuries or comforts when they visit Madrid. Featuring striking modern artwork throughout, the hotel’s 146 rooms come in a variety of shapes and sizes, offering balconies and luxury bathrooms. Guests can dine at the gourmet Mutis Restaurant, while breakfast is served daily until 11am. There’s also an onsite bar, room service, laundry and fitness facilities.

Hotel Silken Puerta America

Another luxury accommodation you’ll want to consider is the Hotel Silken Puerta America. An easy walk from Cartagena Metro station, the hotel is striking throughout and there’s a big emphasis on modern architecture and design; the rooms and suites reflect this. All rooms offer WiFi, TVs and city views; suites add lounge areas. The hotel is home to two modern restaurants, a bar, fitness centre, a lounge bar with a retractable roof and live music.

Hotel Praktik Madrid

Situated opposite the Gran Via Metro station, Hotel Praktik Madrid promises affordable, comfortable accommodation in the centre of town. Featuring shabby chic decorations and furniture throughout, the hotel comprises a range of rooms and suites, some of which have balconies with city views. Amenities are many and include a business centre for conferences, a chilled rooftop terrace area, along with a cosy fireplace lounge which is ideal for winter afternoons.

Bars and Restaurants

La Libre

Halfway between a cafe and bookshop, La Libre is a Lavapies hangout spot that makes a great place to start the day over a filling breakfast or stop by for a light snack and a cup of coffee. Very much a neighbourhood cafe, you can be assured a warm welcome at La Libre. They also run a number of workshops and cultural presentations throughout the year.

La Musa Latina

For dependable tapas, head to La Musa Latina. Situated on a side street off the Calle de Segovia, the culinary offerings at this place are many and include traditional Spanish tapas with modern fusions and unique ingredients. Open throughout the day, you’re welcome to dine here for breakfast or head here later in the day to chill out with a cocktail in the lounge bar. Its popularity with locals attests to its reputation as a fine Madrid establishment.

Moulin Chocolat 

Visit Moulin Chocolat to indulge your sweet tooth, where you’ll be blown away by the array of sweet treats, from cakes and pastries to chocolates and ice cream. Situated along the busy Calle Alcala, the macarons here come particularly recommended and are reputed to be some of the best in Madrid.

Gin Club

If gin’s your drink of choice, head to Gin Club in Chueca, which is earning a reputation for being one of the city’s hippest new bars. Located inside the El Mercado de la Reina, this subdued evening haunt exudes a sophisticated atmosphere and makes an unbeatable place to catch up with friends over a tasty alcoholic concoction.

Things to do in Madrid in April

El Rastro

It’s no secret that Madrid is a shopper’s paradise and you’ll find whatever you’re in search of here, from high-street fashion, to antiques, luxury goods and much more. The city is home to many charming flea markets, the largest and most enduring being El Rastro, which is held every Sunday during the year between Calle Embajadores and the Ronda de la Toledo. A great wealth of products can be bought here, both second-hand and new. Keep a sharp eye on your belongings, as pickpockets are known to frequent the area, and enjoy the atmosphere of this buzzing and eclectic market.

Temple of Debod

Dating back to the 2nd century BC, the Temple of Debod is certainly one of Madrid’s more unusual monuments and was donated to the city in the 1970s by the Egyptian government to protect it from flooding and natural disasters. Having lived a long and varied history, the temple was built in honour of the god Amum and the goddess Isis, and was subsequently closed off from the 6th century onwards with the advent of Christianity in the region. Nowadays it’s been restored to its former glory and every effort has been made to preserve the structure. A maximum of 30 people can be admitted inside at any one time, for a length of 30 minutes tops.

Fuente de Cibeles

Nestled in the centre of the city, Cibeles Square is one of Madrid’s most impressive public places and is a must-visit for architecture aficionados. Punctuated by the elaborate Fuente de Cibeles (Cybeles Fountain), the square is surrounded by the Buenavista Palace, the Casa de America and Palace of Communications. The fountain isn’t purely ornamental, however; it originally provided water for the people of Madrid through two standpipes, one of which would supply water to houses and the other to people.

Gran Via

Another Madrid thoroughfare that can’t be avoided and deserves a visit alone owing to its architectural grandeur is the Gran Via. Home to many of the city’s shops and businesses, this sweeping boulevard forms the backbone of the city and is due to be pedestrianised this year (2018). Widely considered to be one of the greatest urban planning projects of the city, whole neighbourhoods were bulldozed to make way for this elegant boulevard.


A short train journey from Madrid, Segovia is the perfect option for a day trip if you’re looking to savour some history and culture away from the hubbub of the Spanish capital. Listed as a UNESCO World Heritage Site in 1985, the town’s singular most impressive sight is the 166-arch aqueduct that lords over the surrounding area, paying homage to the legacy of the Roman Empire in Spain.

Not Found (#404)

Not Found (#404)

Whoops…something went wrong!

Sorry, we didn’t find the page you were looking for



Railway tickets


Countries and cities


Date there

Date back




Dog sled tours

Snowmobile tours

Quad bike tours

Walking tours


Bike tours


Ski tours

Diving and snorkeling

Jeep tours

Surfing and SUP tours

Combined tours

Horse tours


Excursion tours

Ski trips

Helicopter tours

Fishing tours

Fitness and yoga tours


Railway tours

Are you looking for one of the sections below?



Railway Tickets



We have made a selection of interesting articles for you!

Leave feedback


Thank you very much 🙂

Your feedback is very important to us and will be posted on the service as soon as possible.

What is characteristic of the April weather in Madrid

Is April in the yard? If you have long dreamed of visiting the Spanish capital, then this is the right time. The weather in Madrid in April, although slightly rainy, is very favorable for visiting the city. In summer it becomes unbearably hot and dry here, but in spring – grace! In this article you will find brief information about air temperature, cloudiness, precipitation and other characteristic phenomena for April weather in Madrid.

The average air temperature during April is 14 degrees during the day and 12 at night. It is difficult to find any regularity in the rise or fall of temperature here, the April weather in Madrid is somewhat unstable. During the day, the air temperature ranges from 8 to 21 degrees, and at night from 7 to 19 degrees. There are frequent cases when the air temperature during the day is equal to the night temperature or the difference between them is 1-2 degrees. Agree, this weather is perfect for walking around the city of palaces and parks. When everything around is full of riot of colors and high spirits of spring, any trip becomes unforgettable.

Do you want warmth and comfort? Then it is worth waiting for the end of spring – in May the weather in Madrid enters the “take-off” summer line.

When April knocks on the window…

… then it often rains in Madrid. Although the sun shines for 5 hours longer than in March, but the amount of precipitation in April increases. For a month it can rain up to 10 times, sometimes whole boats can go. Thunderstorms are possible 1-2 times a month. There are practically no clear days, mostly cloudy or partly cloudy. When it rains it is not overcast, so the mood does not fall from the weather. A wonderful combination of cheerful spring rain, sunshine and warm temperatures encourages walks and new experiences. In April, the Spaniards celebrate a large number of Christian holidays, including Holy Week and Easter. Also a famous event in April is the Madrid runners’ marathon. As a rule, there are at least 120 thousand participants in the race, and more than a million onlookers who came to support their idols. And the weather in Madrid in April is just right for a mobile pastime. With the right approach, visiting the capital of Spain at this time will not leave an unpleasant aftertaste: do not forget to put warm clothes in your travel bag – Madrid April is unpredictable!


After analyzing all of the above, your desire to spend April in Madrid will surely not disappear, and if it was not there, then it will certainly appear! Puerta del Sol with a “zero” kilometer, the main square of the city Plaza Mayor, the fountain of Cybele, the royal palace, the cathedral and many other architectural monuments and museums – you can see all this with your own eyes. In addition, you do not have to suffer from unbearable heat and dry summer air. On the contrary, the weather in Madrid in April is moderately humid and quite warm. Below is a table containing data on air temperature during the day and at night in Madrid during April.

8÷18 5 9÷24 5÷19 6 9÷24 6÷22 7 9÷26 7÷22 8 13÷27 9÷24 9 13÷26 11÷23 10 15÷24 11÷26 11 15÷24 11÷23 12 13÷23 10÷18 13 12÷25 11÷22 14 8÷26 7÷22 15 10÷24 8÷21 16 12÷24 7÷24 17 17÷26 16÷26 18 11÷26 9÷25 19 13÷21 11÷18 20 16÷19 14÷18 21 13÷21 11÷16 22 12÷19 9÷16 23 15÷20 12÷18 24 14÷22 12÷17 25 13÷20 15÷16 26 12÷19 9÷17 27 11÷21 8÷19 28 8÷22 5÷23 29 8÷22 7÷21 30 10÷22 8÷21

Holidays in Spain – weather, attractions, beaches

Spain has been one of the most popular tourist destinations for many years. This situation is fully justified: a variety of excursions to interesting places, a high level of service in hotels, unique nature, warm sea and clean beaches undoubtedly attract travelers from all over the world. In 2011 alone, more than 600,000 Russian tourists visited this country. Currently, a process is underway to facilitate obtaining a visa, and in addition, the number of flights to the shores of sunny Spain is constantly increasing.

How to get to Spain

Transaero, Aeroflot and Iberia operate regular flights from Moscow to Madrid and Barcelona. You can also fly to Barcelona with Vueling and S7 flights. Many charters fly to Alicante, Palma de Mallorca, Malaga, Tenerife. Between August and September you can get a direct flight to Ibiza.

From Kazakhstan you can fly to Spain by air carriers: Turkish Airlines, Aeroflot, Lufthansa with connections in Moscow, Istanbul, Frankfurt, Amsterdam. The flight time, taking into account all connections, is 8 hours to Madrid, 7 hours to Barcelona. Ukraine International Airlines fly to Madrid and Barcelona from Kyiv. You can get to Spain from Minsk only with connections in Europe.


It is forbidden to bring drugs, some types of medicines, weapons, ammunition and explosives into the country. Import of currency is unlimited. Amounts over 10 thousand euros are subject to mandatory declaration. It is allowed to export from the country previously imported currency in the amount specified during the declaration. In Spain, you can import duty-free: food and household items within reasonable limits for personal use, one liter of spirits, 2 liters of wine, 200 cigarettes. Photo equipment, video cameras, radio equipment are subject to mandatory declaration at customs. The import of film equipment must be authorized by the consular section of the Spanish Embassy. It is forbidden to export antiques, items of historical value, weapons from the country without special permission.

Hotels in Spain

Each region of Spain sets its own classification rules for hotels located in its territory. Resort hotels are most often located in small towns, next to many restaurants, discos, bars and shops. They usually do not have their own beach. The use of swimming pools and sun loungers in such hotels is completely free. Many hotels do not have animators, and children’s clubs are open only in summer. Indoor swimming pools, on the contrary, are closed to vacationers during the summer season. Tourists often prefer 2 * -3 * hotels located in the city center, because they come there only to spend the night, and spend the rest of their time on sightseeing trips. Hotels in ski resorts of the highest level. The choice of hotel depends on the region you decide to go to. For youth recreation, for example, Surf Mar 4 * and Santa Rosa 3 * are suitable. For family holidays – Palas Pineda in Costa Dorada, Bitacora 4 * in Tenerife. Hotels in Madrid, Barcelona, ​​Valencia are suitable for an individual holiday.

Attractions and activities

The capital of Spain is Madrid, one of the most beautiful cities in the world. Tourists should definitely visit this beautiful city, which has a colossal architectural and cultural heritage. Here, the culture of the Middle Ages and modernity are intertwined, and huge business centers border on ancient castles. Madrid has its own original architecture that you will not find anywhere else in the world. The Prado Museum (Museo del Prado), which is located in an 18th-century building erected by architect Juan de Villanueva, is considered to be the hallmark of the city. In the museum you can see a collection of world-famous masterpieces of such geniuses as Goya, Velasquez, Zurbaran, Ribalt, Raphael, Titian, Rembrandt, Bosch, Lauren, Rubens, Botticelli, Fra Angelico, Dürer. Currently, the museum has 8,600 exhibits open to visitors, located on a huge area.

Tourists wishing to get to know Spanish culture better will be interested in visiting the famous museum – the Reina Sofia Center for the Arts (Museo Nacional Centro de Arte Reina Sofia). There are collections of paintings and photographs, cinema and sculpture.

A striking sight of the Spanish capital is the majestic Royal Palace (Palacio de Oriente), erected in 1734 by order of Philip the Fifth. The construction of this monument of history and architecture was led by the best Italian architects. The palace still impresses with its grandeur and luxury. Today it is open for visiting residents and guests of the city.

What would Madrid be without its famous Retiro Park (Real Parque del Buen Retiro)! The park was created in the 17th century for the recreation of the royal family. Currently, it occupies 150 hectares of land, more than 15 thousand trees have been planted in it. In addition, the Retiro Park is a real open-air museum. On its territory are located: the monument of Alfonso the Twelfth, the gardens of Cecilio Rodriguez, the Glass Palace, the only statue in the world dedicated to the devil, created in the 19th century by Ricardo Belver.

Valencia is the third largest city in the country. For some reason, our tourists are not so well known, and in vain! This is an amazingly beautiful city where you can have a good rest and see many sights. For example, visit the City of Arts and Sciences, the Central Market, climb the 50-meter high bell tower of the Miguelete Cathedral and admire the beauties of the city. In Valencia, you can go to a unique zoo – a biopark, which is equipped with the latest equipment that allows you to completely imitate the habitat of different animal species. Here are collected 250 species of living creatures from all continents of the Earth.

Speaking of Spain, one cannot leave aside the most beautiful region of Catalonia. Catalonia is located in the northeast of the Iberian Peninsula, on one side it borders the warm Mediterranean Sea, and on the other, the majestic Pyrenees. In Catalonia there are popular resorts: Costa Dorada, Costa Brava, Costa de Marasme. The cities of this region have many attractions, and the capital of Catalonia, Barcelona, ​​is actually a museum city. Its famous places: Park Güell, created by the famous architect Gaudi, the singing fountains of Montjuic, the Sagrada Familia, the Ramblas, the Picasso Museum.

In the ancient cities of Girona and Tarragona, literally everything is saturated with antiquity. Fragments of the buildings of the conquering Romans have been preserved here: an amphitheater, a coliseum, an aqueduct, a forum.

Art lovers should visit the Salvador Dalí Museum in Figueres. The famous artist was born and raised in this city. In the museum you can not only admire his paintings, but also get into a special surreal world created by the genius. The grave of the artist is located in the same building of the museum.

Spain is famous for its tourist routes to holy places. In Barcelona you can visit the monastery of Montserrat, in Zaragoza, the monastery of St. Pilar, in Huesca, the monastic ensemble of Torreciudad. Over 10 million tourists visit these monasteries every year.

Restaurants and local cuisine

Spain has a large number of regional cuisines. New region – new traditions, new dishes. The most famous Spanish dish is paella – pilaf with seafood. In general, seafood in this country is very often used to prepare all kinds of dishes: anchovy pate, octopus salad with zucchini, shrimp romeresco, etc. Initially, paella was called a frying pan in which rice, meat, seafood and vegetables were fried, then the pan began to be called “paella”, and what is cooked in it “paella”. The national dish of the Spaniards is also considered to be jamon – dried pork ham. This dish is over 800 years old. During this time, all possible cooking methods were tried, until the chefs finally found the perfect recipe.

Catalonia is known for its original dishes: escudella soup, alioli garlic and olive oil sauce, monkfish fish soup.

As for alcohol in Spain, it is worth trying white wines “Ampurdan” and “Penedos”, sherry from the south-west of Andalusia, semi-sweet wine “Malvasia”.

When choosing a Spanish restaurant, you need to pay attention to the number of forks on the table (from one to five). They indicate the category of this institution. In restaurants, before ordering, they serve “tapas” – snacks that can be considered quite a satisfying separate meal.


Spain is one of the world’s shopping capitals. Here are all the most famous brands of great designers. And in addition to huge shopping centers, there are so-called “shop villages”. Major cities host regular haute couture shows. The best place for shopping is the city of Barcelona. There are a huge number of fashion boutiques, fashion houses, shopping and entertainment centers where you can buy high-quality stylish items at an affordable price. Diagonal Street is a center of pilgrimage for shopaholics from all over the world, it runs through the entire city and consists of almost the same outlets.

If after visiting shopping malls and boutiques you still have space and money for shopping, you can buy Spanish wine, jamón ham, cheeses, souvenirs with the country’s symbols, wooden trinkets, earthenware. In Spain, surprisingly beautiful and expensive lace and skillful silk embroidery are made. It is also worth bringing a bottle of sherry and malvasia from Spain.

Shops are open from 9 am to 8 pm, with a siesta break (from 1 pm to 4 pm). On Saturday, the working day in retail outlets until one in the afternoon, and on Sunday the shops are closed.


By European standards, Spain is a large country, so it has a well-developed air service between cities. There are airports in all major cities: Madrid, Valencia, Barcelona, ​​Granada, Seville, Zaragoza. There are several types of trains in the country. The most comfortable are AVE. They go mainly between the two capitals: Madrid and Barcelona. Passenger trains are called “Expresso”, fast trains “Talgo”. In addition, almost any city and tourist center of the country can be reached by bus. The fare varies depending on the season, time of day, travel distance and even the day of the week.

Buses, electric trains, subways and taxis serve as urban transport. Transport, as in any other country, runs on schedule, the cost of a bus ride and a metro ride is the same.

Spain is a very convenient country in terms of travel. Every major city here is simply obliged to have special “tourist buses”. The route of such a bus basically covers all local attractions and, having paid about 15 euros, you can go around almost the entire city in 2-3 days.

Spain’s roads are in good condition and almost all are free, so renting a car can be a good option for traveling. The rental price ranges from 30 to 80 euros per day. To rent a car, you need to be over 23 years old, have a passport and an international driving license issued at least 2 years ago. Drivers who do not fasten their seat belt while driving can face a very large fine. The speed of movement in the city should not exceed 40 km per hour, outside the city – 100 km per hour, on the highway – 120 km per hour.

If you decide to rent a car, you should not save money and look for small rental offices, otherwise you may be deceived.

The climate of the country

Spain is located in three distinct climatic zones. The southeast coast is influenced by the Mediterranean climate, so there are warm short winters and hot dry summers. The swimming season lasts from early summer to October. The average temperature is 32 degrees.

In the center of the country the climate is sharply continental. Day and night temperatures here can differ by 15 degrees. Winters in this part of the country are cold, summers are dry and hot.

The north of the country is under the influence of the Atlantic Ocean. It has wet, mild winters and moderately warm summers.

The Canarian archipelago has a very stable and warm climate. The average annual temperature here is 20 degrees, the water is warm all year round.

Tourist safety

Before traveling to Spain, it is best to make a photocopy of documents and carry it everywhere with you, and keep your passport in the hotel safe. You should also keep a close eye on your wallet and bag, as “professional” thieves work in the country. It is not necessary to carry all the savings with you throughout the rest. Take only the amount you need, and keep the rest of the money in a safe.

Addresses and telephone numbers.

Embassy of Spain in Russia: Moscow, st. B. Nikitskaya, 50/8. Phone: (495) 690-2993, 690-3054, 916-5400, Fax: (495) 691-9171.

Embassy of the Russian Federation in Madrid: C/Velazquez, 155. Phone/Fax: (91) 562-22-64, 411-08-07.

Consular Section in Madrid: c/Joaquin Costa, 33. Tel/Fax: (91) 411-29-57.

Consulate General in Barcelona: av. Pearson, 34. Phone/fax: (34-93) 280-02-20, 204-02-46, 280-55-41.

Ambulance: 061, Police: 091, rescue service: 122, general information: 095, fire department: 080.

language, country code, currency, capital and weather

  • home

  • Countries

  • Spain

Spain (191)

Tour start dates


Spain (8)

All InclusiveEcoTravel / EcotravelDolce Travel

Today you can book tours from 1 039 BYN to 5 142 BYN

Last minute tours to Spain: 1

Visas from 341 BYN to 689BYN

  • Description
  • Road
  • Map
  • Where to call if anything
  • Tours
  • Public transport and taxis
  • Blog
  • Where to stay
  • National cuisine
  • Dangers
  • Visa
  • Customs
  • Weather forecast
  • Sea and sun
  • Car rental
  • Money
  • Shopping
  • Tips
  • Country and nation features


Holidays in Spain is a sea of ​​colorful experiences, like a bizarre mosaic, where each element contains a part of the country’s richest opportunities.

Many of our fellow citizens prefer to buy sightseeing tours . This is an excellent opportunity to get acquainted with the culture and customs of this amazing country, which gave us such great geniuses of world art as Picasso, Salvador Dali, Goya, Cervantes and many others.

No wonder the country received the title of “open-air museum”. Excursion rest is remarkable for its diversity and richness. There are even special museum tours . After all, it is here that the richest Prado Museum with 6,000 paintings and 400 sculptures, the Picasso Museum, the Museum of Abstract Art, the National Art Museum of Catalonia and many others are located.

Sea holidays attracts tourists with its mild climate, clean beaches of the Mediterranean and Atlantic coasts, high-class hotels, developed infrastructure and a wide range of entertainment for vacationers. Tours to Spain at sea are possible for people with any state of health: there is neither sweltering heat nor frost, but only more than three hundred sunny days a year.

Active recreation is represented by mountain ranges, dozens of national parks and reserves and various water sports. Ski holidays in the mountains, which are available throughout the year, are very popular.

Children’s rest is a real find for any child. Tours for children in Spanish camps can be combined with the study of Spanish or English: a summer vacation at sea with benefits for the school!

Cheerful and carefree vacation created another very important direction of tourism – youth tours famous among teenagers all over the world.

Tours to Spain every year become more affordable for middle-class Belarusians. The country keeps its doors open for everyone who wants to enjoy the unique monuments of architecture and the famous Spanish enthusiasm.


Tours are sold together with an air ticket for a charter from Minsk, but only in the summer season – from early June to mid-September.

Those who prefer winter skiing holidays or excursions in the cool season will have to use scheduled flights.

Unfortunately, there is no direct flight from Belarus. You will have to make a transplant in Germany, Austria or Poland. Accordingly, air tickets must be booked for LOT (LOT Airlines), Lufthansa and Austrian airlines flights. In these airlines, the cheapest flights to Spain are from 200 euros in both directions. Very often, these airlines hold promotions and sales, then you can buy tickets online at unspeakably low rates.

When entering the country in a private car, you must have a registration certificate, an international driver’s license and Green Card insurance

Where to call if anything

Police – 091 (National Police), 092 (Local Police)

Rescue – 122

Ambulance – 061

Fire – 080

Inquiry: 095

may vary by region).

How to call Belarus. Dial 00 375, then the city code (Minsk – 17), then the phone number. You can call from almost anywhere: from telephone booths, from telephones in bars and travel agencies, from telephone booths, from a hotel room (a call is several times more expensive). Calls are cheaper after 22:00.

Alternatively, you can activate roaming to Spain.

Public transport and taxis

Public transport in Spain runs strictly according to the schedule, which you can always get at the “reception” or at the porter.

Subway is the most common mode of transport. The metro operates from 6:30 to 1:30.

Buses . You must enter the bus through the front door, while naming the destination, after which the driver will issue a receipt with the fare (for the farthest distances – no more than 30 euros). The fare for the metro and the bus is the same.

Tourist buses , on which the tourist can move any number of times within 2-3 days. A ticket for such a bus costs 15 euros. Tour bus stops are located near the main attractions of the city.

Trains in Spain run only between major cities. There are also electric trains, which are much cheaper than trains and buses.

Ferries run from Valencia and Barcelona to the Balearic Islands, travel time is about 8 hours, the price is 25-30 euros.

Taxi can be ordered mainly in a hotel or cafe (taxi without passengers do not drive around the street). Payment – strictly according to the counter (approximately within the resort – 3-4 euros).

Air in Spain . Sometimes it is most advantageous to use air travel within the country. Planes fly to almost all major cities: Barcelona, ​​Madrid, Malaga, Granada, Valencia, Alicante, Seville, Bilbao, Zaragoza, etc. The most advantageous offers from the Spanish low-cost carrier Vueling.

By car in Andalusia. Autumn route-antidepressant

September 13, 2019

Where to go from Barcelona: 5 cool ideas for a trip to Catalonia

July 18, 2019

Smiling and dancing. How Spain continues to attack the Belarusian tourist market Gotta take it!

May 8, 2018

Ryanair launched 29 new routes to Spain

February 15, 2018

Where to stay

Parador hotels . Such state-owned 4 * hotels “Paradores” exist only here. They are “scattered” in all tourist cities. In translation, “parador” means “inn”, where you can always find an overnight stay. However, in these hotels you can not only spend the night. But also get good nutrition, as well as book excursions.

Hotels in Spain . The peculiarity of the rules of “stardom” of local hotels is that they do not exist. Each region decides for itself which “star” system to develop for its hotels.

Almost all hotels are urban type hotels that do not have their own beaches, located in noisy places with many restaurants, shops and discos.

Sightseeing and excursions are usually organized with accommodation in hotels 2-3 * hotels in the city center, which are a great place to stay: clean, quiet and with continental breakfasts.

Ski tours in Spain, on the contrary, have a huge advantage over excursions: high-class hotels with half-board meals.

Village hotels are located in the vicinity of big cities, they are distinguished by high quality of service and relatively low prices.

Campsites . It is best to come to such places with your own tents, it will cost several times cheaper. The campsites do not have air conditioning, which is almost unimaginable for our tourists during the summer season. The cost is slightly lower than hotels. In a word, camping in Spain is only for true campers who are not afraid of the lack of recreational conditions and high prices.

Apartments are easy to rent. As elsewhere, the cost depends on the season. Out of season, you can rent a 2-room apartment for 300 euros per month, and in season – only a room in such an apartment.

Hostels in Spain are “everywhere”. Prices, of course, are much lower than ordinary hotels, but sometimes the quality leaves much to be desired. This option is most suitable for picky youth.

Early booking of hotels in Spain is very important a few months (sometimes even 7-8) before the start of the summer season. Booking hotels by the sea in advance, you can save up to 50% of the room rate.

National cuisine

The cuisine is based on the following rules: stew in wine, grill, bake with sheep’s cheese, add grated walnuts and sage everywhere.

In Galia, you should try such dishes as “pote”, “caldeiradas”, “pulpo a feira” with boiled octopus, lacun con grelos (pork’s legs with rutabaga leaves), hake a la gallega (fish, stewed in a clay pot).

Basque cuisine is often compared to Georgian cuisine, but, unlike Georgian, Basque cuisine has a large amount of seafood: “pil-pil” (cod in garlic sauce), “marmitako” (potatoes with mackerel), “chouliton de beau » (grilled beef), eel fry.

The north of Spain is famous for its chilindron sauce, made from peppers, onions and tomatoes, which is poured over, for example, ham from Teruel, partridges, lamb cordero, chicken polo el chilindron and much more.

In La Rioja and Navarra, pimientos rellenos (sweet peppers with various fillings), navarro cocifrito (lamb stew with hot spices), asparagus sprouts, young lettuce shoots, cottage cheese and cheese desserts, traditional rolls and fresh fruit are popular in Apple pie order.

Mediterranean cuisine is based on rice, vegetables, herbs, cheese, fish, meat and fruits, richly seasoned with olive oil.

In Catalan cuisine, the most famous are monjete am botifarra (fried pork sausages with white beans), escudella chowder, cuttlefish and olive salad, Catalan partridge, souque de peix (soup from rapa, which is also called monkfish), zarzuela (assorted seafood), paella (pilaf with seafood), rabbit with snails, wild boar roast, mel-and-mato (cottage cheese dessert with honey). Most of the dishes are served with various sauces of unique taste: picada, ali oli, samfaina and sofrito.

The cuisine of Castile and León is based on vegetables: el barco and la bañesa beans, la armunya lentils, fuenesauco peas. In addition, they prepare botillo (a pork dish for which pigs are specially fattened with chestnuts and acorns), game and goat dishes, roast calf, cod and trout dishes, various sausages and many cheeses.

Mussia prepares a special caldero rice.

Pescatos fritos are served in the south of Spain – tiny fried fish that are eaten straight with the bones and head. Also popular are pintxos morunos (prototype of barbecue), habugo (ham from the province of Huelva), gazpacho (cold vegetable soup).

Wines are produced in 57 regions. Wine is something that every visitor should definitely try. The most popular are Vega Sicilia from Valbuena del Duero, from La Mancha – Valdepenas and La Mancha, in Valencia – Utiel Requena, in Murcia – Jumilia, in the Canary Islands – Malvasia , in Aragon – Satepa, in Catalonia – white wines Penedès, Ampurdan, Sangria and Cava champagne, in Jerez de la Frontera (southwest of Andalusia) – Sherry, ” Manzanilla, Fino, Amontillado, Oloroso, Dulce.

In addition to wines, Spain is proud of its liqueurs. Herbal liqueurs are prepared in Ibis and Galicia, Casalla is prepared in Andalusia, spicy Pacharan is prepared in Cavarra, Absinthe is prepared in the Levant.

In Chinchon (near Madrid) they make aniseed vodka, and in the north of the country, Orujo vodka.


Despite the fact that the police are trying to fight crime, street thieves always find loopholes in other people’s pockets. Therefore, be extremely careful, especially in crowds. There are often scammers in tourist centers. Do not respond to requests to exchange money, do not show how much money you have in your wallet (for example, on the street near the food stall), do not allow yourself to be hugged in a friendly way by supposedly friends who suddenly saw you on the street (in a second, such a “friend” will disappear into the crowd with your wallet).

If you decide to travel “savage” and stay in hostels, then keep in mind that you should not rely on the map: hostels may not be indicated there, and signboards with the name of the hostel in cities are sometimes missing or too small. Accordingly, you will have to count on an additional 10-30 Euros for a taxi to travel around the city. Sometimes it is more profitable not to stay in hostels, but to look at the proposed last-minute tours to Spain. It happens that hot tours are much cheaper than a stop in a hostel with the cost of a taxi and food.


Citizens of the Republic of Belarus need a visa to Spain to travel.

There is no Embassy of Spain in Belarus , so you need to contact Embassy of France in Minsk , which is authorized to consider applications for a short-term visa (to open long-term and work visas, you need to contact Embassy of Spain in Moscow ).

Since a short-term tourist or visitor visa is opened at the French Embassy, ​​the package of documents and all the rules for obtaining it are the same as for obtaining a visa to France.

Personal presence is required to submit documents.


The import of funds is not limited, more than 10,000 euros must be declared.

It is allowed to import: up to 200 cigarettes or up to 50 cigars, up to 1 liter of spirits (more than 22 degrees), up to 2 liters of wine, up to 500 g of coffee and 100 g of tea, no more than 50 ml of perfume, 250 ml of toilet water, goods for personal use in the amount of not more than 175 euros per person.

It is forbidden to import fresh products without vacuum packaging, meat and dairy products, lard, canned food and chocolates. If found, they will be subject to confiscation and a fine.

When entering the country, the border guard may require proof of sufficient funds at the rate of 62.4 euros per day per person, but not less than 560 euros for the entire duration of the trip. This can be cash, traveler’s checks, cards (with an account statement in English or Spanish, certified by a bank seal, but not statements from the Internet or letters from banks). In addition, they may be required to provide insurance. In the absence of one of the above conditions, the border authorities may not allow entry into the country, regardless of the category of visa held.

Weather forecast

The climate in Spain is considered to be a subtropical Mediterranean type, but in fact it manifests itself only in the southeast of the country (Extremadura and Andalusia). The average monthly temperature (except for mountainous areas) is always above zero. The coldest season is from December to February and the hottest is from June to September.

The weather in depends entirely on the terrain. So, for example, the Mediterranean coast is characterized by hot, dry summers and mild, short winters. During the swimming season (from June to October) the sea is warm: already in June the water warms up to 19-21 degrees, in August – about 25 degrees, and in September it cools down to 20-23 degrees.

In the east of the coast (including in Catalonia and Valencia) in winter +5..+15С, in summer +18..+30С, rains in September, October and November (in Catalonia – 75-80 mm per month, Valencia – 60-70 mm). The driest time is from July to August (in Catalonia – 40-45 mm per month, in Valencia – 12-14 mm).

The climate is much warmer on the southeastern and southern coasts of the country (including Extremadura and Andalusia): +8..+17С in winter, +18..+30С in summer. Rainy season: from October to March – up to 100 mm per month, from April to September – up to 30 mm of precipitation, but at the same time July and August are drier months, when there is practically no precipitation.

However, the climate in the regions far from the coast is completely different from the Mediterranean. In the center of the country there is a pronounced continental climate, which is characterized by cold winters (+1..+10C) and hot summers (up to +30C, at night +14..+18C), sharp daily temperature fluctuations are characteristic, precipitation is rare – up to 40- 50 mm in July and August – up to 11-12 mm per month.

The north and northwest (from Catalonia to Galicia) are characterized by a maritime Atlantic climate: humid, mild winters and warm, cool summers. The rainiest period is from December to February – 120-140 mm per month at an average temperature of +6..+14C. In the summer from June to September it rains extremely rarely – 30-50 mm per month at a temperature of +12..+24C.

When is the best time to go to Spain?

The tourist season directly depends on the type of holiday. When it comes to ski holidays, here the season lasts throughout the year. If we talk about holidays at sea, then the flows of tourists begin to arrive from the beginning of June until October inclusive. At the height of the season, hotel prices rise to unprecedented levels, so it is better to plan your vacation in advance and book tours to Spain in March or February, thereby saving up to 50% of the cost of a similar summer tour.

Sea and sun

Sea in Spain . The north and west of the country is washed by the Atlantic Ocean, the south and east by the Mediterranean Sea.

The beaches of Spain are public and free. Hotels provide their guests with umbrellas and sunbeds for free, but only on the territory of the hotel (near the pools), on the beaches – for an additional fee – 2-4 EUR per umbrella and the same amount per sunbed per day.

There are more than 1700 beaches here, which made it famous all over the world.

The beaches are very diverse depending on the resort: coarse and fine sand, yellow and gray volcanic, pebble and island beaches, with a wide coastline and secluded coves.

Nudist beaches are located near the town of Maspalomas. So, for example, when purchasing vouchers, it should be borne in mind that the resort of Gran Canaria is a place for nudists of all ages.

Car rental

Car rental is carried out upon presentation of a passport, driver’s license and credit card. The cost of car rental is 30-120 euros per day.

There are toll roads in Spain. For violation of the rules, very high fines are provided (for example, for talking on a mobile phone – 300 euros).


You can exchange currency at any exchange office, travel agency and hotels, but the best rate is in banks. Banks are open Mon-Fri from 9:00 to 14:00, Saturday – until 12:00, day off – Sunday.

Credit cards can be cashed out at all ATMs, of which there are a sufficient number. Most restaurants, hotels and shopping malls accept travelers checks and credit cards.

It is better not to take dollars with you, but to exchange them for euros in advance. The exchange rate of dollars is not favorable, and besides, not every bank will take 100-dollar bills.

What to bring from Spain?

Shopping in this country means buying food rather than souvenirs. Tourists prefer to bring olives and olive oil, wine, jamon, and cheese from there. From souvenirs: products made of wood and clay, shells.

Twice a year (January 7 – end of February and July 1 – end of August) sales are held.

The daily Spanish siesta runs from 13:00 to 16:00. At this time, most establishments close for lunch. Siesta is absent only in the Sierra Nevada.


Tip as service tax is always included in the bill. If you were struck by the service in the restaurant, then you can throw 5-7% on top or round the amount (if it is small). However, keep in mind that this money will not be received by a specific person, but by the entire shift of workers who share tips equally among themselves.

Tipping in a taxi – 5-10%, if you do not eat according to the meter (but by agreement), then no tip is required.

The maids are only allowed tips if they stay in the hotel for more than 2 days, then they can leave 0.5-2 euros on the bed (the maids will not take money from the nightstand). Porters and waiters delivering food to the room – 0. 5-1 euro.

Tipping is not allowed in pubs and discotheques.

Features of the country and nation

The national feature of the Spaniards is their temperamental character. Loud conversations on the street, excessive emotions and gestures, hospitality and kindness are the bright indicators of the Spanish nation.

Residents are particularly fond of lotteries, football and bullfighting.

This is a very sociable people, you can talk with them for hours, and as a result – to leave, while not knowing the name of the interlocutor. There are topics here that are not customary to talk about: death, the age of people and money (especially discussing prices, to a person who has money).

Every day from 13.00 to 16.00 there is a siesta throughout Spain, during which all banks, shops and government offices are closed for lunch.

Madrid Winter, Spring, Summer, Autumn

Since 1562, Madrid has been the one and only capital of Spain. The bright and lively cosmopolitan city is located in the heart of the Iberian Peninsula, on a high plain over six hundred meters, in the province of the same name. One of the most beautiful cities in the world, it is of inestimable political, economic and cultural significance not only in the guise of the Spanish capital, but also as one of the most significant cities in Europe. Find out on the Tour Calendar why the best time to visit Madrid is mid-spring and early autumn.


Madrid is a great city where you can relax all year round!

= “d” .$placeID ?>

} else {
= “ddd” .$placeID ?>


Tourist season in Madrid

The capital of flamenco, the birthplace of the Spanish madmen Cervantes and Salvador Dali, attracts tourists throughout the year. The million-plus city is capricious, majestic, and, if you like, imperial. Both in winter and summer, hundreds of thousands of tourists flock here to touch the centuries-old history that has known ups and downs, to get acquainted with the colossal artistic heritage carefully stored in more than 70 museums, to admire the architectural masterpieces of the Middle Ages, to “disperse” blood in the veins on the famous Spanish bullfight, as well as taste the Spanish Sangria. The main influx of tourists in Madrid is from March to November.

High season in Madrid

The high season in Madrid is uneven. The first tourist influx is observed from March to May, which is the bullfighting season, and the second is from September to November, accompanied by various festivals and concerts. Both periods are due to excellent weather conditions, as the summer in Madrid is quite hot, and in July and August, many cafes and restaurants are closed due to the holiday season of local businessmen.

Low season in Madrid

From July to August and from December to February, the number of tourists in Madrid decreases significantly. This is directly related to unsuitable weather conditions for excursion programs. In summer it is too hot, and in winter it is quite cold. But you should understand that closer to the Christmas holidays, the pace of life in the city begins to gain momentum – this is the time of holiday fairs and sales.

Flight tickets to Madrid →

Prices for hotels in Madrid →

Find a tour in Madrid →

It’s time for the holidays in Madrid

In Madrid, your cultural program will be very rich

When it comes to holidays, Madrid feels at ease. There are a lot of them: the “Procession of the Three Kings” in January, in February before Lent – the “Carnival”, accompanied by the “Burial of the Sardine”, on May 2 they celebrate Madrid Day, from May 15 for two weeks local residents honor the memory of St. Isidro, the patron saint of peasants, from June 9 to 13 – the largest street festival of the city “San Antonio de la Florida”, in September the theater festival “Madrileño” takes place, the time from September to October is marked by the autumn festival of the performing arts “Madrileño”, October 12 – celebrations on the occasion of the National Day of Spain, 9November is the month of the “International Jazz Festival”, December is notable for the Christmas markets at Plaza Mayor and Dia de los Inocentes (analogy of April Fool’s Day).

Football season

A new football season in Madrid starts every September

What else Madrid is strongly associated with is the world-famous football team Real Madrid, whose budget anticipates even the most appetizing expectations. So for some, Madrid is first of all football aerobatics and the Santiago Bernabeu stadium, and secondly – palaces, cathedrals and art galleries.

Sale season

Twice a year the shops of Madrid are filled with real hunters and bargain hunters

Madrid is a real paradise for real shopaholics. Like all metropolitan cities in Europe, Madrid has two main sales seasons: summer and winter. In summer, it starts in early July and ends in late August. In winter, sales begin immediately after the new year and last until the end of the first week of March. From year to year, sales dates may shift by a few days. The latest trend has shown that the discount season in Madrid opens earlier than in other cities in Spain.

Bullfighting season

The opening of the bullfighting season falls on March

It is impossible to imagine Madrid in a break from bullfighting. The season starts in March and ends in mid-October. At the same time, the most significant battles take place in May. The bullfighting season is not only bullfights, but traditions, parades and ritual processions.

Climate in Madrid

Madrid is one of the sunniest cities in Europe; it is not without reason that its central square was given the name “Puerta del Sol”, which in Spanish sounds like “the square of the Sun”. Moreover, it ranks 4th in the ranking of the hottest European capitals. Its geographic location, terrain and location along the city of the Mansanaris River contributed to the formation of a mixed climate type: Continental with Mediterranean features with an average annual temperature of 14 ° C. Summers are hot and dry, while winters are cold and rainy. Madrid is the highest capital in Europe, so even in summer the nights will be very cool. In general, the climate of Madrid is changeable with a wide range of temperature extremes.

Madrid in spring

Spring in Madrid smells of freshness, bright sun rays penetrate the city, illuminating everything around

Spring in Madrid is almost the best time of the year. Very sunny, warm. Fresh mountain air allows you to breathe deeply, enjoying every breath. It rains periodically. By evening, the air becomes frosty, but during the day the air temperatures rise again to 17 °C-22 °C. In the spring, Madrid is transformed, it is as if a new fresh breath of life has been breathed into it. More than 40 Madrid parks, as if by magic, are dressed in green outfits. Citizens are increasingly getting out for walks. Two places that are particularly lively in spring are the Retiro Park and the Plaza Mayor. Among the locals, the enthusiastic faces of tourists are already easily distinguishable. 10 days 11 days Humidity 60% 60% 60%

Madrid in summer

Summer in Madrid is very hot, many people try to leave the city

Summer in Madrid is quite hot and dry – the thermometer in the daytime stays above 30 °C. However, it is not uncommon for temperatures to rise to 40 °C. Usually during the day the city “dies out” – this is the time of the afternoon siesta. The usual pressure of city traffic is replaced by free roads, as the locals try to go to the Mediterranean resorts. In the interest of health, it is best not to schedule any sightseeing during this time period. In the evening, the city more or less comes to life: rhythmic music begins to be heard from nightclubs and bars, cafes and restaurants are filled with people. This indicates that coolness has descended on Madrid – from 13 ° C to 16 ° C. 3 days 3 days Humidity 45% 40% 40%

Madrid in autumn

Madrid is warm in autumn despite occasional rains

Autumn in Madrid is a refreshing season. The stuffiness and heat subsides, there are pleasant temperatures. September and October are still quite warm. Tourists are starting to come to the city. This is the time of thematic excursion programs, cultural events, as well as the last months of bullfighting. The weather favors long walks. Sometimes there is a light rain, but it does not affect the general mood in any way, since immediately after it the sky is illuminated by the bright rays of the sun. But in November, the real arrival of autumn is felt: there is a decrease in temperatures, the level of humidity and the amount of precipitation begin to increase. At night, you can not do without warm winter clothes, as the thermometer drops to 4 ° C. 10 days 9 days Humidity 50% 70% 75%

Madrid in winter

It is cold in the city in winter, but there are no sharply negative temperatures here

Winter in Madrid is cold, at night the thermometer often drops below 0 °C. During the day, despite the low temperatures, it is very nice and fresh. Despite the fact that winter is a rather wet season, accompanied by rain, there are many days with great weather. The bright blue sky with lush clouds floating across it is illuminated by warm sunbeams. This is a completely different Madrid, in a different guise. Due to the high altitude the city is at, it can experience extremes in temperature fluctuations. Snow, as a rule, is characteristic of neighboring mountain ranges in remoteness.

Find flights to Madrid →

Prices for hotels in Madrid →

Remember that you can buy a tour to Madrid cheaper at – search for tours through hundreds of tour operators! Use our promo codes

AF2000turcalendar for add. discount of 2000 rubles (tours from 100tr),

AF1500turcalendar 1500 rubles (from 80tr) and
AF1000turcalendar 1000 rub (from 60tr)!

Check out the best deals on tours on

If I’m going to Madrid and you want to catch the beautiful weather there and at the same time visit all kinds of cultural events in the city, then the best time to travel will be April, May, early June, as well as September and early October. But keep in mind that the months listed above are the high season in Madrid, so you should be prepared for all the consequences that follow from this. Tour-Calendar wishes you an unforgettable holiday in the sunny Spanish capital!

Holidays in Madrid in July. What to do and see in Madrid? What weather to expect?

Madrid is Spain’s largest city, its cultural capital, a vibrant and fun city that everyone visiting Spain should visit. Madrid has recently become a very visited city among our compatriots. More and more tourists from Russia come to Spain to get acquainted with this magnificent city. And Madrid ranks fourth in the list of the richest cities in Europe! Madrid definitely makes a good impression on tourists, especially those who previously thought that the most beautiful city in Spain is Barcelona.

You can travel to Madrid at any time of the year, but it is much more pleasant to do it during the dry and warm months. For example, in summer. In this article, we will talk about what to do in Madrid in July.

The city is dominated by a continental climate, so the summers there are very dry and hot (but winters, by the way, are much colder than in cities on the Mediterranean coast). The average daily temperature in July in the capital of Spain is + 32- 33 ° C (however, the thermometer at least twice in July can jump up to + 39-40°C, and will fluctuate in this area for a few more days).

The nights in Madrid are very different from the daytime by ten degrees, although they are also warm – an average of + 21-22 ° C, so you can walk at night in the same clothes as during the day (except at the beginning of the month it can be a little cooler when it drops to +14-15 degrees, and then you have to put on a blouse).

July is also the sunniest month of the year in Madrid. There are almost no cloudy days, the probability of precipitation is negligible (on average it is only 2.5 mm of precipitation, which is practically nothing). Summer in the capital is very dry, but no clouds will upset you. Also, in the second month of summer, the winds subside, so on especially hot days it will be hard, and you will want to sit by the air conditioner – because there is no sea nearby.

In general, the weather in Madrid in July is quite hot, but with clear skies and no rain, and warm nights. Take plenty of light summer things with you to Madrid – cold snaps are very unlikely.

What to do in Madrid in July

You can also visit Museum of the Royal Arms , National Archaeological Museum, Museum of the History of the City, Museum of Glassware, National Museum of Science and Technology, Museum of Forensics, Museum of Decorative Arts and others. Separately, one can single out wax museum Museo De Cera , which is located next to Colon Square. The museum has 450 figures, as well as a Horror Train and a Multivision show (a show during which the history of Spain is shown using 27 projectors and a special sound system).

Another large and very famous park is Campo del Moro , behind the royal palace, with alleys and paths that frame lush cedars and chestnuts, and a pond where swans and ducks swim, and peacocks roam the banks.

The youth of the Spanish capital will also have a lot of fun. For example, you can go to the amusement park Casa de Campo (Casa de Campo) . Most of the park is very extreme rides that will definitely appeal to teenagers from 14 years old and young people. However, families with small children can also go there, as there is an area with attractions for kids. The Casa de Campo is open every day during the summer months and is free to enter if you own the 72-hour version of the MadridCard.

And club life in July in Madrid simply “blooms and smells”. By the way, entrance to nightclubs is allowed only from the age of 18, this is strictly monitored. Clubs in Madrid for every taste and budget – from huge seven-level clubs (such as “Teatro Kapital” near the Atoche station) or the world-famous “Pacha” to small clubs with an inexpensive bar where a glass of sangria can cost you just at 2-3 euros. In big clubs, of course, it’s more interesting – if only because various shows are constantly arranged there. Most of the bars in Madrid are located in the city center.

The second half of July is the start of the discount season. Madrid is a great place for shopping . Many expensive boutiques that offer great discounts are in the Salamanca area. Items of the middle price category are mainly sold in large shopping centers (one of the most famous is “Corte Ingles” ). Prices for medium brands here are slightly lower than in Russia, and at the same time, you can find brands that are not sold anywhere in Russia. By the way, if you take into account the fact that tax free tax is returned to foreigners from purchases, in Madrid you can buy a bunch of everything and not at all expensive!

Madrid is very cool and comfortable with children. The Spaniards are very fond of children and take care of their comfort – almost all restaurants have a high chair, a children’s menu, a playroom; each metro station has an elevator where you can go down to the platform, and in the metro cars there is a special place for a stroller. With children in Madrid, you can go to zoo and aquarium, which is next to the Casa del Campo park, or to an amusement park located nearby. By the way, the Madrid zoo is considered one of the best in Europe. More than 3,000 animals live there, there is a pool where dolphin shows are held, a penguinarium, and in general there is a lot of fun. The total area of ​​the zoo is 20 hectares. Moreover, there is an area with a petting zoo (that is, where you can pick up small animals, or at least pet them and feed them from your hand).

You can take the cable car from Paseo del Pintor Rosales (Metro Argüelles or Moncloa) to Casa de Campo. A journey of about 10 minutes and at an altitude of up to 40 meters is a great opportunity to admire the excellent view of the Oeste Park, the Manzanares River, the Egyptian Temple of Debod, the Royal Palace, the Almudena Cathedral and, in fact, the Casa de Campo. Just, the cable car starts to work closer to the summer.

Another way to see the city is to climb tower Faro De Moncloa (Av de los Reyes Católicos), which is 110 meters high, and from the observation deck offers a magnificent panoramic view of the city and the surrounding mountains of Guadarrama.

And, of course, delicious traditional cuisine . Fortunately, there is definitely no shortage of Spanish cuisine restaurants on the streets of Madrid. In addition to numerous meat and vegetable dishes, one of the favorite treats of Madrid is hot chocolate with churros (long crispy sticks that you dip in chocolate and eat).

Tenerife things to do los cristianos: The BEST Los Cristianos Tours and Things to Do in 2022 – FREE Cancellation

Опубликовано: March 30, 2020 в 11:12 am


Категории: Miscellaneous

Top Things You Have To Do In Los Cristianos

  • ATOL protected
  • Price match guarantee
  • £39 low deposits
  • 24-hour on holiday support

Going to


  • Overview
  • Travel guide
  • Travel advice
  • Things to do
  • Currency

In Los Cristianos, things to do are never far away. This thriving and popular beach town on the west coast of Tenerife is visited throughout the year thanks to its mild winters, pleasant spring, autumn seasons and hot summer months. A great place for you to kick back and relax, it has two white sandy beaches and a do-nothing vibe in (buckets and) spades. Or you might choose to keep yourself busy with an array of water sports, hiking activities and animal parks, all set amid a glorious, rugged landscape. Couples, young families, groups of friends and retirees will all love finding things to do in Los Cristianos. So, get on board with this charming location on this ever-popular Spanish island.


Imported fine, white sand between the toes is what’s made Los Cristianos so popular among the many resorts on the island. Most people imagine black, grainy beaches when they think of this volcanic island, but here beaches are bleached and the waters clear, perfect for activities such as snorkelling, diving, jet-skiing and windsurfing. With Playa de las Vistas and Playa de Los Cristianos to choose from, relaxation in a stunning location is yours. Or, if you’d rather keep yourself busy, book on to one of the glass-bottomed boat tours that leave these shores daily for a truly breathtaking display of nature’s wonders at close quarters. Dolphin and whale watching charters can also be booked, and you’re sure to spot these majestic species, as a number of pods are known to live nearby.

Animal parks

In a resort popular with families, there are things to do in Los Cristianos around every corner, and a lot of these involve animals. Whether they’re in trees, underwater or flying through the air, this resort is handy for several animal parks you and your kids are sure to love. Watch family groups of primates live and play together at the famous Monkey Park. You’ll be amazed at how tame these monkeys are, approaching you confidently to take food from your hand. It’s a great privilege to be able to get so close, and it’s all within your reach in Los Cristianos. If plants are your thing visit Cactus, a botanical garden where rare and exotic plant species, most notably cacti, are grown. And right next door is Amazonia, a tropical rainforest world where its inhabitants, from hummingbirds to parrots and beyond, wait to be fed, talked to and admired.


  • Go sea fishing

    Los Cristianos was once a working fishing village, and although fishermen still work from there today, the extent of the trade has subsided.

    Find out more

  • Los Cristianos Nightlife: Bars & Clubs

    Los Cristianos, set in sunny, southern Tenerife, began as a small fishing village. However, it has grown and bloomed into one of the island’s most popular holiday hotspots

    Find out more

  • Monkey Park Spain

    Perfect for the family, Los Cristianos’ Monkey Park is home to a variety of different species. Reasonably priced, the park is open daily.

    Find out more

  • Los Cristianos Harbour Spain

    Spend a day by the sea on this picturesque harbour in the heart of the fishing town. The pristine condition of the area just goes to show how proud the town is of its origins.

    Find out more

  • Walking & Hiking In Tenerife

    Explore Los Cristianos’ rich countryside with Tenerife Guided Walks and feel at one with nature. There are a lot of excursions to choose from, which differ in length and difficulty.

    Find out more

  • Our guide to Jungle Park in Tenerife

    Close to many popular resorts, the Jungle Park in Costa Adeje is a great day out for all the family.

    Find out more

  • Playa De Las Vistas Spain

    On your holiday in Los Cristianos, don’t miss out on a trip to Playa de las Vistas. To find the beach, go west of Los Cristianos port where you’ll discover golden sands

    Find out more

  • Playa De Los Tarajales Spain

    For an alternative from the main beach in Los Cristianos, pay a visit to Playa de los Tarajales. To get there, take a walk down the hill starting at Hotel Paradise Park and onto the sands

    Find out more

  • Water Sports Tenerife

    There are a variety of water sports available on the harbour and down by the beach, ranging from pedalos to scuba diving.

    Find out more

Visit Los Cristianos, Tenerife – travel guide and tourism

Visit Los Cristianos, Tenerife – travel guide and tourism

Visit Los Cristianos

Los Cristianos is a resort on the south coast of of Tenerife not far from Playa de Las Americas. It has its origins in a small fishing village though has now grown into a large town and one of Tenerife’s most popular resorts.

Explore Los Cristianos

Wandering around the old fishing village there are still buildings in the typical Canarian style of architecture and some of the fishing village atmosphere remains. Elsewhere the town is newer and has grown up as a tourist resort. As such it is very well catered for with good beaches – nice, golden ones thanks to Saharan sand. There is even a promenade which stretches all the way to the neighbouring beaches of Playa de Las Americas. The promenade is very popular and has lots of shops, cafes and restaurants where you can stop for a pause.

The main beaches in Los Cristianos are the Playa de Los Cristianos which is a nice sandy beach in a sheltered position next to the harbour. The Playa de las Vistas beach is in the next bay along and also has golden sand. Both have lots of facilities including water sports and beach showers. There is also a black sand beach nearby in the Rincon area of Los Cristianos. This is quite a rocky beach.

The port of Los Cristianos is attractive and offers various excursions including whale and dolphin spotting. Game fishing is also a popular activity here for both experienced fishermen and those interested in having a go for the first time. Diving and trips in glass-bottom boats are also available. Ferries leave the harbour for trips to the neighbouring islands of La Gomera, La Palma and El Hierro.

In front of the harbour is a square edged with bars and restaurants – an excellent spot to stop for lunch or dinner and watch the boats moving in and out of the harbour. Nightlife is much quieter here than Playa de Las Americas but it is only a cheap taxi drive away so you can easily take advantage of the clubs and bars there if you wish.


Los Cristianos has some excellent shops allowing you to make the most of the low-duty paid on goods in the Canary Islands. There is also a pretty market held in the town every Sunday, a good place to pick up bargains.

Whilst you are walking around Los Cristianos you will notice a few Swedish names. This is because a Swedish tv personality,Bengt Rylander, came to Los Cristianos in 1956 and noticed that the warm climate and sea air would help with his multiple sclerosis. He spread the word and friends with other illnesses came and the resort developed as a convalescent centre for Swedes. Of course now Tenerife attracts visitors from all over the world.

Places to visit nearby

There is also lots to do with families as there are a number of  great attractions nearby. Siam Park has been rated the number one theme park in the world for the last few years. The Siam Park is the biggest water park in Europe and its attractions include  a wave pool with waves up to 3 meters high. Aqualand Costa Adeje is another excellent water park. Also nearby are the Tenerife Zoo and Monkey Park, Jungle Park and the water park Octopus Park with water slides and dolphin shows.

Head inland for the beautiful village of Masca which is high up in the hills in a stunning location.

See also: 

Photos of Los Cristianos

Click any picture to start the gallery

Map of Los Cristianos and places to visit




Los Cristianos places to visit

Playa de las Americas

Playa de las Americas is Tenerife’s biggest resort. It is very popular with young tourists and also with families.

Playa de las Americas guide

Siam Park

Siam Park is a huge water park with a Thai theme and has consistently been voted the number one water park in the World.

Siam Park guide

Jungle Park

Jungle Park is a zoo on the southern coast of Tenerife. Its animals include rare white tigers and lions and there are various activities at the park too.

Jungle Park guide

Los Gigantes

The Los Gigantes is a resort next to huge cliffs with a sheer drop down into the sea.

Los Gigantes guide

Teide National Park

A stunning volcanic park with an active volcano, Mount Teide. Teide Park is in the centre of Tenerife and is a highlight of any visit.

Teide National Park guide


Masca is Tenerife’s most beautiful village and set amongst superb mountain scenery.

Masca guide

…or see all our recommended places to visit in Tenerife




40 Fun & Unusual Things to Do in Tenerife

Home to Spain’s highest peak and some of the most unique landscapes in the world, Tenerife has long been welcoming visitors to its sun-drenched shores.

The island really packs a punch when it comes to contrasting experiences. Whether you want to climb a volcano, snorkel with turtles, or relax on sandy beaches, there is something here for everyone.

Here is the ultimate list of the best things to do in Tenerife.

1 – Ascend Mount Teide by cable car

Conquer the highest point in Spain without breaking into a sweat and be rewarded with sweeping island views. The dramatic cable car ascent will take your breath away so make sure you keep your camera handy.

Wrap up warm and explore the rocky volcanic hiking trails that skirt the summit. Choose an evening Teide tour to catch the sunset, which is one of the top things to see in Tenerife.

  • Teide cable car tickets

2 – Harness the breeze on a sailing tour

Feel the spray on your face as you glide past towering cliffs, watching whales frolic in the warm Atlantic waters on these fun Tenerife sailing tours. Adventurers can snorkel with turtles and rays, before relaxing on deck with lunch and a glass of bubbly.

As you cruise along you might see dolphins practicing their backflips, which is especially magical as the sun dips below the horizon.

  • Boat trips in Tenerife

3 – Explore the coastline by kayak

Paddle through marine reserves in search of dolphins and turtles on some of the best kayak tours in Tenerife. Float beneath cliffs, venture into hidden bays, and discover secret caves tucked away on the coast.

Some tours include swimming and snorkeling in sheltered spots, while sunset kayaking trips add a splash of romance to the day.

  • Kayak tours in Tenerife

4 – Feel the thrills on a whale watching cruise

Whale watching in Tenerife will be one of your vacation highlights, with sightings of humpback and pilot whales occurring all year round. You might also encounter dolphins leaping through the waves, and turtles bobbing on the surface.

Tuck into lunch, take a dip in the ocean, and relax on the deck of your catamaran or yacht with a spot of sunbathing.

  • Whale watching cruises in Tenerife

5 – Summit Mount Teide

Lace up your boots and traverse dramatic lava fields as you hike up Pico del Teide. Or board the cable car and soak up panoramic views of the caldera as you climb skywards.

Taking a tour of Mount Teide is one of the most unique things to do in Tenerife, after all, it is not every day that you get to stand on top of a volcano.

  • Mount Teide excursions

6 – Take a tour of Santa Cruz de Tenerife

Free walking tours in Santa Cruz de Tenerife are the best ay to discover this buzzing city. Find hidden backstreets and seafront rock paintings, before stopping at the African market for souvenirs crafted from lava.

Stroll through sunny plazas while your expert guide lets you in on insider secrets, including where to find the best local sweets.

  • Free walking tours in Tenerife

7 – Go back to nature in Loro Park

Say hello to the wild inhabitants of Loro Park on a day trip to this beautiful zoo. Meet everything from sea lions and sloths to parrots and penguins as you explore the animal kingdoms.

Enjoy a moment of Zen at the underwater garden and discover the largest Thai village outside Thailand. The kids will love Kinderlandia, where suspension bridges and a roller coaster will have them shrieking in delight.

  • Loro Park tickets

8 – Unleash the adrenaline on a jet ski ride

Bounce along the waves of Tenerife’s southern coast on a thrilling jet ski ride. The marine reserve is home to dolphins and turtles, so you might have company as you power through the ocean.

Explore secluded bays and mysterious caves with your guide, then marvel at the colossal cliffs looming high above. Keep an eye out for Red Mountain and the iconic Punta Rasca lighthouse.

  • Jet ski in Tenerife

9 – Take a day trip to La Gomera

Retreat to the sleepy island of La Gomera and explore one of the best natural reserves in the Canaries on a day trip from Tenerife. After a short ferry ride delve into the lush interior where strange volcanic formations, green forests, and hillside villages await.

Most La Gomera day trips include a traditional lunch and a stop at the stunning Vallehermoso viewpoint for photos.

  • Day trips to La Gomera from Tenerife

10 – Chill out at El Medano beach and surf town

Kick back and relax in this laid-back surf town on the south-east coast of Tenerife. Take to the waves and try windsurfing or kitesurfing wander through the cobbled backstreets and soak up the bohemian vibe.

After some well-deserved beach time treat yourself to freshly caught seafood at a promenade restaurant before popping to an ice-cream parlor or crêperie for dessert.

11 – Go hiking in Anaga Rural Park

Hiking tours in Anaga Forest are a great way to explore one of the island’s oldest areas. Breathe in the scent of ancient laurel trees and discover unique flora and fauna around every corner.

Guided walks in Anaga Rural Park vary in length and are perfect for beginners and seasoned walkers alike. On longer hikes you can explore the unusual cave houses of Chinamada.

  • Anaga Forest tours

12 – Stargaze under celestial skies

Gazing at the starry sky against the majestic backdrop of Teide National Park is one of the most romantic things to do in Tenerife. Your astronomer guide will welcome you to the observatory at the volcano summit for an evening of celestial discovery.

See if you can spot the Milky Way and maybe even some planets through the telescope.

  • Stargazing tours in Tenerife

13 – Admire the dramatic cliffs of Los Gigantes

The best way to appreciate these imposing sea cliffs is from the water, so jump on a boat and take in some of the most dramatic scenery on Tenerife. Many Los Gigantes boat tours include whale watching, swimming, and snorkeling.

For those who prefer sticking to dry land, Los Gigantes can be visited on a Tenerife day trip and combined with stops at Masca and Teide National Park.

  • Tours along Los Gigantes

14 – Snorkel with sea turtles

There is something magical about swimming beside these graceful turtles as they propel themselves through the blue ocean. You will see other colorful marine life during your Tenerife snorkeling tour, which can be enjoyed by yacht or catamaran.

Adventurous explorers can paddle along the coast by kayak for the ultimate aquatic experience, getting up close to stunning scenery as well as making friends with the turtles.

  • Snorkeling tours in Tenerife

15 – Stroll around San Cristobal de La Laguna

Travel back in time as you wander the historic streets of this charming UNESCO World Heritage Site. Pay your respects at La Laguna Cathedral and head to the Plaza del Cristo market to buy hand-crafted souvenirs.

Keep your camera handy for Casa Salazar, an ancient palace with an intriguing history, and take enviable snaps of sunny plazas and colonial architecture.

  • La Laguna tours

16 – Brave waterslides at Siam Park

The perfect antidote to the heat is a trip to Siam Park where waterslides and wave pools will cool you down in no time. Will you be brave enough to take the plunge down a vertical chute, or navigate the raging rapids by inflatable boat?

For something more serene, float down the tropical Mai Thai River or chill out on Siam Beach.

  • Siam Park tickets

17 – Visit vineyards on winery tours

Wine enthusiasts love sampling the local nectar produced here on the rich volcanic slopes of the island. Canarians have been producing wine since Medieval times and know a thing or two about grapes. Luckily they are happy to share their secrets with you.

There are several Tenerife wine tours available with cheese tastings, cellar visits at traditional bodegas, and delicious lunches all up for grabs.

  • Wine tours in Tenerife

18 – Scuba dive with marine marvels

One of the most thrilling things to do in Tenerife is to go scuba diving, and there are numerous tours for beginners and experts alike.

Come face to face with turtles and maybe even dolphins as you glide through this pristine underwater world. If you are lucky you might be joined by rays and perhaps an octopus or two.

  • Scuba diving tours in Tenerife

19 – Hold tight on an exhilarating ATV adventure

Venture well off the beaten track on an ATV tour in Tenerife, one of the most exciting ways to see the island. Explore lush forests, charming villages, and the lunar landscapes of Teide National Park as you power through the lava fields.

Breathe in fresh mountain air as you discover places few tourists get to see and stop at all the best viewpoints.

  • ATV tours in Tenerife

20 – Soar above Tenerife while tandem paragliding

Take to the skies on a Tenerife paragliding tour and see the island from a different perspective. Discover what it feels like to be a bird, floating on the thermals high above dramatic volcanic formations and the rugged coastline far below.

The skilled pilots know what they are doing so just relax and enjoy the spectacular views.

  • Paragliding in Tenerife

21 – Go on an island jeep safari

See the best of Tenerife on a full-day 4×4 jeep tour around the island. Stopping at major highlights such as Teide National Park and the pretty mountain village of Masca, these excursions are a must for curious explorers.

Learn about island culture from your experienced local guide and capture otherworldly landscapes on camera at some of the best viewpoints on the island.

  • Jeep tours in Tenerife

22 – Relax at the Aqua Club Thermal Spa

Unwind after your adventures at the Aqua Club Thermal Spa retreat, a temple of health, beauty, and wellness. Get your senses invigorated in the whirlpool bath and sea salt pool, before reclining in the sauna after a massage.

Make sure you try the toning pool and footbath so you leave feeling fully rejuvenated.

  • Aqua Club Spa tickets

23 – Visit Mount Teide Observatory

Take a trip to the Teide Astrophysical Observatory, which is one of the most highly regarded research centers in the world. Find out what goes on behind the scenes and see the day and night telescopes used to distinguish individual stars.

Your specialist guide will reveal the ground-breaking discoveries made here and will have you feeling like expert astronomers by the time you leave.

  • Teide observatory tickets & tours

24 – Try surfing at Playa de las Americas

Learn how to ride the waves at Playa de las Americas with a family-friendly Tenerife surfing lesson. The sandy beach is a great place to hone those skills so you can confidently take on the ocean.

Group and private lessons are available, and enthusiasts can book multiple sessions to make the most of their time in the water.

  • Surf classes in Tenerife

25 – Venture deep into the Jungle Park

Go wild in Tenerife’s Jungle Park, where over 500 animals will keep you entertained for hours. Watch out for cheeky monkeys and ravenous crocodiles as you explore this vast rainforest kingdom, which is one of the best places to visit in Tenerife for families.

See live shows starring playful sealions and acrobatic macaws, then head to the penguin enclosure for feeding time.

  • See price and reviews

26 – Bounce around Tenerife by buggy

Strap in and zoom across the rugged volcanic terrain on an adventurous Tenerife buggy tour. Experience the thrill of driving off-road and explore hidden corners of the island far from the beaten tourist trail.

Stop at scenic viewpoints for perfect photos of Mount Teide, and visit the coast for sandy beaches, gigantic cliffs, and fresh sea air.

  • Buggy tours in Tenerife

27 – Get wet and go wild at Aqualand

Enjoy a fun-packed day with the family at Aqualand, where water slides and wave pools are all part of the excitement. Let the kids discover their inner sea rover at Pirate Island, and take a spin on rides like Tornado and Kamikaze if you dare.

Beat the heat by floating down the lazy river, or head to the Jacuzzis and treat yourself to a hydro-massage.

  • See price and reviews

28 – Stroll the cobbled streets of Garachico

Garachico is one of those places where time stands still, and you can too. This colorful colonial town is all about wandering slowly through historic streets where buildings with wooden shutters are draped in bougainvillea.

Visit Castillo de San Miguel before enjoying some local ice cream beneath a shady palm tree in the plaza. To cool off, take a dip in the natural pools at El Caletón.

29 – Go back in time at La Casa de los Balcones

Standing proud in the historic center of La Orotava in the north of the island, La Casa de los Balcones is a must-see for architecture buffs. The highlights of this 17th-century house are the intricately carved wooden balconies which are often festooned with flowers.

Inside the museum you will find a gorgeous Canarian style patio and local handicrafts that give insights into life here over the centuries.

  • Casa de los Balcones tickets

30 – Head into the hills at Masca

Try not to let your jaw drop as you head over dramatic mountain passes and negotiate hairpin roads on your way to the tiny hillside village of Masca. The journey is as beautiful as the settlement itself, which is hidden away in a remote gorge in Teno National Park.

Walk down into this historic village and visit the church, learn about pirates, and enjoy lunch at a restaurant with a view.

  • See Masca tours

31 – See a real dragon tree

Have you ever seen a tree that bleeds dragon’s blood? There were once lots of dragon trees here on Tenerife but few remain today – their red sap boasts healing properties so most have been harvested over the years.

At around 1000 years old this unusually shaped specimen in Icod de los Vinos is thought to be the oldest dragon tree in the world, so seeing it with your own eyes is a real treat.

Directions in Google maps

32 – Fly through the trees at Forestal Park

Swing through the pine trees and discover what it feels like to fly at this family-friendly treetop adventure park. Get the adrenaline going as you negotiate the high ropes course and leap off Tarzan swings in the beautiful Forestal Park.

Soaring along on the end of a giant zipline is one of the most exhilarating things to do in Tenerife. Will you be brave enough to give it a go?

  • Forestal Park tickets

33 – Watch dolphins in the wild

Is there anything quite so magical as encountering dolphins up close? The best way to see these playful creatures in their natural habitat is on a Tenerife dolphin watching cruise.

Keep an eye out as you sail past magnificent cliffs and secret bays – make sure your camera is handy. Jump overboard for swimming and snorkeling or stay on deck and listen to the enchanting dolphin chatter using sonar equipment.

  • Dolphin watching cruises

34 – Discover the Pyramids of Güímar

Egypt is not the only destination with pyramids, and the 19th-century lava stone monuments here on Tenerife are just as mysterious. These six pyramids look similar to the Aztec temples in Mexico, and archaeologists continue to argue about their origins.

Visit the Güímar Ethnographic Park to discover the truth and walk through the themed gardens to mull it all over.

35 – Take a dip in the natural pools at Bajamar

Cool off in the heat by jumping into the natural sea pools at Bajamar in the north-east of Tenerife. Take a picnic and spend the afternoon at the sandy beach, the perfect place to relax after an invigorating swim.

Lifeguards are on watch during the day and one of the pools is child-friendly so visiting Bajamar is an ideal family activity in Tenerife.

Directions in Google maps

36 – Hike the Black Mountains

If you want to stretch the legs amidst dramatic scenery without the crowds, head to the hiking trails of Montañas Negras, the Black Mountains in the west of the island. Walking here will get the heart pumping as you discover solidified lava flows and majestic volcano vistas.

This striking volcanic landscape is one of the most memorable things to see in Tenerife, so make sure you pack the camera.

Directions in Google maps

37 – Walk barefoot along sandy beaches

Some of the best beaches in Tenerife include Playa de las Teresitas, famous for its mile of powdery white sand, and Playa Jardín, home to warm black sand and magnificent views of Mount Teide.

For something a little wilder kick off your shoes and stroll along the more isolated sands of Playa de la Tejita. Meanwhile, sunset chasers and photographers should visit Playa de Benijo to see rocky silhouettes outlined against fiery red skies.

38 – Explore underground at Cueva del Viento

Fasten your helmet and switch on your flashlight as you venture into one of the largest volcanic tubes in the world, the Cueva del Viento. Hold your nerve as you discover a labyrinth of twisting passages snaking towards the center of the earth.

Stunning geomorphological formations like chasms and terraces were left behind by a lava flow, which makes this the best place to go potholing in Tenerife.

Directions in Google maps

39 – Wiggle your hips at Santa Cruz Carnival

The spirited festivities in Santa Cruz are a great reason to visit Tenerife in February. Allow yourself to get caught up in the rhythms and exuberance of this laid-back fiesta.

Gasp at glamorous costumes and enjoy live music and dancing in the streets. The icing on the cake is the Burial of the Sardine ceremony, which culminates in a weekend of lively parades and shows.

40 – Visit Puerto de la Cruz

If you fancy a bit of action and entertainment during your Tenerife vacation consider spending some time in Puerto de la Cruz, a lively northern city known for its sandy beaches and the Loro Park zoo.

Enjoy a more tranquil afternoon by exploring historic streets in the old town and taking photos of the quaint harbor. Then quench your thirst in one of the colonial-style cafes that line the leafy plazas.

Best things to do in Tenerife

Tenerife is famous for its great sandy beaches, sunny weather, stunning blue sky and all-inclusive, fancy sea resorts.

You love sunbathing and clubbing? Go to Canary Islands!

OK, but what about non-beach people who:

  • want to enjoy nice weather, even though the temperature dropped well below zero in their own country?
  • yearn for warmth, sun and fresh air in the mountains?
  • feel bored on the beach and want to explore the island?

Well, if laying out on the beach and sipping drinks for a whole day isn’t your idea of a good time, but you’re fascinated by Canary Islands and in need of a warm and beautiful getaway, go to Tenerife!

In fact, some of the best places in Tenerife are away from the beaches.

Tenerife tourist attractions will satisfy all mountain aficionados, nature lovers, outdoor addicted and sightseeing enthusiasts.

What I especially love about Tenerife is that traveling by car is so convenient there – you can get everywhere, even to the most remote sites, within maximum 2 hours.

And during these 2 hours of drive, you’ll get to see various landscapes, which will make you feel like you’re traveling great distances covering different climate zones.

The southern Tenerife is dramatic and dry, with scarce vegetation, covered in dried dust, very Sparta-like. But it guarantees sunny weather.

The north of the island is completely different – with green, abundant vegetation it’s definitely more preferred by local inhabitants. There are fewer tourists in the northern Tenerife but the climate there is more windy and rainy.

So, let’s have a look at things do to in Tenerife for adventure seekers!

Table of contents


    This National Park is the biggest (literally!) Tenerife attraction as it encircles the highest mount in Spain – volcano Teide. This lava monster reaches whopping 3718 metres above sea level! As you can guess, the landscapes of Teide National Park provide an unforgettable experience!

    What I really appreciate about this National Park is that you can comfortably travel there by car – national roads TF38 and TF21 will take you to the most interesting spots of Teide region.

    And you don’t need to take photos in a hurry, leaning out of the car window – there are many viewpoints with lots of parking space along the road which allow you to contemplate all those astounding landscapes as long as you wish. Take your time there because good moments tend to fly. 😉

    Last but not least, Teide National Park isn’t only about the volcano – there are loads of other great hiking trails which will take your breath away. Short, long, steep, flat, in the forest, out on the plain – there’s really a lot of hiking options to choose from. Also, diverse vegetation and out of this world landforms vary greatly, so you may want to reserve at least a few days for Teide National Park.

    Just get yourself a map, sunscreen and sunglasses (it’s always sunny there) and start exploring this natural gem of Tenerife!


    There’s a cable car conveniently located on one of the volcano’s slopes – it takes you from 2356 metres up to 3555 metres. At the foot of Teide, there’s lots of parking space (free of charge), so it’s very convenient for tourists travelling by car.

    The best you can do to visit the highest volcano in Europe is to book the cable car’s ride online at least a few days in advance. It’s more than probable that when you arrive at the ticket office without booking, there will be no places left.

    We booked tickets online on Sunday and the nearest ride available was on Thursday. That was the end of May – it wasn’t even the high season. I can only guess how many days in advance one needs to buy tickets in August…

    Teide cable car is open every day. Opening hours vary according to the season:

    • July, August and September: 9:00 AM – 7:00 PM (the last ascent is at 6:00 PM and last ride down at 6.50 PM)
    • October: 9.00 AM – 5.30 PM (the last ride up is at 4:30 PM and last descent at 5:20 PM)
    • Low season: 9:00 AM – 4.00 PM (the last ascent is at 4:00 PM and the last ride down at 4:50 PM)

    Return ticket for an adult costs 27 EUR, children: 13. 5 EUR.


    To climb the volcano’s peak you need special permission issued (for free) by the Spanish government.

    I highly recommend applying for this licence as soon as possible, especially in high season. We tried to book the pass at the end of April and it turned out it was too late for our trip.

    Teide volcano is one of the most popular Tenerife tourist attractions.

    Alternatively, you can book a hiking tour which includes mount Teide walking permit:

    Hiking Trails Teide National Park

    If you’d like to try hiking Tenerife, then you might want to consider the below options:

    • Montaña Blanca
      You can also hike to Teide volcano – the fastest trail leads through Montaña Blanca mountain. It’s one of the best Teide hiking routes
    • Chinyero walk
      Chinyero volcano on Tenerife is a perfect option if you’re interested in hiking Teide National Park. A nice and easy circular trail
    • Mount Guajara
      Scenic mountain reaching 2718m, located close to Las Cañadas caldera. We start hiking near the tourist centre in Cañada Blanca. The trail isn’t demanding but there are very little hikers. However, it’s a whole day hike so we need to take plenty of water, snacks and sun protection. Hiking poles will also come in handy during the descend.

    Hiking in Teide National Park – video

    Here’s our short YouTube video presenting the beauty of Teide National Park – Montaña Blanca hike.


    This village is hidden deep in Teno mountains in the western part of the island – check the location here.

    It’s one of the most popular Tenerife attractions – it’s a very picturesque place. Located on 650 metres above sea level, Masca will make your jaw drop with wonder. 😉

    It’s not big – there are only about 90 inhabitants in this village but it’ll keep you busy for a whole day.

    You can take a walk the lovely, narrow streets, relax in a restaurant enjoying some papas arrugadas (Canarian wrinkly potatoes), or, if you’re up for a hike, take a look at the map and head towards Cumbre de Bolico.

    Hiking trails near Masca are easy to hike and scenic – the vegetation in abundant and we get to admire the Atlantic Ocean every now and then.

    However, beware – getting to Masca is rather tricky. When someone says that the road leading to Masca is dangerous, believe it, it’s no exaggeration.

    We held our breaths when we passed other cars coming from the opposite direction. Road TF436 is narrow, devious and there are many deep chasms along this road.

    Lots of caution is needed when driving to Masca, that’s for sure. But when you get there, you’ll quickly forget the road.

    If you would like to stay in Masca for a few days, you can find available hotels here:

    If you wish to visit Masca and explore Teide National Park with a certified guide, you might be interested in the below tour.

    A day trip during which you will take a walk in a picturesque spot in Teide National Park, then visit the hidden village. The knowledgeable guide will introduce you to the history and legends of Teno mountains.


    This is probably one of the most unusual things to do in Tenerife. Exploring Teno Rural Park is a great adventure, perfect for outdoor lovers who want to try hiking Tenerife.

    Hiking trip in Teno mountains is a nice surprise – the trails are well-marked and beautiful.

    The paths aren’t demanding, there isn’t a lot of height difference to hike or dangerous exposure points. We will need hiking boots, backpack and plenty of water, but no high mountain experience is necessary.

    The majority of tourists aren’t aware that there are fantastic green and humid mountains with many hiking trails to explore. There are even bike trails in Teno Rural Park!

    Again, the northern Tenerife is a completely different world compared to the loud, full of tourist attractions south of the island.

    So far, the most popular place in Teno mountains was Masca gorge. Because of safety reasons, it was closed in March 2018.

    However, there are other great hiking trails in Teno Rura Park:

    • Santiago del Teide → Cumbre de Bolico → Masca
    • Masca → Las Portelas → Buenavista del Norte
    • Santiago del Teide → Valle de Arriba → Cumbre de Bolico → Santiago del Teide
    • Puerto de Erjos → Chinyero → Garachico

    If you would like to stay close to Teno mountains, you can book your stay in a quiet and picturesque town – Santiago del Teide. For me, it’s the best place to stay in Tenerife.


    Garachico is a small port town in northern Tenerife. It was founded in 1496 by Geneva banker Cristobal de Ponte.

    It’s one of a few unobvious Tenerife attractions. Charming little town but definitely less popular than southern Tenerife resorts.

    In the 16th and 17th centuries, Garachico became the main loading port in Tenerife. Ships loaded with wine and sugar were sailing mainly to America and Europe. This helped with the swift economic development of this picturesque port town.

    Unfortunately, in the 17th century, Garachico experienced two natural disasters. in 1646 a massive landslide killed 100 people and destroyed 40 ships. 60 years later Montaña Negra volcano destroyed almost half of the city – great area was covered with lava.

    From that time Garachico used to be only a small port town in Tenerife.

    Today Garachico is a lovely mountain town with lots of interesting monuments presenting Canary Islands culture. Garachico is a must-see for every history geek and Canary Islands aficionado.

    The main attractions in Garachico:

    • El Caletón – there’s an advantage of Montaña Negra volcano disaster – it had created one of the most popular attractions in Garachico. El Caletón is a complex of natural basins which were formed by congealing lava in the ocean. There are decks, terraces, small bridges and ladders which make swimming in the basins fun. Perfect for families with children.
    • Castillo de San Miguel – stone fortification located close to the seashore. Built in the 16th century. It presents a chronological history of Garachico, as well as photos and information about the region’s flora and fauna. Climb the tower for fantastic views of the town and coast. Entry fee: 3 EUR.
    • Palacio de Los Condes de La Gomera – also called Casa de Piedra. The building’s facade is made of a characteristic stone which is outstanding compared to the other buildings. The house was built at the end of the 16th century and restored after the volcano disaster.
    • Casa de los Molinos also called Casa el Molino. Small antique mill, the only one left intact from the time it was built.
    • Iglesia de Santa Ana – Cristóbal de Ponte was not only the founder of Garachico but also initiated the building of many churches. St. Ann Church was built in the 16th century and refurbished so that tourists can admire its beauty today. In the back of the church, there’s a museum Museo de Arto Sacro which contains exhibits of sacral art from the 17th century.
    • Plaza de La Libertad – the centre of Garachico. Very tranquil place and there’s a large gazebo in the square. Ideal for travelers who like historic city centers and the ambience it brings.
    • Casa del Marques de Villafuerte – 17th-century manor house located in the banana plantation. Thanks to its location it avoided destruction after the volcano eruption. It’s famous for its beautiful colonial architecture – wide facade, wooden windows, shutters and balconies are adorned with carvings. The interior is equally amazing and there’s a private archive of Villafuerte family – the owners of this excellent manor house.
    • Convento de San Francisco – another building eerected thanks to Cristóbal de Ponte. It’s the oldest convent in Garachico – it was built in 1542. It contains the colonial church Iglesia Nuestra Señora de los Ángeles. Today in the convent there is a Garachico community ceentre, municipal archive, library and Contemporary Art Musuem.

    Garachico is one of the best quiet places to stay in Tenerife. You can look for available accommodation here:


    If you would like to explore Tenerife’s caves, the best choice will be Cueva del Viento (Cave of the Wind). You will get to admire the amazing underground world of the island.

    It’s the longest volcanic tunnel in Europe and third largest in the world. The cave was created 27 thousand years ago after Pico Viejo volcano eruption. It’s 17-kilometres long.

    There are three levels of the cave which present phenomenal geomorphologic forms – stalactites, stalagmites, lava cascades, lava lakes.

    In Cueva del Viento live about 190 types of animals, 48 of which are troglobionts – animals living only in caves.

    Visit in Cave of the Winds is a very educational trip, not only for children. I think it’s one of the most interesting Tenerife attractions.

    The caves’ corridors are connected with other caves (Cueva Belen, Cueva del Sobrado and Cueva de las Breveritas). There are seven known entries to this underground complex of caves.

    The cave is truly beautiful and it will make for an especially exciting trip.

    The cave is open every day. Opening hours differ according to the season, so it’s best to check the cave’s official website.

    All visits are done with a professional cave guide.

    Tickets have to be purchased online in advance which you can do here. 

    An adult ticket costs 20 EUR, children’s ticket costs 5 EUR or 8.5 EUR (depends on the age). Children below 5 years of age aren’t allowed into Cave of the Wind.


    If you’re looking for unusual things to do in Tenerife, then you should head to Anaga mountains. For me, it’s the most beautiful place in northern Tenerife.

    Definitely less popular than Teide National Park, it’s a fantastic natural getaway. Anaga Rural Park is especially famous for its ancient laurel forest – it’s one of the oldest vegetation in the European continent.

    It’s easily accessible by car – road TF123 is definitely easier to drive on than Masca road. Also, there are breathtaking viewpoints along the road, so remember to take your camera!

    The most remote place to which you can get by car is Chamorga village. This quiet little village is a starting point of several hiking trails. The atmosphere of this place is kind of peculiar – I felt as if I’d been deep in some exotic jungle, far away from civilization (which was actually true).

    Fresh brisk air, few tourists, unspoiled unique nature and amazing view on the Atlantic Ocean – is there more to ask for? So, if you’re in need of peace and quiet, go to Anaga mountains. Chances are that the only companions you’ll have there will be goats. 😉

    Here are some of the best hikes in Anaga mountains.

    What’s worth to mention is that the weather in the northern Tenerife the rather chilly and there might be some rainy days even in the summer. Also, strong winds are very common there, so I highly recommend taking some windproof clothes.

    If you want to stay close to Anaga Rural Park, then getting a room in the capital of Tenerife is a great idea.

    You can check available hotels here:

    If you would like to explore Anaga mountains with a local guide, you might be interested in the below trip. Pick-up place is in Santa Cruz de Tenerife.


    The most beautiful town in northern Tenerife.

    La Orotava is famous for its charming little streets, narrow and hilly, perfect for walks! If you’re fond of architecture, you’ll feel like home there – beautiful buildings and red roofs reflect Tenerife’s colonial history.

    This part of the island has always been the most densely populated and the richest. After Spanish conquistadores took over this town, many wealthy families from Europe started to settle in La Orotava (totally not surprising – who wouldn’t like to live in such paradise?).

    Besides Orotava’s central point – Plaza de la Constitución, take a walk on Calle de San Francisco – it looks like American steep street. It’s especially famous for its old tenement houses, the biggest of which is Casa de los Balcones (location here). You can buy local wines and handicraft souvenirs there.

    If you like exploring churches, take a look at Iglesia de la Concepción (location here) and Iglesia de San Juan Bautista (location here). Both are very interesting examples of XVII century sacred architecture.

    Between 1 PM and 5 PM, everything’s closed and quiet, the town seems to be depopulated, so it’s time to take some outdoor photos.

    By the way, La Orotava is part of Teide National Park – its highest point is Teide volcano which makes La Orotava the most elevated and steep town in Spain. ​​

    Maybe La Orotava isn’t classic sightseeing tourist attraction. It’s not like Rome or Paris – in La Orotava, there’s less sightseeing but more walking. There may not be any spectacular monuments but it’s the details – the windows, doors, small ornaments which make this place worth visiting.

    So, if you look for everlasting siesta and lazy atmosphere, go to Orotava!

    If you would like to stay there, you can find available hotels here:

    If you’re interested in visiting colonial towns, getting to know the history and culture of Tenerife, visit some off-the-beaten-track places as well as UNESCO World Heritage Sites you might be interested in this day tour.

    During this exciting trip, you’ll visit La Laguna, Candelaria with the famous Basilica, El Médano beach, Garachico, La Orotava and Los Gigantes. Hotel transport included.


    • Los Cristianos

    We stayed in Los Cristianos – lively tourist resort located on the southwest coast of Tenerife. The majority of the hotels there are located close to the beach. Lots of tourist attractions. Suitable for beachgoers and people looking for nightlife.

    Here are hotels in Los Cristianos which we can recommend:


    We stayed in this hotel for a week and were happy with the experience – it’s always nice to get back to a comfortable hotel room after a day spent on the trail. Breakfast was diverse and ample, plenty of food choices. Staff was attentive and always smiling. We also liked the jacuzzi pools – great relax.

    You can check out this hotel here:


    One of the best cheap hotels in Los Cristianos. We were staying in a studio with an equipped kitchen and liked it a lot. Clean and spacious with a nice balcony. Located in a quiet area (a big advantage for us).

    You can check this hotel here:

    Here’s Los Cristianos hotels map:

    • Puerto De Santiago

    Besides Garachico, Puerto Santiago is one of the best quiet places to stay in Tenerife. Charming little town for travellers looking for a getaway. Great places if you would like to visit La Gomera island – there are direct boats cruising to this island every day.

    Here are Puerto de Santiago hotels we recommend for a relaxing stay:


    Great location – the hotel windows overlook the impressive Los Gigantes cliffs. We stayed in a studio with fully equipped kitchen. Nice and clean, very attentive and friendly staff. It’s one of the best all inclusive hotels in Puerto de Santiago.

    You can check it here:


    If you’re looking for budget-friendly accommodation in Puerto de Santiago, you might want to check out this apartment. Spacious 1 bedroom apartment with fully equipped kitchen and a washing machine. Located in a quiet neighbourhood, very close to the sea. The view from the terrace is lovely! A great option for couples.

    Youcan check out this apartment here:

    Booking. com


    The best way to explore the island is to rent a car. Car rental companies in Tenerife are customer-oriented and, because of huge competition, the rental prices are low.

    You can check available options and deals here:


    The Canary Islands are a paradise for foodies. Dishes are simple but exotic but most importantly the food is fresh. Fruits and veggies, seafood, fish – everything is freshly picked or has been caught during the morning’s fishing.

    Besides traditional Spanish food like paella, tortilla, flan or tapas there are lots of dishes typical only for the Canary Islands.

    So, what food do they eat in Tenerife?

    → Papas arrugadas

    In praise of simplicity. Small jacket potatoes boiled in water with lots of salt. Served with two different sauces (mojos): spicy red made from hot peppers and mild green sauce with lots of cilantro. Sometimes in popular tourist resorts, papas arrugadas are served with a third sauce made from garlic.

    → Barraquito

    Absolute coffee hit in the Canary Islands. It’s a kind of sweet layered coffee cocktail which can substitute a dessert.

    Layers (starting from the bottom): sweetened condensed milk, Licor 43 or Tia Maria, coffee, milk, frothed milk + a little bit of cinnamon and lemon zest. Non-alcoholic version (sin alcohol) is usually also available.

    → Opuntia lemonade

    Popular Tenerife drink. Opuntia cactuses are very common plant in the Canary Islands so resourceful Canarians make use of them. Prickly pear lemonade is delicious! Sweet and lovely dark-pink soft drink with a distinct flavour (a little bit like a watermelon). It’s the best refreshing drink I’ve ever had in Tenerife (Masca village, Aqui Me Quedo restaurant).

    → Ropa vieja

    English: old clothes. The name may not be very appealing but the dish itself is delicious!

    It’s a very popular food in Cuba but actually comes from the Canary Islands. We had a vegetarian option but the most popular version is served with shredded beef and chicken. Ropa vieja is a hearty stew with lots of chickpeas and rich vegetable sauce. It keeps you going for a long time.

    → Gofio

    Flour from roasted grains of wheat, barley or corn, with a bit of salt added. It’s one of the oldest produce of Tenerife – it was eaten by Guanches, the aboriginal inhabitants of Canary Islands.

    Gofio is the ingredient of many soups, stews, cakes, sauces and even ice-cream. In the groceries, gofio is usually sold as a sweet paste.

    → Queso de cabra

    Goat cheese. This typical Tenerife cheese is the most popular dairy product on the Canary Islands -they produce over 8 million tonnes of it yearly! There are three types:

    • queso fresco: delicate fresh white cheese, salted or without salt, can be eaten even on the same day it was manufactured. If you fry it, it tastes the best with green mojo sauce.
    • queso semicurado: a type of cheese which was ripening for over 35 days.
    • queso curado: completely mature cheese which was ripening for more than 105 days.

    All the cheeses are also available ahumado – smoked.

    The most popular cheesemaker in Tenerife is Benijos from La Orotava. They are especially famous for Benijos Semicurado Ahumado – characteristic bright-orange truckle of cheese. It’s easily available in the majority of groceries in Tenerife. Benijos Semicurado Ahumado is often covered in paprika and gofio.

    → Conejo en salmorejo

    Example of Tenerife traditional food very popular in cold months (if we can say there’s such a thing as cold months in Tenerife). Chunks of rabbit in thick sauce often served with potatoes.

    The meat is firstly marinated in garlic, olive oil and lots of spices, then it’s golden fried and vegetables are added. Very hearty stew.

    → Chopitos

    Must-try for seafood lovers. It’s a cuttlefish coated with breadcrumbs and fried in deep oil. Served hot straight after cooking with a  piece of lemon and aioli sauce. Very often served as tapas. Crisp and delicious, chopitos are excellent beer snacks.

    → Churros con chocolate

    Traditional Spanish food. Churros are deep fried-dough pastry. This isn’t just a small dessert which you can quickly have with your coffee – those are long thick chunks of pastry which are so filling that a lot of locals eat churros for breakfast.

    The best churros are served in churrerías – a special shops which sell only churros. But don’t go there after a solid lunch.😉

    → Churros de pescado

    A savoury version of churros. Marinated fish cut into long and slim pieces, dipped in churro batter and fried in deep oil. It can be served as tapas or as a dish with fries. For me, churros de pescado is the best food in Tenerife.

    If you would like to try typical food in Tenerife, try excellent wines and see some of the most beautiful places in Tenerife, you might be interested in this food tour with a knowledgeable guide.


    High season

    Low season


    – guarantee of sunny weather
    – high temperatures
    – the warmest water in the ocean
    – lots of events and festivals

    – chance to enjoy nice sunny weather even in winter
    – lower prices everywhere
    – fewer tourists


    – crowds everywhere
    – high prices in hotels, cafes and restaurants

    – might be rainy
    – colder water in the ocean
    – fewer festivals and fiestas

    Many travellers consider Tenerife one of the best places for winter sun in Europe.

    For us, however, the best time of year to visit Tenerife is spring and autumn. More specifically – the first part of May and October. These months are the best for active vacations.

    In May the plants bloom and greenery is still… green. Hiking in the mountains is pure pleasure. Water in the ocean is perfectly fine to bath and sun is shining like mad.

    October is also great – there are definitely fewer tourists than in the summer, prices are reasonable and water temperature is still pleasant to have a bath (even in the winter the ocean’s temperature doesn’t drop below 18°C). Even if it’s raining, the clouds go away quickly.

    Summer is definitely not the best time to visit Tenerife, especially if you want to explore the island.


    July 2019

    Average prices in Tenerife are quite similar to those in continental Spain. Some products like alcohols, cigarettes, perfumes and some electronic stuff are actually cheaper compared to other European countries on the continent.

    Travelling in Tenerife shouldn’t ruin our budget, even if we eat in restaurants every day.

    So, let’s have a look at the prices of exemplary products:

    Food and drink prices in Tenerife

    If you’ll go grocery shopping, the best idea is to choose chain supermarkets like Mercadona, HiperDino, Lidl or Tu Trebol – these are the cheapest and offer a wide assortment.

    • bread: 1 EUR
    • bread roll: 0.2 EUR
    • butter (250g): 1.2 EUR
    • milk (1l): 0.8 EUR
    • yoghurt (150g): 0.6 EUR
    • Gouda cheese (kg): 5 EUR
    • local sausage (kg): 4 EUR
    • poultry meat (kg): 4 EUR
    • pasta (500g): 0.5 EUR
    • rice (kg): 0.6 EUR
    • potatoes (kg): 1 EUR
    • tomatoes (kg): 1 EUR
    • bananas (kg): 0.8 EUR
    • jar of olives: (400g): 2 EUR
    • mineral water (1.5l): 0.4 – 0.6 EUR
    • fruit juice (1l): 0.8 – 1 EUR
    • Tropical beer (0.5l): 1 EUR
    • bottle of wine: from 1.5 EUR
    • Ron Miel rum (0. 7l): 13 EUR
    Restaurant prices

    The prices are proportional to the distance from the beach – the further away from the beach the cheaper it gets.

    For example, margarita in the centre of the tourist resort costs about 7 EUR but in a local restaurant in the mountains, we will pay 5 EUR.

    Let’s have a look at average Tenerife restaurant prices in a tourist resort:

    • today’s special + drink: 11 – 12 EUR
    • fast food + fries + drink: 6 – 7 EUR
    • tortilla: 4 EUR
    • papas arrugadas: 5 EUR
    • tapas: 7 EUR
    • tuna salad: 7 EUR
    • calamari: 9 EUR
    • paella for two: 15 – 25 EUR
    • a scoop of ice-cream: 1.5 EUR
    • piece of cake: 3.5 EUR
    • churros con chocolate + coffee for two: 7 EUR
    • freshly squeezed juice: 3 EUR
    • coke: 1.5 EUR
    • water: 1 EUR
    • a glass of wine: 4 EUR
    • Dorada beer (0.5l): 2 EUR
    • imported beer (0.33l): 2 EUR
    Tenerife petrol prices

    • Diesel: 0,95 EUR/l
    • 95 RON fuel: 1,03 EUR/l
    Tenerife tourist attractions
    • Loro Park: 35 EUR adult / 24 EUR kid
    • Siam Park: 35 EUR adult / 24 EUR kid
    • Twin ticket (Loro & Siam Park): 60 EUR adult / 41. 50 EUR kid
    • Teide cable car return ticket: 27 EUR adult / 13.50 EUR kid
    • Piramides de Guimar: 11 EUR adult / 5.50 EUR kid (from 9 years of age)
    • Lago Martianez: 5 EUR adult / 2.50 EUR kid (up to 10 years of age)

    → Anaga mountains hiking trails

    → How to choose a good map for mountain hiking

    → Package holidays are OK but…

    → Choosing the right backpack

    Los Cristianos Tenerife – Canary Islands Info

    On the south coast of the majestic Tenerife, the incomparable beauty of Los Cristianos is sprawled by the bay of golden sand and azure waters. It is one of the most popular destinations in all of the Canaries and has the busiest port by passenger traffic in Spain to prove it. With such splendid weather all year round, breathtaking beaches, picture-perfect volcanic mountains, and endless fun activities for all ages, travelers have infinite reasons to keep coming.

    Life Awaits Here at Los Cristianos in Tenerife – ©lorenzobovi

    This island vacation mecca experienced tourism boom a couple of decades ago and is still making a splash. Even with its sudden success, development never ceased and has paved the way for this naturally gifted coastal town to become the spectacular destination it is today. And with the way things are going, it’s safe to say there’s no way to go but up, up, up for this old fishing village turned world-class resort.

    Humble Beginnings of Los Cristianos

    Los Cristianos, although of a modest populace, has been a bustling port since the 16th century. At the turn of the 20th century, the once small community blossomed, and the harbor thrived like never before. Needless to say, the local economy flourished, and the need for a larger port was apparent. And so, in 1934, one that could accommodate larger ships was constructed. By 1975, a new and bigger one was also built on the same site.

    The coastal paradise owes its tourism success to a Swedish man, Bengt Rylander or Don Benito as called by the locals. In 1956, the former writer and TV commentator came to Los Cristianos hoping that the wonderfully warm climate and fresh air would ease his ailments. Eventually, he recovered, and word quickly spread. By 1957, several friends who were also suffering from illnesses joined him.

    Although Los Cristianos started as a resort for ailing and recovering Swedes in the late 1950s, it took a big leap into the tourism business the next decade, and a growing number of travelers from other Europeans nations found their way to its sandy shores. What truly turned things around for the fairly young seaside resort was the inauguration of the new international airport, Reina Sofía, in the autumn of 1978. By the end of its first year, a million passengers had landed on its runway, a large number of which headed to the promising Los Cristianos.

    Tremendous expansion happened in the 1980s, and the waterfront wonderland turned into a hot vacation destination. From its humble beginnings, as an old fishing town and then a commercial shipping harbor, Los Cristianos is now the very essence of a perfect island getaway.

    Never a Dull Moment

    This utopia by the sea is considered one of the most attractive beach destinations in Europe, and the reasons are as clear as its blue waters. With two breathtaking golden sand beaches, a secluded black volcano pebble beach, marvelous fishing harbor, never-ending activities, and a whole year of lovely weather, how can it not be?

    By the Shore

    Most resorts offer one beautiful beach and an endless promise of fun. In Los Cristianos, they make sure they are ahead of the game with two magnificent golden sand beaches and one with fabulous volcanic black sand where people can lounge and do enjoyable activities. There’s really not a good enough reason why travelers should settle for less. In this old fishing village turned top-notch tourist center, they don’t have to.

    Although naturally beautiful, enhancements made on Playa de Los Cristianos and Playa de Las Vistas gave them their superstar status. With overlaid imported fine golden sand from the Sahara, a harbor and man-made breakwaters to keep the seawater calm, the two Los Cristianos beaches got a makeover that made them a premier holiday destination. Sublime seashores that meet clear cerulean waters and majestic mountains just behind a village of old charm, it really can’t get any better.

    Life on the Shore of Playa de Las Vistas – ©darios

    Playa de Las Vistas has an enormous stunning fountain near the center of the shore that gushes sea water for an even more dramatic look. With a length of 850 meters and width of 127 meters, it has a wider shoreline compared to its next-door neighbor. Not to be outdone, the Playa de Los Cristianos has a length of 975 meters and a width of 40 meters which makes it longer than the prior. Travelers always play favorites, but with two adjoining sandy spectacles, they really don’t have to.

    For visitors craving for a bit of adventure and a secluded spot where they can unwind while appreciating exquisite views, a fascinating nameless black volcanic sand beach accessible only by foot via a quick walk past the palatial Arona Gran Hotel comes highly recommended. Although a bit challenging, the 30-minute walk up the cliffs of Montaña Guaza is very well worth it. Risk-taking explorers will not be disappointed with the extraordinary scenery that awaits them. Despite its nondescript status, it’s a hidden gem that will surely satisfy even the hardest-to-please wandering souls.

    Living Life with a Stunning View at the Arona Gran Hotel

    Beyond the Beach

    No matter how beautiful a place is, if there’s nothing to do, people will eventually get bored and lose interest. But that is not possible when in Los Cristianos. Aside from lounging and playing volleyball on the two pastel daffodil sand beaches, a host of activities is also available in the dazzling waters.

    Families will enjoy pedalo boating, kayaking, or dolphin and whale watching, while groups of friends can go on fishing trips and party cruises. Thrill-seekers will get their hearts pumping while windsurfing, jet skiing, sailing and riding banana boats.  Discover the underwater paradise by going on deep sea safari trips in glass bottom boats and diving excursions.

    Scuba Divers Embark On a Journey – ©peteretchells

    While in Los Cristianos, travelers can maximize their vacation time by going on pleasure cruises to the neighboring islands of El Hierro, La Gomera, and La Palma. Parents can also send their children to a resident sailing school for a holiday well spent. If they want to experience Canary Islands style entertainment programs, the town also organizes those in the summer.

    Scenic Saunters

    The longest barrier-free promenade in Europe stretches from Las Vistas Beach to Playa de Las Américas, and it’s one that travelers should never miss. During daytime, a beautiful panorama of golden sand meeting the expansive blue sea stares back at people. Meanwhile, ferries come and go in plain view of guests sauntering by the esplanade. By night, the lights shine the brightest in a plethora of restaurants, bars, and cafés that offer both international and Canarian dishes. Promenading is one of the best activities tourists can do when in Los Cristianos, and it’s free too.

    Fun Begins in the Dark – ©Violin

    On Dry Land

    There is more to this town than just magnificent beaches. This once fishing village has a charming square by the harbor, captivating streets with establishments in original architecture, lively shopping scene, a variety of restaurants, and a busy nightlife. Vacationers will never run out of things to do in Los Cristianos.

    They say, “whoever said money can’t buy happiness didn’t know where to shop.” Judging by the crowded shopping centers in this seaside cosmopolitan, it seems people definitely found the holy grail of retail. With plenty of shopping malls, a maze of boutiques and small stores, and a street market every Sunday, purchasers won’t need to look hard for great buys.

    People Walking on Pedestrian Zone Near Playa de Las Vistas – ©antikainen

    In the evening, restaurants, tapas, nightclubs, pubs, and discos come alive. People usually head to restaurants first to satisfy their palates to prepare for the long night ahead. After a sumptuous dinner, booze and partying begin. For tourists who prefer a more easygoing after-dinner activity, there are plenty of waterfront bars with subtle live music they can go to. They can also stroll along the promenade and watch the stars while listening to the soothing sound of the sea waves galloping to the shores.

    How to Get There and Go Around

    The public transport system is an excellent way to go around the island as it is fast, cheap and reliable. Titsa Bus, the official bus company of Tenerife, is also one of the best in Europe.

    From the capital Santa Cruz de Tenerife, travelers take either bus line 110 or 111 to reach Los Cristianos. 110 is an express bus with direct service to Costa Adeje, and Los Cristianos is one of its few stops. It departs every 30 minutes from 6:55 to 20:25 and takes about an hour. Bus line 111, on the contrary, has more stops, which includes the South Airport, so this is recommended for those coming from the airport. It leaves every 30 minutes from 5:30 to 21:30.

    Tourists can also hire a car or hail a taxi. Either way, they must go through TF1 Motorway from the capital to Los Cristianos.

    In the town itself, although taxis are readily available, most tourists travel by foot as most places are easily accessible, and a lot of walkways are wheelchair friendly.

    Los Cristianos Map

    Holiday Rentals

    As tourism is the town’s bread and butter, travelers are undoubtedly well taken care of and treated like royalties. They will never forget this old fishing village’s famous brand of hospitality. There’s always a warm welcome from the huge array of accommodations in and around Los Cristianos. And there’s surely a place that suits everyone’s needs and wants.

    Holiday Rentals in Los Cristianos Abound – ©Violin

    Adults Only

    The very chic boutique hotel h20 Big Sur is a highly rated for adults only accommodations, and it is particularly popular amongst couples. Guests love the location of this hotel and its near proximity to many tourist attractions. It’s just a 4-minute walk away from Playa de Los Cristianos and 10 minutes’ walk to the fishing harbor. Tenerife South Airport is also just 15 km away so the drive from and to won’t be too long.  Should guests prefer to stay within the hotel grounds, there’s an outdoor pool with a sun terrace surrounded tropical gardens.

    Family Hotels

    Perhaps the most excellent feature of the Paradise Park Fun Lifestyle Hotel is its rooftop terrace where the panoramic views of Playa de Los Cristianos and Mount Teide can be seen and appreciated. The property is also loaded with terrific amenities such as its five swimming pools, 4 hot tubs, sauna, fitness center, and Turkish bath that make every stay so relaxing. Although just a 13-minute walk away from the beach, and they even provide free shuttle service to Playa de Las Vistas and the town center, guests never have to leave the hotel to experience paradise vacation.


    The Cristianos Beach complex is just a minute walk away from Playa de Los Cristianos. And because of its close proximity to the beach, their apartments and penthouse boast an exceptional view of the promenade, the beautiful bay, and the harbor. Bike and car hire are also available on the property for those who want to wander around the town. But with a seascape as impressive as the one just outside its doorsteps, guests never really need to go far.

    Pet Friendly

    For tourists traveling with their furry friends, Apartment Las Vistas is the perfect place. The property is just a minute walk away from Playa de Las Vistas and, therefore, offers a superb view of the beach. Playa de Los Cristianos is also pretty close, and the best restaurants in Los Cristianos are in the same block. Pets are allowed with extra cost, and each apartment has a fully equipped kitchen and other room amenities for a truly comfortable stay. A home away from home is exactly what it is.

    The Art of Gastronomy

    Nothing can burn an amazing holiday to ashes faster than bad food. At the same time, a scrumptious meal can also make a trip unforgettable or, possibly, even perfect. So, it’s a must for a vacation paradise to also be a food haven. No ifs or buts. At Los Cristianos, even with countless excellent restaurants, there are those that stand out, and they should not be missed.

    Endless Food Choices in Los Cristianos – ©philipus

    Fine Dining

    Casa Tagoro Restaurant makes art on a plate. All the dishes look so exquisite that diners can’t help but stare in awe before taking a bite. And that first bite is always explosive, they feel like fireworks went off on their palates. Such is expected from a Michelin Star venue. Never leave Los Cristianos without trying at least a few of their best-sellers like watermelon soup, French goat cheese with mushrooms and red pepper, asparagus risotto, foie gras, duck breast, langostino, and Sunday pork paired with vintage wine. Before ending the amazing food experience, taste their chocolate mousse, creme brûlée, or chocolate pudding for dessert. A contented smile on everyone’s faces after a meal is guaranteed.

    Casa Tagoro Is One Place Where Guests Can Have a Michelin Dining Experience


    Arguably the most famous restaurant in Los Cristianos, Oliver’s With a Twist Restaurant serves mostly European dishes with a twist (as their name suggests). And because it’s fully booked all the time, it’s common for customers to patiently wait for a callback if there was a cancellation or they just book months in advance. Anything from their menu is heavenly, but their most popular ones are langoustines, sea bass, turkey pie, Thai fish cakes, braised beef, haggis stuffed chicken, pork belly, Indian spiced cod fillet, spicy meatballs, and fillet steak. For dessert, try banoffee pie, tiramisu, or profiteroles. For a five-star dining experience, do not miss this place or at least just keep trying.

    One of the tourist favorites, the Yim Siam Thai Food Restaurant is often described as the best Thai restaurants outside Asia, and it’s definitely living up to its reputation. Their most popular dishes are papaya salad, king prawns, red tofu curry, pad thai, chicken satay, fruity fried rice with pineapple, duck in red sauce, green chicken curry, and spring rolls. Everything from their menu is cooked just right and delicately presented, definitely a 10/10 restaurant.

    Easy on the Pocket

    The very simple Taylors Lounge Restaurant is considered the best sports bar in Los Cristianos and has a growing loyal fan base to prove it. No complicated foods or hard to pronounce names, just dishes cooked right and plates always go back empty. Their best-sellers are fish and chips, BBQ ribs, all their sandwiches, special chicken, Sunday roasts, chili, and nachos. There are 12 big screens so everyone can watch football from anywhere, drinks keep coming, and the food is always served hot. Definitely the go-to sports bar in town.

    Satisfaction Guaranteed in Los Cristianos

    The harbor in Playa Los Cristianos and breakwaters in Playa de Las Vistas protect the bays against rough sea waves so even the little kids can enjoy the tranquil waters. Adventurers have a host of exciting activities to do that it is hard to decide which one to try first. Marine life enthusiasts fall in love with the abundance and colorfulness of the underwater world. Naturists enjoy the Canary Islands sun in the secluded black volcanic sand beach. Handicapped travelers feel valued with the many walkways that are wheelchair friendly. Foodies claim they have found the perfect place for their food exploration.

    Los Cristianos is the prime example of how tourism should be done. Travelers get to experience paradise living while also feeling right at home. There’s always something engaging and captivating for people of all ages. And the sun shines brighter and views are so much more stunning when everybody’s just having fun. When tourism is done right, satisfaction is guaranteed.

    THE TOP 15 Things To Do in Tenerife

    Top 15 attractions in Tenerife

    Tours & Tickets

    Teide National Park (Parque Nacional del Teide)



    The largest and oldest national park in the Canary Islands and home to Spain’s highest peak—Mount Teide—Teide National Park (Parque Nacional del Teide) is one of the top attractions on Tenerife. The rugged landscape of the park, a UNESCO World Heritage Site, is magnificent—a geological wonder featuring an expanse of rugged lava fields, ancient calderas, and volcanic peaks. More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Masca Valley



    Characterized by rugged cliffs, forested trails, and waterfalls, the wild landscapes of the Masca Valley are among Tenerife’s most beautiful. The remote gorge offers a thrilling backdrop for a hike—the trail winds down through the gorge and finishes at a black-sand beach.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Mt. Teide (El Teide)



    At 12,198 feet (3,718 meters) above sea level, Mt. Teide (El Teide) is the highest point in the Canary Islands and all of Spain. The towering peak in Tenerife allows visitors to stand atop a volcano and look out over nearby islands including La Palma and Gran Canaria—if the clouds cooperate—whether they get there on foot or by cable car. More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets




    Perched on a rocky plateau at 1,400m, Vilaflor is Tenerife’s highest village and it’s a scenic spot, encircled by pine-covered mountains, rugged lava plains and fields of wildflowers. Located in the foothills of the Teide National Park, Vilaflor makes a popular starting point for hiking and climbing treks, as well as being famed for its local wineries and vineyards.Regional highlights include the Paisaje Lunar (lunar landscape), an unearthly lava valley, where unusual rock formations have been sculpted out of striking white tuff. Nearby, the mineral springs of Fuente Altam, the Sanctuary of the Santo Hermano Pedro and El Pino Gordo (the Fat Pine), the largest tree in the Canary Islands, are also worth a visit.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    La Orotava Valley



    Some of Tenerife’s most scenic landscapes can be found along La Orotava Valley. Stretching from the Teide Volcano, this picturesque region is dotted with vineyards, banana plantations, and pine-clad mountains popular for hiking. The historic town of La Orotava serves as a base for adventure in the valley.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Los Roques de García



    A cluster of uniquely shaped rocks lying in the shadows of the notoriously volatile Teide volcano, Los Roques de García are among the top attractions of Tenerife’s UNESCO-listed Teide National Park. Formed by years of ancient volcanic activity, the pyroclastic rocks are best known for their impressive stature and peculiar shapes, some appearing to defy gravity and others taking on an otherworldly presence.The most famous rocks include the ‘Roque Cinchado’, known as ‘God’s Finger’, now one of Tenerife’s most iconic landmarks, and the imposing La Catedral, the tallest at 200-meters high and a popular challenge for climbers. Each rock has its own unique moniker, including ‘El Queso’, ‘Roques Blancos’ and ‘Torrotito’, and the best way to enjoy the views is hiking the circular trail around the valley, which takes around 2 hours.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Las Vistas Beach (Playa de las Vistas)



    Many of the beaches beckon on Tenerife, but there’s a reason the wide stretch of golden sand at Las Vistas is one of the island’s most popular. With a range of facilities and bright blue umbrellas and lounge chairs, there is something for everybody. The waters just off the beach divide into two bays, which are particularly calm and good for swimming. There are also lots of bars, restaurants, and shopping options both on the beach and just nearby.Water sports, beach volleyball, and other leisure activities are also popular here. The beach is well known, so it can be busy with other travelers particularly during the summer months. Because of its accessibility and relative safety, the beach is a good choice for those traveling with families. Those seeking more adventurous activities can choose from boating and scuba diving in the waters off the coast, which often launch from the beach.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Drago Park (Parque del Drago)



    The main draw for Drago Park (Parque del Drago) in Icod de los Vinos, Tenerife, is its towering 800-year-old Dragon Tree, the oldest of its kind in the Canary Islands. It’s a sight best enjoyed from inside the botanical garden, which also features an extensive collection of endemic fauna, birds, caves, and viewing platforms.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Teide Cable Car (Teleférico del Teide)



    Do more than just see Spain’s highest volcano from afar—float to the top on the Teide Cable Car (Teleférico del Teide). This smooth-moving ride transports you to the summit of Mount Tiede, a jumping-off point for hikes among the otherworldly landscapes of UNESCO-listed Teide National Park or stargazing from Teide Observatory.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Las Águilas Jungle Park



    Las Águilas Jungle Park on Spain’s largest Canary Island, Tenerife, is a treasure trove of exotic birds, big cats, lemurs, primates, penguins, reptiles, and more. Explore the park, marvel over daily flight and feeding exhibitions, get adventurous on toboggan runs, and then refuel at the onsite snack bars.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Monje Winery (Bodegas Monje)



    Discover the Canary Islands’ viniculture traditions at Monje Winery (Bodegas Monje) in scenic La Hollera on Tenerife. Sample the reds, whites, and rosés; wander the vines; and learn how traditional methods and modern innovation come together. Then, enjoy some of the best views on the island from the terrace at the on-site restaurant.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Monkey Park Tenerife



    Located in the southern part of the island, Monkey Park Tenerife is a breeding and refuge center for endangered primates. The park is home to free-roaming lemurs, gibbons, and squirrel monkeys—to name a few—and gives you the chance to enjoy close contact with the semi-wild primates.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    El Médano



    The sweeping coastal winds and long sandy beaches of El Médano provide some of the best conditions for windsurfing and kite surfing on Tenerife. Perched along the southeast coast, the traditional Spanish town offers a laid-back alternative to the island’s busiest beach resorts, making it a popular spot for both families and adrenaline seekers.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Auditorio de Tenerife (Tenerife Auditorium)



    With its wave-like silhouette and futuristic architecture looming over the waterfront of Santa Cruz harbor, Tenerife Auditorium is one of the capital’s most recognizable landmarks. The sculptural marvel doubles as a prestigious entertainment venue, where you can enjoy music concerts, operas, and dance performances.More

    Tours & Tickets

    Tours & Tickets

    Pyramids of Güímar Ethnographic Park and Botanical Garden (Pirámides de Güímar)



    At Pyramids of Güímar Ethnographic Park and Botanical Garden in Tenerife, uncover the history of the six mysterious lava-stone pyramids and explore the Canary Islands’ only poisonous plant exhibit in the Poison Garden. Then, learn about Polynesian culture, visit the Casa Chacona Museum, and wander the themed gardens.More

    Tours & Tickets

    See more Tenerife attractions

    Explore Tenerife by interest

    Outdoor Activities

    Tours, Sightseeing & Cruises

    Art & Culture

    Food & Drink

    Tickets & Passes

    Seasonal & Special Occasions

    Classes & Workshops

    Unique Experiences

    Travel & Transportation Services

    Trip ideas

    5 Tenerife Festivals Worth Planning Your Trip Around

    Whenever you visit, there’s sure to be something going on, from colorful parades to riotous street parties. Here are some of the best festivals in the largest Canary Island.

    How to Spend 2 Days in Tenerife

    With two days to explore Tenerife, you’ll have time to ride a cable car up a volcano, do some mountaintop stargazing, take an ocean cruise, learn about the island’s famous carnival celebrations, relax on the beach, and more.

    How to Spend 3 Days in Tenerife

    Three days in Tenerife give you ample time to explore volcanic landscapes, sample local culture and cuisine, and enjoy downtime at the beach.

    See all Tenerife articles

    Top activities in Tenerife

    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator.”>Likely to Sell Out

    Whale and Dolphin Watching Sailing Boat with Drinks, Snacks and Swimming Time




    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator. “>Likely to Sell Out

    Kayaking with Dolphins and Snorkeling With Turtles in Tenerife




    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator.”>Likely to Sell Out

    Tenerife: Quad Adventure Teide Tour




    Mt. Teide and Masca Valley Tour in Tenerife




    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator.”>Likely to Sell Out

    La Gomera Day Trip from Tenerife




    Teide by Night: Sunset & Stargazing with Telescopes Experience




    Whale & Dolphin Watching Boat Tour from Los Cristianos




    Whale and Dolphin Watching Cruising Catamaran with Lunch and Drinks



    €59. 00

    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator.”>Likely to Sell Out

    Night Sky Star Safari Teide National Park Tenerife




    3-hour Whale and Dolphin Watching and Listening Tour




    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator.”>Likely to Sell Out

    Whale and Dolphin Watching Yacht Trip in Puerto Colon




    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator.”>Likely to Sell Out

    Tandem Paragliding Flight in South Tenerife




    Jet Ski Excursion (1H or 2H) in South Tenerife




    Kayak Safari with Dolphin and Turtle Watching in Guaza

    star-4. 5



    Likely to Sell OutBased on our booking data and information from the provider from the past 30 days, this experience is likely to sell out through Viator.”>Likely to Sell Out

    Whale Watching Eco-Adventure from Costa Adeje




    Most Famous Catamaran in Tenerife Island (2 hours and 3 hours tours)




    Small Group Whale Watching Catamaran Cruise with Transfer, Food & Snorkeling




    Medieval Show and Dinner at Castillo San Miguel with Transfer




    BRONZE paragliding tandem flight above Costa Adeje with free pick up and water




    Scuba Dive for Beginners in a Turtle Area in Costa Adeje




    See all experiences

    Explore our promoted experiences

    Operators have paid Viator more to have their experiences featured here

    Recent reviews from experiences in Tenerife


    Best Day Ever!

    Alexandra_A, Aug 2022

    Guided Kayak Tour From Los Cristianos Beach Tenerife

    Our guides were so lovely and gave us some amazing information on the tour, not to mention a whole heap of suggestions on the best things to do/eat in Tenerife.



    Great for anyone

    YAJAIRA_O, Jul 2022

    STARGAZING BUS TOUR, Volcano Teide at Night, Meal & Drinks included!

    The tour was very informative got to see a lot of cool stars.



    A must while on Tenerife

    Diane_O, Jun 2022

    Whale and Dolphin Watching Cruising Catamaran with Lunch and Drinks

    It was an amazing experience to see whales and dolphins up close!



    Amazing instructors and great experience!

    Nipuni_M, Jun 2022

    Tenerife: Quad Adventure Teide Tour

    The views were jaw dropping and overall one of the best activities in tenerife.



    Amazing experience!

    Caitlyn_H, Apr 2022

    Whale and Dolphin Watching Cruising Catamaran with Lunch and Drinks

    We loved the views, got to see dolphins/whales, the team on board was amazing and the cava was delicious!



    Very interesting and engaging tour

    Gerard_O, Apr 2022

    Tenerife Gastronomy Tour with Two Winery Visits and 4-Course Lunch

    Great to see the Northern part of Tenerife and a chance to see a family run winery and old town with historic buildings and our guide was excellent



    Just great

    Richard_H, Aug 2022

    Small Group Whale Watching Catamaran Cruise with Transfer, Food & Snorkeling

    Just not enough stars available to rate this, 5 isn’t enough, I honestly believe this is one of the best things you can do in Tenerife, the staff are amazing and speak perfect English which is great even though me and my 10 year old son are trying to learn Spanish and believe you should, the boat is luxurious, we saw whales a few meters from the boat, he got sea sick and the staff and other customers were so accommodating, there was no hard selling of photos or any of that business and in my opinion was under priced, our first outing was cancelled when we got to the harbour because of rough sea’s and we were offered a full refund or to rebook at a later date, we were picked up and dropped off back to the hotel without any charge then picked back up again in a brand new transit minibus with a friendly driver when we had rebooked and again no charge, it would have cost easily €30 each way so in total €120 in taxis alone, we chose the sunset experience and I had watery eyes at one point and my son asked why I was crying, it was because it was the best end to a holiday I could have ever imagined, looking at the island lit up like a Christmas tree from the distance, I absolutely recommend anyone travelling to Tenerife to do this, don’t waste your time with the regular tourist boats they sell you at the sea front, we have done the Peter Pan boat etc which was good and we enjoyed it at the time, this is just off the scale, thank you so so very much you guys rock 👍



    Amazing Experience with Brisa Paragliding

    Pavla_K, Aug 2022

    Tandem Paragliding Flight in South Tenerife

    Having the wish to see Costa Adeje Golf course from a bird view, flight instructor navigated the glider in that direction.



    Great day out (full summary)

    Euan_M, Aug 2022

    Tenerife: Quad Adventure Teide Tour

    The guides were fluent in English and Italian.



    A MUST if you like your own space the luxury way!

    Alasdair_J, Aug 2022

    Whales and Dolphins excursion on a Luxury Yacht in Canary Islands

    Got to swim off the boat, get close to the rock faces to see the red crabs, and the on board nipples were superb.



    Amazing Experience

    Rebecca_W, Jul 2022

    Small Group Whale Watching Catamaran Cruise with Transfer, Food & Snorkeling

    We got to see both pilot whales and dolphins up close, an unforgettable experience.




    Debora_S, Jul 2022

    TEIDE NIGHT Astronomy Stargazing Bus Tour, Meal & Drinks included!

    We went to see the sunset above the clouds and was a great experience as it was magnifiecent.



    Not to be missed!!!

    minesh_p, Jun 2022

    Buggy Teide Express 3. 30 Hrs

    Add this to your list of excursions when travelling to Tenerife, it’s definitely one of the best ways to see and explore the Island.



    A must in Tenerife

    Luisa_G, May 2022

    Teide tour with Sunset and Stars

    Got to see an amazing sunset with a glass of cava and then stargazing higher up the mountain.



    Don’t hesitate, just go!

    Nora_S, May 2022

    Whale and Dolphin Watching Yacht Trip in Puerto Colon

    We saw dolphins and whales from very close, it was just so cool to see these amazing animals in their natural environment.



    Nice way to spend an hour

    Rob_B, Apr 2022

    Banana Plantation and a Farm by Tuk Tuk from Costa Adeje

    The plantation was interesting to see too, we bought some fruit that is grown there on the farm, and the kids enjoyed the beautiful views along the way.



    The trip was our high…

    Connie_v, Jan 2022

    Mt. Teide and Masca Valley Tour in Tenerife

    Tour guide spoke fluent English and German and was very knowledge.



    Great value for money

    Jonathan_N, Dec 2021

    Tenerife Gastronomy Tour with Two Winery Visits and 4-Course Lunch

    For the price of this excursion, we found it very enjoyable and a great way to see parts of North Tenerife.




    Darren_H, Nov 2021

    Tandem Paragliding Flight in South Tenerife

    What an experience and a frill to see the south of Tenerife in this amazing way.



    Great fun

    Darren_S, Oct 2021

    Parascending Tenerife. Stroll above the sea on the south coast of Tenerife

    Was great fun, good family experience, lovely way to see Tenerife.


    We perform checks on reviews

    Click to see tours and tickets to experience 

    People Also Ask

    What is Tenerife best known for?

    Tenerife draws sunseekers to its sandy beaches year-round, and it’s one of the most popular winter sun destinations in Europe. The island is also known for its volcanic topography—the Teide Volcano is Spain’s highest point, and the rugged landscapes provide plenty of options for hikers.


    What activities are popular in Tenerife?

    The sun is always shining in Tenerife, and outdoor activities can be enjoyed year-round. Hit the beach to surf, snorkel, or scuba dive; try water sports such as kayaking, stand-up paddleboarding, and parasailing; or head inland to hike, mountain bike, or drive an ATV around the volcanoes.


    What is the best month to go to Tenerife?

    While the most popular months are July and August, the best time to visit Tenerife is actually from April-June and September-November, when you can enjoy the warm weather without the crowds. Tenerife has mild, sunny days year-round, making the island a popular choice for a winter sun getaway.


    Which is the nicest part of Tenerife?

    Many vacationers opt to stay on the southwest coast of Tenerife, where the beach resorts of Playa de las Americas, Costa Adeje, and Los Cristianos are some of the island’s most popular. For a change of scenery, try the luxury resorts of Puerta de la Cruz on the north shore.


    What is there to do in Tenerife at night?

    Tenerife’s nightlife is legendary, and the bars and nightclubs of Playa de las Americas and Santa Cruz de Tenerife stay open till the early hours, especially in peak season. Alternatively, join an evening safari tour and enjoy stargazing in the Teide National Park


    Are things cheap in Tenerife?

    Yes, at least in comparison to mainland Europe—Tenerife is a tax-free island, and prices are often lower. Average daily costs for vacationers in Tenerife are about US$122, but this greatly depends on your choice of accommodation and activities. Low-season travelers can often snag a bargain at the island’s resorts.


    Frequently Asked Questions

    The answers provided below are based on answers previously given by the tour provider to customers’ questions.


    What are the top things to do in Tenerife?


    What are the top activities in Tenerife?


    What are the top things to do near Tenerife?


    What do I need to know before visiting Tenerife?

    More Tours in Tenerife

    • Art & Culture
    • Audio Guides
    • Classes & Workshops
    • Food & Drink
    • Kid-Friendly
    • Likely To Sell Out
    • Outdoor Activities
    • Seasonal & Special Occasions
    • Tickets & Passes
    • Tours, Sightseeing & Cruises
    • Travel & Transportation Services
    • Unique Experiences

    Things to do near Tenerife

    • Things to do in Canary Islands
    • Things to do in Gran Canaria
    • Things to do in La Palma
    • Things to do in Fuerteventura
    • Things to do in Puerto del Rosario
    • Things to do in Lanzarote
    • Things to do in Arrecife
    • Things to do in Funchal
    • Things to do in Calheta
    • Things to do in Agadir
    • Things to do in Essaouira
    • Things to do in Marrakech
    • Things to do in Madeira
    • Things to do in Atlantic Coast
    • Things to do in Central Morocco

    Trending attractions

    • Hoover Dam
    • Molokini Crater
    • Colosseum
    • Eiffel Tower
    • Statue of Liberty
    • Na Pali Coast
    • Burj Khalifa
    • Tulum
    • Road to Hana (Hana Highway)
    • Las Vegas Strip
    • French Quarter
    • Alcatraz
    • River Seine
    • Sagrada Familia
    • Blue Lagoon
    • Acropolis
    • Skydeck Chicago at Willis Tower (Sears Tower)
    • Ellis Island
    • Dubai Marina
    • Santorini Volcano

    Popular on Viator

    • Statue of Liberty Tours and Tickets
    • The White House Tours and Tickets
    • Antelope Canyon Tours and Tickets
    • Hoover Dam Tours and Tickets
    • Alcatraz Tours and Tickets
    • Stonehenge Tours and Tickets
    • Auschwitz-Birkenau Memorial and Museum Tours and Tickets
    • Beverly Hills Tours and Tickets
    • Colosseum Tours and Tickets
    • Washington Monument Tours and Tickets
    • San Diego Zoo Tours and Tickets
    • Space Needle Tours and Tickets
    • Eiffel Tower Tours and Tickets
    • Pearl Harbor National Memorial Tours and Tickets
    • Empire State Building Tours and Tickets
    • Art Institute of Chicago Tours and Tickets
    • Aquarium of the Pacific Tours and Tickets
    • Blue Lagoon Tours and Tickets
    • Burj Khalifa Tours and Tickets
    • Metropolitan Museum of Art (The Met) Tours and Tickets

    Not Found (#404)

    Not Found (#404)


    ..something went wrong!

    Sorry, we didn’t find the page you were looking for



    Railway tickets


    Countries and cities


    Date there

    Date back




    Dog sled tours

    Snowmobile tours

    Quad bike tours

    Walking tours


    Bike tours


    Ski tours

    Diving and snorkeling

    Jeep tours

    Surfing and SUP tours

    Combined tours

    Horse tours


    Excursion tours

    Ski trips

    Helicopter tours

    Fishing tours

    Fitness and yoga tours


    Railway tours

    Are you looking for one of the sections below?



    Railway Tickets



    We have made a selection of interesting articles for you!

    Leave feedback


    Thank you very much 🙂

    Your feedback is very important to us and will be posted on the service as soon as possible.

    Tenerife, Spain – travel guide Planet of Hotels

    Santa Cruz de Tenerife is the very first resort of the island. Between 1833 and 1927, it was the capital of the Canaries, then sharing this title with Las Palmas de Gran Canaria. The city has preserved many architectural monuments in the style of baroque and neoclassicism, built during the colonial period. Particularly noteworthy are the Palace of Charles XVIII, the Masonic Temple, the castle of St. John the Baptist, the Castillo Negro Fort, the small church of St. Francis of Assisi and one of the most important religious buildings in Tenerife – the Church of the Immaculate Conception of the Blessed Virgin Mary.
    Interestingly, in the neighboring town of San Cristobal de la Laguna, there is a church with exactly the same name, which is no less significant attraction. Of the modern buildings, the building of the Auditorio de Tenerife concert hall should be noted. This symbol of the city has been featured on a Canary Islands postage stamp, and its acoustics are considered among the best in the world. The historical and cultural attractions of Tenerife are represented by interactive exhibitions of the Museum of Nature and Man, exhibits of the Museum of Natural History and art canvases in the Municipal Museum of Painting and Sculpture. Near the city is perhaps the most popular beach in the archipelago – Las Teresitas. It was created artificially and stands out among all the others with yellow sand brought here from the Sahara. Near it is Taganana – another magnificent beach, but already black, which is usual for this region.

    San Cristobal de la Laguna is the cultural capital of the island, listed as a UNESCO World Heritage Site, the very first city built here, and a very close neighbor of Santa Cruz de Tenerife. They are so close to each other that they gradually began to merge and are connected by a tram line. La Laguna is a real gift for lovers of ancient architecture and walks along the ancient winding streets. Many quarters have not changed at all over the past 300 years and have completely retained their medieval flavor. The most beautiful church in the city is the Cathedral of San Cristobal de la Laguna. It was built in the Neo-Gothic style and is known for the fact that the ashes of Alonso Fernandez de Lugo, the famous Andalusian commander who conquered the richest islands of the archipelago for the Spanish crown, are buried within its walls. Here is the most visited temple of the Canaries – the Cathedral of St. Catherine of Siena. Not far from the city there are two natural and quite spacious beaches. Surfers have chosen Playa del Arenal, while on the pebbly El Roquet you can sunbathe, swim and even buy yourself delicious fish for lunch in the neighboring fishing community. There are easy walking routes in the mountains, and here is one of the best viewing platforms in Tenerife – Mirador de la Cruz de Carmen. Green tourism enthusiasts can head to the nearby farming towns, which are also renowned for producing excellent Tenerife rum.

    Puerto de la Cruz is a resort on the northern coast of the island. Despite the very large number of tourists, the city has not lost its charm and still resembles a fishing village. In the 19th century, the British medical community recognized the local climate as ideal for life – here the air temperature fluctuates in the range of + 15-22ºС all year round. Despite its modest size, it has preserved quite a lot of interesting architectural monuments, which are concentrated in the historical center. Puerto de la Cruz is unusually picturesque – narrow cobbled streets unexpectedly end in blooming gardens, and on black sand beaches you can not only sunbathe, but also admire stunning views of the bright green mountain valleys and the majestic slopes of the Teide volcano. Sea sports such as diving and paddle surfing are very popular here. And lovers of ecotourism and extreme sports can explore a huge number of routes around the island, visit the paragliding base at the foot of the Teide or go on an underwater walk in the La Rapadura lava tube.

    Los Cristianos is a colorful and distinctive resort for families with children. It used to be a small fishing village, which still occupies the western part of the city. It is very interesting to walk and observe the local leisurely life here. The eastern zone is exclusively touristic. It is built up with hotels and entertainment complexes. Of course, there is a great beach with shallow water for children. And if you get tired of a measured rest, you can always go to the neighboring resort of Las Americas, which practically merged with Los Cristianos. Its main beach is rocky and great for surfing. As for the embankment, it is unlikely that you will be able to find a family cafe here – it is built up with noisy bars and pubs.

    La Orotava is one of the most fashionable resorts on the island. It attracts tourists with its chamber, relaxing atmosphere and picturesque beaches. In the old center, a lot of mansions built in the 16th-17th centuries in the classic Spanish style have been preserved. The three-story House with Balconies deserves special attention – the former residence of one of the Spanish conquistadors, in whose premises the Colonial Museum is open. You can relax after a walk on the shady alleys of the magnificent botanical garden or in one of the two no less beautiful parks. The beaches of La Orotava are deservedly considered one of the best on the island – they are noticeably different from the neat and well-groomed, but somewhat “unnatural” beaches of the south coast. The coastal landscape immediately reminds of its volcanic origin – it is dark sand, from which black fragments of solidified lava stick out in some places. They look especially colorful at low tide. Most vacationers choose Playa Bollullo – the best place in La Orotava for swimming. The beaches of Playa de los Patos and Playa de Ancon are less crowded and frequented by nudists.

    What to see in Tenerife | Travel.Blender in the Canary Islands

    It is neither too cold nor too hot in Tenerife: in winter the air temperature does not fall below +20°C, in summer it does not rise above +25°C. Therefore, it is called the Island of Eternal Spring. Beach holidays are available here almost all year round.

    The south of Tenerife is a little warmer, the ocean is calmer, but there are fewer tourists in the north. There are popular resorts both there and there. Here they are:

    Infographic source: otdyhsamostoyatelno

    The best beaches in Tenerife
      Route 1. Teide Volcano in Tenerife
        Route 2. Tenerife village Masca, and more
          Route 3. The capital of Santa Cruz de Tenerife, and more

            The best beaches in Tenerife

            Tenerife has beaches with black volcanic sand and beaches with specially imported white or golden sand. Entrance is free everywhere, but there are paid services (umbrella, sunbed, shower, toilet). The southern coast of the island is more noisy and crowded. In the eastern and northern parts there are many beaches for water sports, there are high waves, and swimming is not very comfortable.

            • Playa del Duque in Costa Adeje is the best beach in the south with white and yellowish sand, marked with the Blue Flag (an award given to beaches with clean and safe water for swimming). Length – 390 m, width – 60 m.
            • Las Vistas in Los Cristianos with golden sand and a fountain in the middle of a small artificial island. Length – 850 m, width – 80 m.
            • Los Guyos at the foot of the cliffs of Los Gigantes. The length is 180 m, the width is 20-30 m. There is very clean warm water and black volcanic sand.
            • La Arena in Puerto de Santiago. The beach has been awarded the Blue Flag. Length – 140 m, width – 40 m.
            • Leocadio Machado in El Medano will be of interest to windsurfers and kitesurfers. Length – 560 m, width – 100 m.

            Las Teresitas Beach. Photo source: webtenerife

            • Las Teresitas , a few kilometers from Santa Cruz, is considered the most beautiful in Tenerife: there is light sand, palm trees and mountains on the horizon. There are almost no waves, but the water is not very clean. Length – 1300 m, width – 100 m.

            But even without the sea, there are things to do and see. We have compiled 3 routes for you so that you can diversify your vacation.

            Route 1. Teide Volcano in Tenerife

            Teide Volcano (the highest point in Spain) and its surrounding area, Teide National Park , are considered the main natural attraction of Tenerife. This is a unique landscape of bizarre rocks and hardened lava. There are hiking trails in the park. The card can be purchased at the local tourist centre.

            Photo source: ispaniainfo

            Mount Teide offers stunning views of the valley, and on clear days you can even see the neighboring islands. To get to the top, you need to use the cable car, and then overcome another part of the way on foot.

            The price of a cable car ticket is from 13.5 euros (one way), the price includes an audio guide in Russian. The trailers leave at intervals of 10 minutes to a height of 3,555 m, each of them can accommodate 35 passengers. Travel time is about 8 minutes. Opening hours – from 09:00 to 16:00. If you want to go to the crater (it’s another 163 meters), you need a permit. It can be issued for free here and then printed.

            TripAdvisor user Tonya D shares his impressions of visiting Teide and tips:

            Ocean and sky merge on a barely visible horizon. And nearby islands seem to float in the sky. The spectacle is breathtaking. People climbed with small children 3-4 years old, and old age. The road to Teide through the forest, you can get into the cloud. On a trip, it is better to take warm clothes with you, at the top it is about 7 degrees. And it’s better to arrive early, you can get closer to the ski lift in the parking lot and there will be less queue. Must see 100%.

            You can buy tickets in advance for the desired date on the funicular website.

            The small hotel Parador de Canadas del Teide is located in the park. Paradors are a chain of state-owned hotels located in unusual places. Opposite the hotel is Roques de Garcia , another postcard attraction. These rocks were created as a result of the uneven destruction of a wall of volcanic lava. The most remarkable of them is called the Finger of God.

            Photo source: webtenerife

            By car, the park can be reached via TF-21 and TF-38. Entrance to the park is free and open 24/7.

            Another interesting place in the area of ​​Teide is lunar landscape from volcanic tuff near the town of Vilaflor. You can reach the landscape along the walking route from the parador in 6 hours.

            Photo source: webtenerife

            How to get to the natural monument by car, says Sergey, author of the Tenerife in Russian blog:

            On the TF-21 we drive by car to the town of Vilaflor and, having passed it, we count 2 km on the speedometer. On your right, there will be an exit to a dirt road, marked with a wooden information board. We turn off and after 7 km we park the car as it will. Continue to the left following the signs on foot for about 3 km.

            The eucalyptus forest Esperanza grows on the northeastern slope of the Teide. It is safe to walk along it: there are no wild predators or poisonous snakes. Only hedgehogs. Highway TF-24 runs through the forest from Teide to La Laguna.

            Route 2. Tenerife village Masca and more

            Masca is a tiny picturesque village high in the mountains in the western part of Tenerife. Until the 60s of the XX century, it was cut off from the rest of the island, and its inhabitants, if they got out of the wilderness, then only on foot through ravines and ridges. Now there is a road here. The population of the village is 120 people, many houses are abandoned, but there are restaurants and shops for tourists.

            Photo source: blog.ostrovok

            A popular 9-kilometer hiking route starts in Maska, which leads down to the ocean, along the gorge of the same name. The descent takes about 3-4 hours and does not require special physical preparation.

            The route ends at a rocky beach with a jetty where boats from Los Gigantes moor several times a day. If you are traveling in Tenerife by car, do not leave the car near the Masca, otherwise you will have to climb back to the village after it. It’s easier to first drive to the port of Los Gigantes, and from there take a taxi. There are also regular buses to Masca and Los Gigantes.

            A boat ticket (costs about 10 euros) can be bought at Maska and even from a taxi driver. The last flight departs at about 16:00, check the schedule in the village itself.

            Photo source: travelask

            The town of Los Gigantes in Tenerife is known for its huge sheer cliffs of dark basalt. There is a port from where pleasure boats leave to admire the rocks and watch dolphins and whales. The depth of the ocean near the rocks is 30 m, so the place is very attractive for diving and fishing.

            In an article on the TravelAsk website, Elizaveta Kolesnikova writes about how to get to Los Gigantes:

            The way from the resorts of Los Cristianos and Playa de Las Americas will take only half an hour by car, you will need to move along the TF-47 highway. the distance is a little less than 30 km. Also, regular buses No. 473 and 477 go through these cities, the final stop of which is Los Gigantes. Buses leave approximately every half an hour and the cost of the trip is 4.65 euros. Travel time is about an hour.

            From the north coast of Tenerife, getting to the rocks is also easy. If you go from the resort town of Puerto de la Cruz by car, you will have to cross almost a third of the island, the road will take just over an hour, you will need to move along the TF-5, TF-82 and TF-454 highways. Bus service is also established here – route number 325, travel time will be 1:40, the trip will cost 7.10 euros.

            You can see the current bus schedule on the Titsa website.

            From Los Gigantes, take the TF-82 highway or TF-436 by car to Cape Teno, the westernmost point of the island.

            Here, admire the picturesque cliffs, the raging ocean and breathtaking views. There are two lighthouses on the cape: one of the 19th century, the second was built not so long ago, in 1987.

            The best view of the cliffs is from the Archipenque lookout at the entrance to the resort on Highway TF-454. Tenerife has a lot of viewing platforms. Here they are:

            Infographics from the authors of the blog “Rest on your own”

            Route 3. The capital of Santa Cruz de Tenerife, and not only

            We start from Garachico, a small town that used to be the main sea gate of the island. Here we are interested in natural pools of El Caleton . They were formed in the 18th century as a result of a volcanic eruption, when the waters of the ocean met with red-hot lava. These pools are a true natural spa. Volcanic rocks enrich the water with minerals, and swimming here is good for health.

            Photo source: agentika

            Pools are equipped with comfortable slopes. Free admission.

            Further our path lies along the TF-5 highway to Santa Cruz de Tenerife , the capital of the island. And after it in our program there will be one more item.

            The most recognizable landmark of Santa Cruz de Tenerife is the Auditorio de Tenerife concert hall, whose acoustics are considered to be among the best in the world.

            Photo source: TripAdvisor

            A TripAdvisor user with the nickname Xenia_Xskaya shares his impressions about him:

            Very beautiful architecture near the building and a nice cafe. The shape is obviously a nod to the Sydney Opera. It is nice to sit in the shade, look at the waves of the ocean, drink coffee or eat ice cream. There is a beautiful embankment around, below stones with graffiti – on them are images of famous musicians, singers – the past – Beethoven, Strauss and the present – Diaghilev, Madonna, Pavarotti, etc. Be sure to check out the rocks!

            Near the Auditorio there is an old fort Castillo Negro (Castillo de San Juan).

            If you are interested in history and science and want to get acquainted with the archeological finds made on the island, as well as its natural wealth, look into Museum of Nature and Man . The highlight of the exposition is the mummies of the Guanches, the indigenous inhabitants of Tenerife. The ticket price is 5 euros.

            Photo source: siesta

            You can’t help but walk along the Plaza de España, the main square of the Canary Islands. The square was built on the site of the castle of San Cristobal. Its walls have survived to this day, you can see them in the underground gallery.

            From the capital we go to the most significant archaeological monument of Tenerife – the mysterious pyramids of Guimar . Their origin has not yet been established. On the territory of the ethnographic park there is a museum with a cinema hall and a photo exhibition.

            Photo source: webtenerife

            Opening hours: daily from 09:30 to 18:00 . Cost: €11.90 for adults, €5.50 for children.

            We have not told you about all the sights of the island of Tenerife. The island has something to surprise even an experienced tourist, and it is unlikely that you will be able to see all its beauties in one vacation. But you will always have a reason to come back here!

            What else to see?

            Canary Islands: Tenerife or Lanzarote?


            Author: ABC of Spain

            Canary Islands: Tenerife or Lanzarote?

            The Canary Islands are a favorite holiday destination for many Europeans who want to enjoy the sun all year round. It is easy to get here, the cost of living is quite affordable, and the rest itself can be very interesting and varied. But which of the islands should be preferred if you plan to buy real estate in the Canary archipelago? This question is answered by the portal Aplaceinthesun, which compares the two most popular islands among tourists – Tenerife and Lanzarote.


            One of the undoubted advantages of the island of Tenerife is considered by many to be that the island is practically divided into two parts: northern and southern, the contrast between which is simply amazing, given the small size of this territory. The conditional border between them runs from west to east from Garachico to Candelaria and Santa Cruz, crossing the highest peak of Spain, Teide. In the southern part of the island are the popular resorts of Los Cristianos and Playa de las Americas, where tourists from all over Europe come to relax on the beaches, do water sports and walk along the endless promenades. The northern part of Tenerife is less populated by tourists, there is more greenery and authentic nature. Puerto de la Cruz is often referred to as the little Buenos Aires for its distinct South American flair. In the northern part of the island, the Cañadas del Teide National Park, the Orotava Valley and the Anaga Rural Park are the main attractions of the island.

            Tenerife is considered the most accessible island of the Canary archipelago. Many European airlines make regular flights here, in particular, British Airways, Iberia, Easyjet, Ryanair, Tiu. Thanks to this, ticket prices remain affordable even in high season, and tourists from European countries never have problems getting to their desired vacation spot.

            Despite Tenerife’s small size, there are not only beaches, but also great designer shops and even Michelin-starred restaurants. The most expensive hotels on the island are located on the Costa Adeje. Wealthy tourists prefer to stay at the five-star Hard Rock Hotel, Sheraton La Caleta and Gran Meliá Palacio de Isora. By the way, the latter boasts the largest infinity pool in Europe.

            As for the purchase of real estate, the modern Tenerife market offers a choice for every taste and budget: apartments, townhouses, villas, small apartments and studios. A two-bedroom apartment in the center of Los Gigantes will cost the buyer about 250,000 euros, but after driving just five minutes from the coast, a similar apartment can be purchased for 180,000 euros. According to experts, when buying real estate in Tenerife, you should not chase after the most convenient location: such properties will not only be more expensive, but, as a rule, older and will often need additional repairs.

            In the southern part of Tenerife, there are many bars, shops, and here is the largest Siam water park in Europe. Visitors and residents of this part of the island can enjoy golf, dolphin watching, camel riding, safari or surfing at El Medano. A tennis academy is also open here, wine and gastronomic tours are organized for those who wish. And lovers of antiquity can go on an excursion to La Orotava, a traditional small town in the north of the island, or visit the Museum of Nature and Man in Santa Cruz.


            The Canary Islands attract European tourists primarily for their climate: the sun shines here all year round. This fully applies to Lanzarote, where, due to the nature of the landscape, it rains very rarely. You can get here from the continent in just four hours. The island has become a favorite vacation spot for those who intend not just to lie on the beach, but to spend their holidays more actively. Club “La Santa” is considered one of the largest entertainment and sports complexes in Europe. It has long been the winter base for many top British athletes. However, not only eminent Olympians can visit it, but also everyone who decides to go swimming, horseback riding, paragliding, underwater safaris and diving.

            To preserve the amazing landscapes of Lanzarote and harmoniously fit objects of human activity into them, it was largely possible thanks to the efforts of local architect, artist and environmentalist Cesar Manrique. His influence can be seen throughout Lanzarote, from low-rise buildings to street art. He insisted that all buildings on the island should be built in such a way as to fit harmoniously into the landscape and practically not stand out against the background of the surrounding nature. Residents and guests of Lanzarote can still admire such works of the great architect as the Cactus Garden and Mirador del Rio.

            Lanzarote is a great place for a beach holiday. Tourists enjoy relaxing on the beaches of Puerto del Carmen, Costa Teguise or the famous Papagayao Playa. The most sophisticated vacationers can go to one of the small “secret” beaches, which are not so crowded and are visited mainly by local residents. The first underwater museum in Europe is located off the coast of Lanzarote, and those who want to relax in unity with nature can go to one of the ecological campsites or retreats near Arrecife. One can only be surprised that with all the magnificence and popularity of the island, real estate prices here are still quite affordable. So, an apartment with an ocean view in Puerto del Carmen can be purchased at a price of 125 thousand euros, a villa with a pool and a courtyard – for 170-250 thousand euros.

            Which island do you prefer? Tenerife today is a more developed and “universal” island, where avid party-goers, families with children, and the elderly feel great. Lanzarote, on the other hand, has the coolest climate in the entire Canary archipelago. Despite the small size of the archipelago, each island is unique in its own way, so before settling on one of them, it is worth visiting at least a few – and deciding whether to give preference to the more cosmopolitan and tourist Tenerife or enjoy closeness to nature and amazing “ethereal » landscapes of Lanzarote.

            beaches, things to do on vacation

            Tenerife is a unique island, because Tenerife is always diverse. In the south, it is hot and dry; traditionally, it attracts beach lovers. In the north it is more humid, and the coast is covered with greenery: here an excellent excursion program is added to the sea. Among the main resorts of the island are Playa de las Americas, Costa Adeje, Los Cristianos, Playa Paraiso in the south, and El Medano with the capital, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, in the north. Each of these cities has its own character and opportunities for recreation in 2022, which we will talk about right now.

            What makes Tenerife unique

            The north and south of Tenerife offer not only a different climate, but also different entertainment. In addition to the actual beach holiday in the south, in the north there are more opportunities for windsurfing and diving, shopping and quiet family leisure.

            The south is more attractive for young people: there is a rich nightlife and noisy entertainment. Do not forget also about aqua and zoos, historical sights and natural beauties. In general, come – you will not regret it.

            Sightseeing in Tenerife

            Tenerife, like any territory under ancient Roman rule, has many interesting historical sights. However, not always historical – among them there are those that will interest not only lovers of antiquity.

            • Guimar. They are like miniature pyramids. Locals say that the history of their occurrence is unknown: it looks like a beautiful legend, and tourists do not mind. Beautiful and mysterious – a must see.
            • City of Garachico. Have you ever seen a volcanic city? In front of you is just the very one: rocks, a coast of solidified lava and not a single beach. But right in the rocks there are special pools, and on the shore there are a lot of crabs scurrying back and forth.
            • Basilica of Candelaria. An architectural monument and at the same time a venue for celebrations: if you’re lucky, you can get to one of them with fireworks, an orchestra, wine and other mass entertainment.
            • Dragon tree. Near the village of Icod de los Vinos, in the Drago Park is one of the symbols of Tenerife. This tree is over a thousand years old!
            • Teide Volcano and Teide National Park. The sleeping formidable giant is still serene: a great chance to get acquainted with the unique “volcanic” nature of the island.

            Beach holidays in Tenerife in 2022

            Tenerife is deservedly called the island of eternal spring: even in January it is 18-20 degrees Celsius. When planning a beach holiday, consider an important detail – the temperature difference in the north and south of the island can reach 5-8 degrees. For those who can’t stand the heat well, this is a great way to spend a comfortable holiday.

            Another nuance is the volcanic nature of the island, and this affects not only the color of the sand of the beaches. Often even the most luxurious hotels do not have direct access to the sea: a free bus takes vacationers there. Otherwise, everything is like in continental Spain – the beaches of the island are municipal, you only need to pay for a sunbed and an umbrella. The cost is approximately 8 euros.

            People come here for the warm sea from July to October.

            The best beaches of the island

            • Playa de las Teresitas . The only beach with specially brought white sand. Palm trees are planted around, and the dam acts as a breakwater. Playa de las Teresitas is the beach symbol of Tenerife, which can be seen on many guidebooks around the island.
            • Playa Martianez and Playa Jardin . Places “for an amateur”: there is a rocky coast and small landscaped areas. If you want to try something new in a beach holiday, be sure to visit.
            • San Marcos . Located next to the picturesque fishing village of Puerto de la Cruz. Peace and quiet – for those who are tired of crowded beaches.
            • Playa la Arena . Beach with therapeutic black volcanic sand.

            What to see and do in Tenerife?

            This island is a real tourist paradise, not only because of the weather, but also because of the abundance of all kinds of entertainment.

            • “Siam Park” (38660 Costa Adeje) – the largest amusement park in Europe (area – 185 sq. km). Feel the real delight of visiting a corner of Southeast Asia recreated here! A gigantic amount of entertainment and the nearby Aqualand water park threaten to take more than one day from you. Ticket prices in 2022 – 34 euros, for children under 12 years old – 23 euros.
            • Real jousting tournaments in Castillo de San Miguel (Avenida Edelmira Alfonso, Aldea Blanca). You can get from Las Americas by taxi (25-30 euros) or by shuttle bus (if there are enough passengers).
            • Laura Park is a 13.5 hectare zoo in the western part of Puerto de la Cruz. There is a water circus here, and exotic animals are almost in their natural habitat. Entrance prices for the 2017 season are 33 euros for adults and 22 euros for children over 6 years old.
            • Holidays in Tenerife offer plenty of opportunities for windsurfers too: the sea at El Medano is famous for its waves and constantly blowing winds. Training and equipment – at any of the rental points on the coast.
            • A real paradise for those who want to feel like an F1 pilot – “Karting Club Tenerife” (Carretera del Cho S/N | Autopista del Sur TF-1 – Salida 25). Tracks of any complexity allow you to hold the stages of the World Cup and Europe – in 2022 they will fall in September. You can not only train, but also watch the races of the masters!
            • “Exit Palace” (San Eugenio, 38680 Costa Adeje) is a cult place for young people (and not only): rock concerts, flamenco festivals and other shows are often held here. Although it is better to clarify the repertoire in advance, it is worth visiting in any case – even the appearance of this concert hall attracts attention.

            Tenerife island on video

            All videos

            Things to do in Tenerife | Absolute Travel

            The Canary Islands showcase the many opportunities and attractions that Tenerife finds the best epicenter to enjoy them all. From dream beaches to Spain’s highest (and roaring) peak, there are plenty of what to do in Tenerife .


            • 1 Enter the Teide National Park
            • 2 Relax on its beaches
            • 3 Whale Watching in Tenerife South
            • 4 Admire the colonial architecture of La Orotava.
            • 5 Get lost in the magical laurel forests of Anaga.
            • 6 See Los Gigantes
            • 7 Taste its delicious gastronomy
            • 8 Visit Santa Cruz de Tenerife

            Enter Teide National Park

            An ancient Guanche legend says that the sun god was kidnapped by the evil god Guayota and locked inside a volcano. A story that perhaps explains the eruptions that occurred in 1492, shortly before. Departure of Christopher Columbus to the New World or 1798 when this lunar landscape was covered with lava. Featuring , Mount Teide, at 3,718 meters, is not only the highest peak in Spain, but also the third largest volcano in the world. . The icon that turned the so-called Teide National Park into one of is the most visited in Spain, especially due to its design as World Heritage in 2007. A valley of the moon that you can enter during your adventures in Tenerife to get as close as possible to what is considered the “roof of Spain”.

            Relax on its beaches

            Playa de las Teresitas

            Tenerife has some of the best beaches in Spain . The turquoise waters contrast with the white (or black) sand of its coasts, cliffs and secret spots. AT Adeje Coast , one of the most touristic areas of the island, thanks to areas like Los Cristianos it has dream beaches like duke or Las Americas . If you want to swim on more remote beaches, the cliffs Los Gigantes they hide coves and bays between the gaps woven by this wild land. Or the wild charm of La Tejita , so isolated from noise and tourism and considered one of the most famous beaches of Tenerife : Las Teresitas , more than a kilometer long.

            Whale watching in the south of Tenerife

            Dolphin on the loose in the waters of Tenerife

            The islands are always a good place to watch aquatic species in the wild. And Tenerife is not far behind. From up to 21 cetacean species recorded in the waters of the Canary Islands, bottlenose dolphins and pilot whales they become the protagonists of any catamaran adventure, as they stay in the south of Tenerife for most of the year. Various excursions depart daily from Puerto Colon or Los Cristianos to see these noble animals in their natural state. Always yes, respecting their space and lifestyle. Without a doubt one of the best things to do in Tenerife .

            Admire the colonial architecture of La Orotava.

            We don’t know if this is due to the location away from the peninsula, its tropical character or its island atmosphere, but the truth is that the Canaries drink a lot from the culture of Latin American countries, and architecture is one of them. The best example is the city of La Orotava, in the north of Tenerife , a city whose colorful houses, wooden balconies and churches from another time transport us to the specific Cartagena de Indias or Cuban Trinidad. As an icing, there’s nothing better than a admire its old watermills and try the famous gofio , a type of flour made from the toasted cereals that make up some of the island’s most famous dishes.

            Get lost in the magical laurel forests of Anaga.

            Laurisilva cloud and subtropical forest species found in places such as the coast of Chile, Uruguay, Argentina or the Macaronesian region which includes the Canary Islands. A magical paradise, part of which we can find in Tenerife, in particular through a magical walking route through Anaga, in the northeastern part of the island . Considered one of the oldest forests in Europe , Anaga is a cluster of ferns or junipers, lost villages and breathtaking views, making this one of the best holidays on the island of Tenerife.

            See Los Gigantes

            Tenerife is a dizzying island full of breathtaking natural monuments. And one of them is undoubtedly Los Gigantes, rocks up to 600 meters high . Considered the “devil’s walls” by the ancient Guanches, this stone complex not only hides some of the most beautiful bays in its corners, but is also one of the best places to watch the sunset in Tenerife from , especially from Punta Teno or Los Gios beach. Simply magical.

            Taste its delicious gastronomy

            The island character has endowed the gastronomy of the Canaries and Tenerife in particular with a unique character. While its famous wrinkled mojo potatoes in different flavors and colors They are the main dish of the lucky ones, there are many other delicacies such as the aforementioned gofio, goat meat, boiled eggs (eggs with potatoes, chorizo ​​or sweet peppers), Canarian stew or my favorite drink, barraquito . . Simply great coffee made from cinnamon, lemon zest or condensed milk.

            Visit Santa Cruz de Tenerife

            Although the capital of Tenerife is not the main attraction of the island, it never hurts to get lost in the streets of this island city, whose rhythm, people and color can be appreciated in every corner. From modern Auditorio de Tenerife to the old Castillo de San Cristobal passing through its extensive Rambla or even Palmetum, one of the largest palm groves in Europe. Santa Cruz de Tenerife is building a cosmopolitan microcosm from which you can embark on new adventures.

Good weather in europe in february: 14 Best Places to Go in Europe in February 2021

Опубликовано: March 29, 2020 в 11:12 am


Категории: February

Europe in February – Weather, What to Wear and Best Places to Visit!

Travelling to and exploring Europe is a dream of many people out there! From France’s cultural attractions to Iceland’s hot springs and geothermal pools, staggering alpine views in Switzerland to Germany’s magnificent list of stunning architectural destinations, the list is never-ending! In short, Europe is a dream destination! Visit Europe in February as it offers mind-balmy temperatures, smaller crowds, cheap accommodations and easy travelling! Read on to know about the weather, what to wear and the best place to visit in Europe in February. Some are warm; some are cold yet perfect to have a fantastic vacation!

Weather in Europe in February

In February, the climate begins to warm up a bit! In the north, temperatures gradually increase with an average high of 2°C, though the low remains a chilly -7°C. The places experience more daylight. Whereas in the west, average temperatures are around 3°C, increasing to 5°C on warmer afternoons. In Eastern Europe, it is cold and chilly. The Mediterranean region is also quite cool, the average high is up to 14°C but still, it’s much warmer than many other areas of Europe.

Also read – 10 Amazing Things To Do In Europe In Summer


Europe Tour Package Starting @ ₹ 48,268

Amazing Art Galleries. Marvellous Bridges. Delectable Cuisine. Affordable Itineraries.

What to wear in Europe in February

Europe is all about comfortability and mix-matching our fashion sense! For northern countries, cotton and wool are always best. It helps the body regulate itself better under all those layers and makes you stay warm. In southern countries, you can wear thin jackets and style up your dresses! You will also need sunglasses. Sea temperatures averaging 15°C, So, you definitely won’t want to swim! Soak up the sun and enjoy the mild weather by exploring many historical sites, monuments, gardens, cafes, etc!

Source – Pixabay

Places to Visit in Europe in February

  1. Amsterdam, Netherlands
  2. Reykjavik, Iceland
  3. Monte Carlo, Monaco
  4. Barcelona, Spain
  5. Nice, France
  6. Algarve, Portugal

1. Amsterdam, Netherlands

  • Average High Temperature: 6°C | Average Low Temperature: 0°C

The capital city is one of the ideal destinations for those who want to snuggle in cold, chilly winter. The weather temperature ranges between -1 to 5°C. You can also celebrate events/festivals such as Valentine’s Day, De Koninck Blues Festival, Wonderland Festival and many more. Visit tons of night markets, wonderful cafes, monuments and explore the fun city, Amsterdam to the fullest! It is absolutely the perfect time for people who want to get the most out of winter. Cold weather + falling snow + dark nights + twinkling lights = Perfect Vacation!

Also read – 10 Best Restaurants In Amsterdam To Visit For Great Food

Source – Pexels

2. Reykjavik, Iceland

  • Average High Temperature: 3°C | Average Low Temperature: -3°C

The coldest and world’s northernmost capital, Reykjavik is one of the best destinations to explore! The cold temperature gives you the perfect opportunity to bask in and witness the beauty of the Aurora Borealis (the Northern Lights). This time of year also offers various activities such as ice carving, lava caving, glacier hiking and even whale watching. Enjoy a dip in the hot springs and geothermal pools with your partner and have some amazing moments!

Also read – 10 Best Day Trips From Reykjavik That You Should Not Miss At All!

Source – Pexels

3. Monte Carlo, Monaco

  • Average High Temperature: 12°C | Average Low Temperature: 7°C

Monte Carlo is often referred to as the ‘Billionaires Playground’. The weather is not too hot nor too cold which makes it perfect to explore the city. This is the place to complete all your fantasies. Visit Monte-Carlo Casino, a world-famous casino and try your luck or stroll around the streets! The place has some Michelin star restaurants, where you can have delicious cuisines!

Also read – Top 10 National Parks to Visit in Europe

Source – Pexels

4. Barcelona, Spain

  • Average High Temperature: 15°C | Average Low Temperature: 8°C

Barcelona is a top tourist destination! Don’t let the cold weather stop you as the city has a lot to offer. At this time of year, you can indulge in a number of events and celebrations such as Barcelona Carnival, Celebration the Llum BCN – Festival Llum, Santa Eulàlia Festival and Chinese New Year. Go sightseeing mind-boggling architecture, beautiful gardens and wondrous landscape. The nightlife of Barcelona is thrilling and you cannot miss it!

Also read – 8 Amazing Reasons to Visit Barcelona – The Architectural City of Spain

Source – Pexels

5. Nice, France

  • Average High Temperature: 13°C | Average Low Temperature: 6°C

Nice is a picturesque coastal town and far away from cold weather even in February. It is located on the French Riviera, at the foothills of the Alps (yes that is how this city got its charm). This city attracts artists and aesthetes as the city has a rich cultural history! You can have comfortable strolls in the city; explore the famous Promenade des Anglais, Parc du Château. Visit cafes and restaurants and relish the taste of French cuisine. Nice also has festivals and celebrations in February such as the Nice Carnival!

Also read – 10 Best Reasons to visit France: History, Beauty And Beyond


France Tour Package Starting @ ₹58,956

Eiffel Top. Bordeaux Wine Tasting. Provence Lavendar Fields. Nice Beaches. Magical Mont Saint Michel.

6. Algarve, Portugal

  • Average High Temperature: 17°C | Average Low Temperature: 9°C

Algarve is situated in the southernmost region of Portugal. It is known for its mild weather as you can soak up Vitamin D even in February. Mostly the temperature ranges between 12 – 17 °C with no rainfall. It has a rich culture, huge and beautiful landscapes and scrumptious cuisines. In this month, you will have – lesser crowds, open beaches and cheaper accommodation. You can also participate and celebrate festivals such as the famous Semana de Chocolate (chocolate week) and the annual Loulé Carnival in February!

Also read – All-Inclusive Hotels In Portugal – Check Out The Top Holiday Resorts!

Source – Pexels

This small-sized continent has a lot on its plate! From ancient cities to modern technologies, Europe does it all well! Get your backpacks ready because it is time for you to get on a plane and visit Europe. Check out Pickyourtrail, as it offers fantastic prices on Europe tour packages. You can also customise your Europe itinerary on your own and cast everything according to your pace! Keep your passports handy because you will need them very soon!

Related Itineraries

Magical 6 Nights Europe Tour Packages

  • Flights excluded

  • 2 star accommodations
  • 7 activities
  • Shared transfer

Perfect 10 Nights Europe Trip Packages

  • Flights excluded

  • 2 star accommodations
  • 9 activities
  • Shared transfer

Scenic 10 Nights Europe Tour Package from India

  • Flights excluded

  • Hotel accommodation
  • 11 activities
  • Shared transfer

A 6 night itinerary for a feel-good Scotland vacation

  • Flights excluded

  • 3 star accommodations
  • 6 activities
  • Shared transfer

Beautiful 13 Nights Europe Travel Packages

  • Flights excluded

  • 1 star accommodations
  • 10 activities
  • Shared transfer

Mesmerising 12 Nights Europe Packages

  • Flights excluded

  • Hotel accommodation
  • 15 activities
  • Shared transfer

Majestic 10 nights Europe Holiday Packages

  • Flights excluded

  • Hotel accommodation
  • 4 activities
  • Private transfer

Ideal Antalya Turkey Holiday Packages

  • Flights included
  • Hotel accommodation
  • 5 activities
  • Private transfer

Exquisite 14 Nights Europe Trip Package from India

  • Flights excluded

  • Hotel accommodation
  • 13 activities
  • Shared transfer

Charming 9 Nights Europe Packages from India

  • Flights excluded

  • 2 star accommodations
  • 5 activities
  • Private transfer
Related Posts
Portugal in May: All in one Guide for a Perfect Trip!

Portugal in September: An Absolute Guide for a Great Trip!

Portugal in August: A Complete Guide!

Portugal in April: Weather, Things to do, Best tips and more!

Portugal in February: A Complete Guide for Best Travel Experiences!

Portugal in December: Weather, Travel tips, Things to do and more!

Portugal in November: A Whole Guide for Perfect Travel Experiences!

Portugal in July: Weather, Things to do, What to pack and much more!

Portugal in June: A Complete Guide!

Portugal in October: An Absolute Guide for a Flawless Vacation!

Portugal in March: Weather, Things to do, Travel Tips and more!

Portugal in January: A Complete Guide for a Perfect Trip!

BEST TIME to Visit Europe

SD › Best Time to Visit Europe
Updated: June 9, 2022

See Also

  • Where to Go in Europe – My favorite places for first timers
  • Amsterdam – Where to Stay
  • Barcelona – Where to Stay
  • Florence – Where to Stay
  • Lisbon – Where to Stay
  • London – Where to Stay
  • Paris – Where to Stay
  • Prague – Where to Stay
  • Rome – Where to Stay
  • Santorini – Where to Stay
  • Where to Go in France
  • Where to Go in Spain
  • Where to Go in Italy
  • Where to Go in Greece
  • Europe with Kids

The awesome museums of London (like the British Museum) make London a great year-round destination. Lots to do even when the weather is not great.

When is the Best Time to Visit Europe?

• My Favorites: The 15 Best Places to Visit in Europe

My boys looking out over Santorini – one of the best Greek islands for first-time visitors. When is the best time to travel to Europe? If I had to choose one month as the “best time” to go to Europe it would be September. The weather is wonderful, the beaches and water temperature are still great for swimming, and the crowds are noticeably thinner than July and August.

  • Best Time to Visit Europe for Beaches: If you hope to enjoy sunbathing and swimming in the sea, the best time to visit Europe’s beaches is late June through September. In late May and early June, the water temperatures can still be cool, but by the end of summer can be an ideal time to go. If you’re hoping for the fewest crowds and optimal conditions, plan your visit around mid to late-September, after the kids have gone back to school, when the weather is often idyllic and the water is warm. The beaches of Greece are at their best from late May to late October.
  • Best Time to Visit Europe for Good Weather: The best time for good weather can vary quite a bit in Europe. In many places, particularly the northern countries like Iceland, Sweden, and Norway, July and August bring the best weather of the year, with high temperatures typically hovering around 20 to 22°C. In much of continental Europe, you can generally expect pleasant weather from mid-May through mid-September, with the highest temperatures in July and August, ranging from the low 20s to the low 30s, depending on your exact location, with eastern countries generally experiencing more heat. Summer is hot in the Mediterranean, so if you want to avoid the heat but still enjoy fairly mild weather, go in April/May or mid-September through late October. Italy, in particular, is at its best in the late spring and early Fall.
  • Best Time to Visit Europe for Skiing: Most ski resorts in Europe open in late November and close in mid-April, and generally the earlier in the season, the better the snow. For optimal conditions, fewer crowds, and the best prices on lift tickets, accommodations, and flights go in January. Avoid a European ski trip around the holidays, including Christmas, New Years, Easter and the winter half term that falls in mid to late-February.
  • Best Time for Backpacking: Most backpackers head to Europe between May and September, with peak time in July and August. This time will bring the best weather, the possibility for taking a refreshing dip in a lake, stream, or the sea, and there won’t be a need to pack heavy winter clothing. You’ll also meet a lot of other backpackers along the way, which can be good or bad depending on your perspective. The hostels will all be open too. The downside is that trails can be crowded, hostel prices higher, and you’ll probably have to do laundry more often due to sweaty clothing. In just about every Europe destination, to enjoy more mild weather and fewer crowds, you may want to go toward the end of the busy period in September. If you plan to tackle both northern and southern locales, head north first and then explore the more southern, Mediterranean destinations after the extreme heat of summer has dissipated.
  • Best Time for Visiting Historic Sites: Europe is filled with historic sites, archaeological ruins, and magnificent castles; many that are on practically every travelers’ bucket list. That means if you hope to experience them without bumping elbows with countless other tourists, it’s important to plan ahead, especially when it comes to the most popular attractions, like the Roman Colosseum, the Eiffel Tower, Stonehenge, and the Acropolis in Athens. Peak visitor time is in July and August, and in many places, the heat can make visiting sites an uncomfortable experience, particularly in Eastern and Mediterranean Europe. For destinations in the north and west, the best time to go for decent weather and thinner crowds is just before and after peak season, in either May/June or mid- to late-September. In the east, aiming for around mid-April or mid-September may be ideal, while Mediterranean countries may best be visited in April or from mid-September through October. No matter where you go, planning to arrive early (at least 10 minutes before opening) or toward the end of the day, is usually the better bet for avoiding the biggest crowds.
  • Best Time for a Honeymoon: Europe has a romantic atmosphere year-round but the best months for a memorable honeymoon visit are September, October, April, May, and June. If you wanted great beach weather than focus on late June and early September.

Europe Travel Seasons

The charms, views, sights, and iconic attractions of Paris make it an ideal year-round destination.

Europe spans over 50 countries, with diverse geography and climates that range from the sunny Mediterranean to the Arctic. That said, its nations generally share similar travel seasons, with only a few exceptions as noted.

  • High Season (June through August): June through August is generally the high season in Europe, although in Italy, depending on your destination, August may bring low season benefits like fewer crowds and low rates as most Italians go on holiday this month and temperatures in the major cities can be too hot to bear. In most places, however, the entire summer season is the busy tourist season, with the biggest crowds, the highest accommodation rates, and the highest temperatures of the year. You will have the chance to take advantage of long days, with the sun not setting until 9:30 or 10 p.m., and even later the farther north you go. Expect mild, pleasant temperatures in the north, and searing heat in the southern/Mediterranean regions.
  • Shoulder Season (May, September and October): Shoulder season can be the best time to visit many, if not most, destinations in Europe. Crowds are smaller, rates are often lower and a light jacket or sweater is usually all you need to be comfortable as the weather is mild too. Of course, there are exceptions – the further north you go the chillier it will be, and the further south, the warmer it’s likely to be. The lines at attractions will be longer than they will in the winter, with more visitors catching on to the ideal times to go, but the wait will be much shorter compared to those long ques in the summer.
  • Low Season (November through April): Winter is generally low season, but depending on your exact destination, it can stretch from late autumn through mid-spring. In the north, while you’ll have to deal with freezing temperatures and snow, on clear nights you may have the opportunity to catch the aurora borealis. If you want to enjoy mild temperatures without the hordes of tourists, head to one of the Mediterranean countries. No matter where you go, other than ski resorts, there will be few crowds and usually plenty of accommodation bargains and low airfare too. If you have your heart set on visiting particular attractions, be sure to check to see if they’ll be open as some will shut down in winter, or have limited hours.

Europe Weather by Month: North, West, East and Mediterranean

Visiting an Agriturismo (working farm) in Tuscany or Umbria in Italy is a highlight (especially in spring and fall) of an European vacation.

For the purpose of this article, we’ve broken down the weather in Europe into Northern, Western, Eastern and Mediterranean. In each of those regions, specific numbers are derived from centralized locations: In Northern Europe weather is based on Oslo, Norway; in Western, Brussels, Belgium; in Eastern, Budapest, Hungary; in Mediterranean Europe, Athens, Greece.

Europe Weather in January

  • Northern Europe Weather in January: In much of northern Europe, January is the coldest month of the year. Depending on your specific destination, you can expect snow, or at a minimum, near or below freezing temperatures as well as short, dark days. In some places, such as Reykjavik, Iceland, the northernmost capital in the world, there is only a few hours of daylight this time of year. Further south, Stockholm, Sweden gets a little over five hours of daylight in early January. Temperatures in the north generally average highs that are just below freezing, with lows dipping well below to around -7°C. If you plan to visit this month, you’ll need your warm winter gear, including a coat, hat, scarf, sweater, gloves and thermal underwear. (Average Max Temperature: 1°C. Average Precipitation: 50mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in January: As with elsewhere in Europe, January is the coldest month in the western region with average temperatures hovering around 3°C, though temps only dip below freezing occasionally, with lows averaging 1°C. There is an average of 70mm of precipitation, more often falling as rain than snow. January also means more darkness than daylight with just 8 hours early in the month, as the sun makes its appearance around 8:45 a.m. and sets at 4:47 p.m. Expect some grey, gloomy weather, though it won’t be near as cold as the Scandinavian countries. You will need warm clothing, including sweaters and long-sleeved shirts, a winter coat and warm, waterproof boots. Bring along thermal underwear, gloves and a warm hat for those extra chilly days, especially if you plan to arrive earlier in the month. (Average Max Temperature: 5°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in January: January is the coldest month of the year in Eastern Europe as it is throughout much of the continent. You can expect freezing temperatures, though the chance of rain, snow and other forms of precipitation is fairly low with just 40mm over 11 days. The average high is just 1°C, though that’s not much different from the average low temperature this month at -3°C. You’re likely to need a warm winter coat, warm boots, a good hat, gloves and a scarf – wool clothing and thermals are especially good for warding off the chill. This is one of the cloudiest months of the year, with cloud cover about 90% of the time, but the good news is that the least number of tourists arrive in January, so if you can handle the cold, grey weather, sightseeing will be more enjoyable than at most other times. (Average Max Temperature: 1°C. Average Precipitation: 40mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in January: While Mediterranean destinations can be a great way to enjoy a more mild climate in the winter, don’t expect temperatures that you’d get in the tropics, or any kind of summer-like weather. Still, it’s unlikely to be miserably cold, with daytime highs averaging 13°C and lows at 7°C. Depending on your exact location, you may even enjoy a few especially pleasant days with temperatures rising to 16°C or 17°C. The islands, and the coast of central and southern Greece generally enjoy the most mild temperatures, with snow quite possible in the mountainous areas. Early in the month you’ll see quite a few grey days and a decent chance of rain, but from mid- to late-January there are nearly all overcast days and a greater chance of precipitation, with 57mm falling over 9 days, most coming in the latter half of the month. It’s unlikely that your trip will be ruined by constant downpour, but scattered storms are likely. Be prepared by bringing a portable umbrella and a rain poncho. When it comes to clothing, a mix of short- and long-sleeve shirts, long pants, a sweater and medium-weight jacket should be more than sufficient. (Average Max Temperature: 13°C. Average Precipitation: 57mm.)

Europe Weather in February

  • Northern Europe Weather in February: Temperatures gradually begin to increase in northern Europe this month, with an average high of 2°C, though the low remains a chilly -7°C. There’s quite a bit more daylight, however with 8 hours in Stockholm and Oslo, and 7 in Reykjavik. As with last month, plan to bundle up well to ward off the chill. Cotton and wool are always best, and they will help your body regulate itself better under all those layers when you need to stay warm. You’ll likely need sunglasses too, with the sun coming up more often and an average of just 40mm of precipitation falling over 11 days. (Average Max Temperature: 2°C. Average Precipitation: 40mm. )
  • Western Europe Weather in February: February is very similar to January, though things are beginning to warm. Here, you can expect average temperatures around 3°C, increasing to 5°C on warmer afternoons. Skies are often grey, and sunlight is still at a premium. Pack as you would for last month, planning to dress in layers, and bringing that winter clothing, like thermals, a warm coat and the like. With an average amount of 50mm of precipitation, rain is a little less likely, but it does fall over 18 days, so you’ll still probably need waterproof gear as well. (Average Max Temperature: 5°C. Average Precipitation: 50mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in February: While the average high creeps up a few degrees to 4°C this month, February isn’t much different than January, though there’s even less of a chance for precipitation with just 30mm on average falling over 7 days. As you would for last month, pack for winter weather, including items like thermals, a warm coat, sweaters, a hat, gloves, scarves and the like. There will be slightly more daylight hours now, and a greater chance for sunshine with an average of three hours a day, so sunglasses may be needed too. (Average Max Temperature: 13°C. Average Precipitation: 80mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in February: February in the Mediterranean region is also quite cool, in fact the average temperature in Athens, Greece hasn’t changed at all, at 10°C, though the average high creeps up a degree to 14°C. Still, it’s much warmer than many other areas of Europe, making it fairly enjoyable to visit, and you’ll have far fewer crowds to contend with either. The bad news is that many island and coastal resorts will be closed, but with sea temperatures averaging on 15°C, you probably won’t be wanting to take a dip in the water anyway – instead, enjoy the mild weather by exploring the many historic sites. Bring your sunglasses, as there is an average of six hours of sunshine each day in February, and just 47mm of precipitation over 7 days this month. (Average Max Temperature: 14°C. Average Precipitation: 47mm.)

Europe Weather in March

  • Northern Europe Weather in March: Temperatures continue to climb in March, and with the average high temperature now 6°C, the ice begins to thaw in areas that have been frozen over during the winter. In most major northern European cities, the days are much longer too, with sunrise at 7:15 a.m. and sunset at 5:44 p.m. in Oslo. By the end of the month there is likely to be very little in the way of snow in lowland areas. You’ll still need to pack that winter clothing, but the later in the month you plan to be here, the better the chances that you’ll need a few lighter items too. Remember the weather in March could be anything from well below freezing to pleasantly comfortable and sunny, but it really depends on how far north you go, and if you plan to be near the coast or in the mountains. (Average Max Temperature: 2°C. Average Precipitation: 60mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in March: Although March ushers spring in, it will still feel like winter earlier in the month, but the weather is noticeably warming. The average temperature has increased two degrees to 7°C, and it may get as warm as 10°C. Sometimes the weather is all over the place, in fact, you could even experience all four seasons in the same week, but as the month moves forward, there is more sun and more daylight too. By March 31st, partially thanks to Daylight Savings Time, there is nearly 13 hours of daylight for taking advantage of outdoor activities. Be prepared for whatever hits by bringing warm clothing, including a rain jacket, and dressing in layers, though the later in March you arrive, the more likely you are to need your sunglasses. (Average Max Temperature: 10°C. Average Precipitation: 80mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in March: March brings noticeably warmer weather, marking the official start of spring. Temperatures are rapidly rising now, with pleasant afternoons reaching 10°C and lows now about freezing at an average of 2°C. Earlier in the month you may still get a snow flurry or two, but the second half of March can be a particularly lovely time to be in Eastern Europe, with winter’s chill fading, yet few other tourists to interrupt the views. Prepare for cold nights, as well as sunny comfortable days and a few cooler ones. The weather this time of year can vary significantly from one day to the next, so bring along lighter long-sleeve shirts and sweaters as well as a heavier jacket just in case. The chance of precipitation slightly increases to 40mm, but you can always pick up an umbrella there if you find you really need one. (Average Max Temperature: 10°C. Average Precipitation: 40mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in March: March brings wonderful, spring weather to the Mediterranean, with the average high temperature rising several degrees to a balmy 17°C, and in places like Crete it occasionally reaches 20°C or even higher. Along with spring-like temperatures, this month sees a significant increase in the amount of sunshine and precipitation decreases to 41mm over just 8 days, which is most likely earlier in March. The downside is the sea is still far too cold for a swim, as it still hovers around 15°C this time of year. This is the time of year to plan to dress in layers, as it can be cool one minute and feel hot the next. Bring t-shirts and jeans, as well as a couple of sweaters and a light jacket. You may even want to bring a dress or a pair of shorts, just in case. (Average Max Temperature: 17°C. Average Precipitation: 41mm.)

Europe Weather in April

  • Northern Europe Weather in April: While things are definitely warming, the first half of April is typically similar to March. The average temperature in Oslo has climbed 3 degrees to 5°C, and on nice afternoons it may reach 9°C. There are no worries when it comes to a shortage of daylight, on April 1st there is nearly 11 hours of daylight to enjoy, and by the end of the month the sun rises at 5:17 a.m. and doesn’t set until 9:12 p.m. It’s all about layering now, with long pants, both short-and long-sleeve shirts, a sweater and a winter coat. With just 40mm of precipitation falling in April, you’re unlikely to have to deal with much more than light rain, or light snow in the higher elevation areas. (Average Max Temperature: 9°C. Average Precipitation: 40mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in April: Now it should really be starting to feel like spring, with warmer temperatures reaching as high as 13°C, and a few more dry spells than last month with 60mm of precipitation on average. Still, bring a portable umbrella, or buy one when you arrive as you are likely to need it at some point. The big news is that there is a lot more sun and fewer gloomy days – the sun rises at 6:18 a.m. and doesn’t set until 9:02 p.m. on April 30. You will need your sunglasses, but now you can leave that heavy coat behind, instead, packing perhaps a fleece jacket and a few sweaters. (Average Max Temperature: 12°C. Average Precipitation: 38mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in April: Spring is now in full swing, so you can expect many pleasant days, though the number of tourists arriving starts to increase. The month starts out on the chillier side, but on average, the high temperature climbs significantly – five degrees to 15°C in April. The average rainfall in April is very similar to last month with 40mm falling over 13 days. Prepare for mostly mild days, and cold nights that may get as low as 6°C, as well as occasional light rain. Pack a variety of pieces that can be mixed and matched, and layered easily for the changing weather. You’ll probably want to do a lot of walking, to enjoy those spring blooms and other sights, so be sure to bring a pair of comfortable walking shoes too. (Average Max Temperature: 15°C. Average Precipitation: 40mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in April: Temperatures are increasing even more now, with the average high now 20°C., similar to summer in many northern European countries. It’s drier too with just 31mm of precipitation over six days. It’s definitely time to pack those t-shirts, dresses and shorts, but the sea is too cold for swimming. If you’ll have access to a pool, bringing your bathing suit is still a good idea now but you’ll also need a warm sweater or two, and long pants for evenings. All in all, April is generally a great month for comfortable walking temperatures and fewer crowds. (Average Max Temperature: 20°C. Average Precipitation: 31mm.)

Europe Weather in May

  • Northern Europe Weather in May: It’s officially spring weather in northern Europe now. In fact, this is one of the best months to visit anywhere in the region with frequent mild temperatures and thinner crowds. The average high in Oslo is now 16°C, with the low well above freezing at 7°C. May is all about layers too – pack a mix of clothing for both pleasantly warm and cool days. In many places in Northern Europe, it’s smart to bring a sweater or fleece jacket even during the warmest months of the year. A wind-proof jacket can be a good idea too, especially if you’re planning on lots of outdoor adventures. (Average Max Temperature: 16°C. Average Precipitation: 59mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in May: Like much of the continent, May is a wonderful time to be in Western Europe, with noticeably warmer, more frequent pleasant weather. Average highs increase by four degrees to 17°C and most days hover around 13°C. It’s unlikely to feel what most would call “hot,” however, and evenings are still cool with low temps averaging 8°C. Focus on bringing clothing for warmer weather like short-sleeve shirts and shorts or a dress, but toss in a light rain jacket as precipitation is likely with 70mm this month, along with a sweater for cooler evenings and those occasional chillier days. (Average Max Temperature: 17°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in May: May is known for its mild temperatures that are ideal for sightseeing, with highs now climbing to 21°C, another six degrees higher than last month. The downside is that this is one of the rainier months of the year, and the farther the month progresses, the higher the chance for rain. Precipitation nearly doubles now to 70mm which falls over 14 days, mostly during the latter half of May. You’ll need a good mix of clothing, while keeping in mind the high probability for rain. Bring a light, hooded rain jacket and a portable umbrella, along with items that can be layered, such as both long- and short-sleeve shirts, a lightweight sweater, and a pair of shorts or a dress for warmer days. If you’re coming from a warm climate, it will feel a bit cool, while those who live in more northern areas may think it’s quite summer-like. (Average Max Temperature: 21°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in May: One of the best times of the year to visit the Mediterranean countries is May. Spring is in full gear, and in some places it will feel more like summer, with the average high now 25°C and occasionally climbing to nearly 30°C. There is little in the way of rain, with only an average of 23mm falling on just four days this month. Bring a mix of clothing for both cooler and warmer days, though you’re more likely to need lightweight items. Long pants and short-sleeve shirts will likely suffice most of the time, though you may want to bring shorts, a dress, and a couple of sweaters too. If you plan to go later in the month, you may even find the sea warm enough for swimming, as it generally reaches 20°C to 22°C by late May, so be sure to bring a bathing suit too. (Average Max Temperature: 25°C. Average Precipitation: 23mm.)

Europe Weather in June

  • Northern Europe Weather in June: Now that June is here, you can expect long days with only a few hours of darkness, especially in Norway, Sweden and Denmark, with sunrise before 4 a.m. and sunset at 11 p.m. – in Iceland it’s even more extreme, with the sun rising at 2:55 a.m. and setting around midnight on summer solstice. That means you should bring an eye mask to help you sleep, along with clothing for cool, warm, and rainy weather. When it’s cloudy and rainy, it will feel pretty chilly, but once the sun comes out, it’ll be warm. There’s 80mm of precipitation this month, and the temperature, on average, gets as warm as 20°C and as cool as 11°C. (Average Max Temperature: 20°C. Average Precipitation: 80mm. )
  • Western Europe Weather in June: With the arrival of summer, you can expect mostly pleasantly warm temperatures, with average afternoon highs of 19°C, but light rain is fairly common, interspersed among sunshine. June is really a mixed bag with cool evenings and low temperatures dipping to 11°C and 90mm of precipitation, so plan accordingly by bringing a rain jacket and a sweater, as well as lightweight clothing such as short-sleeve shirts, shorts or a dress. With over 16 hours of daylight this month you’ll have plenty of time for those outdoor activities. (Average Max Temperature: 19°C. Average Precipitation: 90mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in June: June in Eastern Europe means summer weather, in fact it can get rather warm with average afternoon highs now reaching 24°C. Temperatures above 32°C are not unheard of, though they’re most likely to occur during the latter half of the month. There is still a good chance for rain, with 60mm falling over 12 days, helping to cool things off a bit. The longer days, with sunrise at 4:46 a.m. and sunset at 8:44 p.m. on summer solstice, combined with fewer clouds, make it one of the sunniest months of the year, along with July, with 14 hours of sunshine on average each day. Plan to bring a light hooded rain jacket or an umbrella for sudden downpours, as well as lightweight clothing for sightseeing during the day. You may need a sweater for evenings spent outside as it can get cool after dark, dipping as low as 14°C at night. (Average Max Temperature: 24°C. Average Precipitation: 60mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in June: Summer has officially arrived to the Mediterranean, and odds are, it’s going to feel hot, with high temperatures increasing five degrees to an average of 30°C, though it can get much hotter than that. June in this region sees warm, sunny weather, lots of tourists and higher rates. There is little, if any rain, with only 11mm of precipitation on one day in June. Bring your summer clothing now, including sun protection like sunscreen and a hat as well as a bathing suit. Along with a pair of open-toed shoes like flip flops for the beach, you’ll need comfortable, closed shoes for exploring the sights, as roads are often unpaved and rocky. (Average Max Temperature: 30°C. Average Precipitation: 11mm.)

Europe Weather in July

  • Northern Europe Weather in July: July brings the warmest weather of the year in most places in northern Europe, though it probably won’t be what most people consider hot. In Oslo, highs can reach 22°C, and evenings may be as cool as 13°C. Plan to bring short-sleeve shirts and shorts or a dress for warm days, along with a couple of sweaters or sweatshirts and long pants for those cooler evenings. A windproof, waterproof jacket to keep you protected from wind and rain, just in case, is a good idea too. (Average Max Temperature: 22°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in July: Along with August, July is the hottest month of the year in the western region of Europe, though temperatures generally don’t get much warmer than 22°C, so if you’re coming from a warm climate it may feel relatively cool. In certain areas, the humidity can be brutal, however, which means it can feel a lot hotter than what the thermometer reads. This is the time for your summer clothing, but you may need a sweatshirt or sweater for evenings which can get down to 13°C. There is less precipitation now than there was in June, but with 70mm over 17 days, you’re still likely to need that rain jacket. (Average Max Temperature: 22°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in July: Summer is in full swing now, with high temperatures creeping up two degrees to 26°C. This is the hottest month of the year in many Eastern European countries, and temperatures may reach as high as the upper 30s, and there isn’t much rain to cool things down, just only 40mm of precipitation falling over 12 days in July. Bring lots of summery, lightweight clothing along with sun protection, and just a couple of items for cooler evenings like a sweater or light jacket.(Average Max Temperature: 26°C. Average Precipitation: 40mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in July: The Mediterranean countries tend to reach their highest temperatures in July, with the average highs in the mid-30s in most areas, though mountainous regions and places like northern Greece will be more pleasant, averaging in the upper 20s and low 30s. Rain is practically non-existent with only 6mm of precipitation over one day in July. Those hot temperatures and constant sun make ideal conditions for going to the beach, in fact, you might find yourself spending a lot of time in your bathing suit. Bring shorts, skirts, dresses, tank tops and the like, along with plenty of sun protection. (Average Max Temperature: 33°C. Average Precipitation: 6mm.)

Europe Weather in August

  • Northern Europe Weather in August: August is the next warmest month, and is usually quite similar to July, which is why the most visitors to northern Europe tend to arrive in July and August. Pack as you would for last month, with a mix of clothing for both cool and warm weather. The average high dips slightly this month to 20°C, and the low drops a degree to 12°C. It’s a little rainier, with 90mm of precipitation falling over 17 days, so that windproof, waterproof jacket is likely to come in handy. (Average Max Temperature: 20°C. Average Precipitation: 90mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in August: August is similar to July, with the high and low the same – 22°C and 13°C respectively, though there is less precipitation with just 50mm falling over 16 days. Expect lots of sun, spread among a few cloudy grey days, as well as high humidity. Although there’s no doubt its summer, it’s unlikely to feel scorching hot here, and you can usually count on at least a bit of mist or rain to cool things off. Pack your summer gear including t-shirts and shorts or skirts, though you’ll still need a few warmer items for those cooler nights, like long pants and a sweater, light jacket or sweatshirt. (Average Max Temperature: 22°C. Average Precipitation: 50mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in August: August is just as hot and humid as July, with the highest average temperatures of the year at 26°C, and many days well over that. August also experiences some of the sunniest days of the year, with an average of 13 hours of sunshine, though there is usually more precipitation. Some 70mm falls over 10 days, which means that while you’re less likely to be caught in the rain, when it does come in may be in downpours. Pack as you would for July, bringing sunscreen and plenty of summery clothing along with a sweater or sweatshirt for cooler evenings.
    (Average Max Temperature: 26°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in August: August is similar to July, although it may even be slightly hotter with the average high temperature now 34°C. It won’t cool down much in the evening, as even the lows are a relatively warm 24°C, on average. The good news is that the humidity levels drop to the lowest of the year at 50%, making those extremely hot temperatures a little more bearable. Pack as you would for last month, bringing lots of sun protection and lightweight clothing. (Average Max Temperature: 34°C. Average Precipitation: 6mm.)

Europe Weather in September

  • Northern Europe Weather in September: With September marking the official start to fall, days are starting to get shorter and temperatures are dropping, though not significantly. Even by September’s end, there is still around nine hours of daylight. The biggest difference is the average high temperature, which has now dropped four degrees to 16°C, and it can get as cool as 7°C. While you’ll still need a few items of clothing for warm weather, you may want to concentrate more on things like sweatshirts, sweatshirts, long sleeves and pants. There isn’t as much precipitation as there was in August, with 70 mm this month, but a rain jacket is still a good idea. (Average Max Temperature: 16°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)

  • Western Europe Weather in September: Fall is in the air, with temperatures noticeably dipping and rain slightly increasing to 60mm in September, though in many areas this month is often ideal, with tourist crowds thinning and plenty of lovely, sunny days in between the occasional cloudy, wet ones. Bring a mix of clothing for both warmer and cooler days, including a rain jacket, and plan to dress in layers, as often times mornings are crisp or misty, while afternoons bring the sun. Be aware that it can rain with temperatures around 17°C one day and be sunny and practically hot the next. The average high is now 19°C, dipping three degrees from last month, while lows can get as cool as 11°C, and days are gradually getting shorter too, with sunrise at 7:41 a.m. and sunset at 7:22 p.m. by September’s end. (Average Max Temperature: 19°C. Average precipitation: 60mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in September: September is one of the best times of the year to be in Eastern Europe, with summer crowds beginning to thin, and warm, but not too hot days and plenty of sunshine. Temperatures noticeably cool with the arrival of autumn, with the average high dropping four degrees to a very pleasant 22°C. Throughout the month you can expect comfortable weather for sightseeing during the day and early evenings, with lows dropping to around 12°C late at night. September also sees an average of 70mm of precipitation, but the chance for rain on any given day is the lowest of the year, and when it does arrive it’s usually not enough to interrupt outdoor activities. The mild weather makes it easy to pack when you visit this month, bring short-sleeve shirts, long pants like light jeans or khakis, as well as a light sweater or jacket for evenings. (Average Max Temperature: 22°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in September: September ushers in much more pleasant weather, and can be another one of the best times to be in the Mediterranean. The average high temperature drops five degrees to 29°C, with the summer heat finally cooling as autumn approaches. As the sea has had all summer to warm, it’s often ideal for swimming this month and may remain that way through early October. Your summer clothing will still suffice, though you may want a light sweater or jacket in case the wind picks up or on cooler evenings. There is still little need to worry about rain, with 14mm falling over three days in September. (Average Max Temperature: 29°C. Average Precipitation: 14mm.)

Europe Weather in October

  • Northern Europe Weather in October: Autumn has officially arrived, and fall colors are typically at their peak in early October in most areas. The weather is likely to be crisp and cool, though in some places it may be downright cold, while rain, sleet or even snow could put a damper on outdoor activities. But there are positives too, like mutton and crab in season in places like Norway, which means you can indulge while sitting next to a roaring fire as a storm rages outside. The average temperature is now just 7°C and highs generally don’t get much about 10°C. 90mm of precipitation falls over 16 days, so you’ll definitely need a rain jacket and clothing for cool and/or cold weather. (Average Max Temperature: 10°C. Average Precipitation: 90mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in October: October weather in Western Europe is unpredictable and inconsistent. Earlier in the month frequently brings wonderful fall weather along with colorful foliage, though it can be nice and sunny one moment and grey and rainy the next. On some days, it may feel warm enough to enjoy dining at an outdoor café, while others may feel like winter is on the way. The high temperature averages 15°C, while lows may get down to 8°C, and precipitation is on the increase with 70mm falling over 19 days in October. The amount of daylight decreases significantly by month’s end, further, with the sun rising at 7:32 a.m. dipping below the horizon at about 5:18 p.m. (Average Max Temperature: 15°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in October: October is a time when you’ll want to hope for the best, but prepare for the worst, especially as the month progresses. You’re likely to enjoy at least a few crisp, sunny days as well as an array of brilliant fall color earlier in the month, but be prepared to dress in layers – the onset of cooler weather can lead to heavy fog in some places. You’re likely to need a waterproof jacket and a sweater as well as shoes you don’t mind getting wet. On a pleasant afternoon temperatures may reach 16°C, but it’s likely to get chilly at night with lows down to 7°C.
    (Average Max Temperature: 13°C. Average Precipitation: 80mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in October: Fall has arrived, and the weather will be noticeably cooler. The average high temperature drops another five degrees to 24°C and nights can be as cool as 16°C, though most of the time it’s going to be sunny and warm, with many areas enjoying an “Indian summer.” Precipitation picks up quite a bit to 53mm falling over five days, most during the latter part of October. Bring a mix of clothing, including both short- and long-sleeve shirts, as well as shorts and long pants, and a sweater or light jacket for evenings. (Average Max Temperature: 24°C. Average Precipitation: 53mm.)

Europe Weather in November

  • Northern Europe Weather in November: Winter weather is here, with temperatures plummeting to a low of -1°C and high temperatures which only an average of 4°C, while days are much shorter too, with just six-and-a-half hours of daylight by the month’s end in Oslo, and only a little over five farther north in Reykjavik. There is no need for warm weather clothing, plan to bundle up and bring that thermal underwear along with rain or snow gear. The average precipitation is 70mm, and it may be in the form of rain or snow, depending on where you are. (Average Max Temperature: 4°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in November: November weather in Western Europe usually means wet and grey, with the average high only reaching 9°C and lows of 4°C. While the average precipitation doesn’t increase all that much from last month in most areas, it falls over 20 days, and combined with less daylight, around eight hours by November’s end, it is likely to be dark and dreary a lot of the time. You could still experience a few sunny days with fairly pleasant temperatures, but on the opposite end of the spectrum, it can occasionally dip well below freezing. That means you’ll need to be prepared for both extremes, planning to dress in layers and bringing along a warm, waterproof jacket. (Average Max Temperature: 9°C. Average Precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in November: By November, the cold has arrived, though the tourist crowds have dissipated and you’ll often find lower accommodation rates and airfare by traveling to Eastern Europe this month. During the day, the mercury usually doesn’t rise much above 7°, and at night the average temperature is just 2°C, which means odds, are, it will be frosty. Be sure to pack cold-weather gear like a heavy coat, gloves, a hat and scarf, and warm shoes and socks and prepare for some precipitation, with 60mm falling over 13 days in November – in the form of snow in more mountainous, higher elevation areas, and rain elsewhere. Most of the time, it will be grey and cloudy. (Average Max Temperature: 7°C. Average Precipitation: 60mm.)
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in November: November often brings a mixed bag, with a number of pleasantly warm, sunny days, and temperatures often hovering around 18°C to 20°C. In between, expect more overcast skies and a greater chance of precipitation, with an average of four hours of sunshine a day and increased rainfall, with 58mm over 8 days. There are far fewer tourists in November, which also means many places have shut down for the winter, though the ones that remain open typically offer lower accommodation rates. Bring a variety of clothing, including items for both warmer and cool days, and you may want to have a rain jacket too. (Average Max Temperature: 19°C. Average Precipitation: 58mm.)

Europe Weather in December

  • Northern Europe Weather in December: Northern Europe is a fabulous place to be if you’re hoping to enjoy a winter wonderland experience in December. The average temperature in many places is now below freezing, at -3°C, and high temps usually don’t climb above freezing either, averaging -1°C. It’s definitely time to dress for the cold. Think wool, lots of wool, and thermal base layers as well as warm gloves, a good hat, scarf and winter boots. If you’re going to be in mountainous areas, or in the far north, you may need some extra winter gear too. (Average Max Temperature: -1°C. Average Precipitation: 50mm.)
  • Western Europe Weather in December: You’ll need your warm winter coat for a visit to Western Europe in December. Earlier in the month the precipitation that falls is usually in the form of rain, but by mid-month it may be replaced by snow in some places. Either way, expect it to be cold, wet and cloudy, with highs reaching just 6°C and lows hovering just above freezing at an average of around 3°C. You’re unlikely to need thermal underwear, but plan to dress in layers, and bring a pair of gloves, a warm hat and a scarf along with that winter coat. Waterproof boots may be a good idea too, with 70mm of precipitation falling over 21 days this month. (Average Max Temperature: 6°C. Average precipitation: 70mm.)
  • Eastern Europe Weather in December: Temperatures throughout much of Europe are some of the coldest they’ll be all year, other than January. Most Eastern European cities experience typical continental weather in December, with temperatures dipping below freezing, making snow possible, though there isn’t as much precipitation, with 40mm falling over 12 days this month. When it does snow, unless you’re in the mountains, it’s usually light – just enough to add a sparkle to the landscape. While there will be plenty of cloudy days, you’ll probably enjoy a few gorgeous, albeit chilly, days with brilliant blue skies and sunshine too. There’s no need to worry about bringing warm weather clothing now, think sweaters, jeans, wool, scarves, gloves, warm boots and a warm coat. (Average Max Temperature: 13°C. Average Precipitation: 80mm. )
  • Mediterranean Europe Weather in December: December brings some of the coldest temperatures of the year, though compared to northern areas, it’s going to be rather mild in the Mediterranean region. The average high temperature is 15°C, and it doesn’t get much colder than 9°C, which means the weather is still relatively decent for wandering the streets and enjoying the sights, just not warm enough for lounging on the beaches. Rainfall increases significantly to 98mm over 11 days now, and that precipitation is likely to come in the form of light snow in the higher elevation areas where it can sometimes dip below freezing. This time of year, bring clothing for cooler weather and rain, including a rain jacket, long pants, sweaters and long-sleeve shirts. (Average Max Temperature: 15°C. Average Precipitation: 98mm.)

Europe Events and Festivals

Europe in January

  • New Year’s Day – January 1 is a public holiday throughout Europe. While New Year’s Eve is celebrated in a big way throughout much of the continent, on this day, you’ll find that many places, including restaurants, shops, museums and historic sites are closed, although there are usually at least a few eateries open for lunch and dinner. Lots of major cities will feature parades, like Paris’ New Year’s Day Grand Parade on the Champs-Elysees.
  • Ephiphany – Epiphany is celebrated in many places throughout Europe annually on January 6. Families and communities gather together to celebrate, and for some, the day is even more important than Christmas. This is the main event of the holiday season in Italy, when Italians exchange gifts as the final day of the “Twelve Days of Christmas.” In Spain and Germany, it’s known as “Three Kings Day.” In Finland, the holiday is called loppiainen, a name that dates back to the 17th century. This is when Christmas trees are traditionally taken out of Finnish homes. Depending on your destination, you may find that many places are closed.
  • Winter Sales – Winter sales begin in January throughout much of Europe. While there are no set dates, this is a great time for shopping enthusiasts seeking big bargains on all sorts of items at everything from independent boutiques and mom-and-pop shops to outlets and shopping malls.
  • Up Helly Aa, Shetland Islands, Scotland – One of the most spectacular and the largest of all Europe’s fire festivals, the Up Helly Aa is hosted on the last Tuesday in January every year in Lerwick, the main port of the Shetland Islands in Scotland. It celebrates the region’s Viking heritage with a torch-lit procession and traditional music before culminating with more than 1000 costumed “guizers,” who each take the name of a figure in Norse legend, throwing burning torches into a traditional Viking longship.
  • Bruges Snow and Ice Festival, Belgium – If you visit Bruges, Belgium during the first week of January, you can catch the last days of the Snow and Ice Sculpture Festival. This stunning spectacle features 40 artists who make incredible creations from some 300 tons of ice and 400 tons of snowflakes.

Europe in February

  • Venice Carnival, Italy – Carnival is one of the biggest festivals in all of Italy, and in Europe, and there is no place that does it bigger or better than Venice. It takes place during the period before Lent, which usually falls in February but can fall anywhere from late January through early April. Many of the events such as the elaborate masquerade balls require an invitation and come at a steep price, but there are plenty of others that are free and open to the public, including street performances, concerts and the candlelit parade of boats, part of the “grand finale,” where hundreds of gondolas float down the main canal.
  • Patras Festival, Greece – The Patras Carnival in Greece is also among Europe’s largest, and its festivities begin in January and run through February. It includes parades, balls, street music, dances, treasure hunts and more.
  • Valentine’s Day – Valentine’s Day, February 14, is a newer holiday in some places like Denmark, which only started celebrating in the 1990s. In most places in Europe, it’s not a big event, but celebrated by exchanging cards and giving gifts like flowers and chocolates. Many restaurants offer Valentine’s specials to attract couples as well. France tends to go all out, with some three-quarters of the French celebrating the day, which means you’ll find many romantic events, dinners and the like to attend, particularly in Paris.
  • Fete du Citron/Lemon Festival, Menton, France – The Lemon Festival is held in the scenic coastal town of Menton on the French Riviera, beginning in mid-February and running through early March. The event includes parades, with all sorts of floats featuring citrus fruit creations along the promenade, along with musicians and other spectacular displays, while evening processions are followed with fireworks over the bay. There are also a wide range of traditional products inspired by lemons for sale, like honey, jams and jellies, perfumes, soaps, liqueurs and more.

Europe in March

  • Taste of Florence Food Festival, Florence, Italy – If you want to experience the best of Italy’s food culture, plan to attend this festival which features some 300 stands that serve food from across the country over 3 days in mid-March.
  • Las Fallas, Valencia, Spain – This massive event takes over much of Valencia for five full days and nights, March 15 through March 19 every year, with parades and pageants, culminating with a huge fireworks display. The fireworks are stuffed inside hundreds of elaborate paper maché creations that are set on fire, bursting across the city.
  • Saint Patrick’s Day – While Saint Patrick’s Day is an Irish holiday, it’s celebrated throughout much of Europe, but the biggest and best, of course, is hosted in Dublin. The capital city puts on a massive four-day festival, with the main event, the parade, taking place on March 17th. It features all types of fantastical creations and exciting performances that include local and national bands, bands from the U.S. and beyond. The Irish Craft Beer & Whiskey Village is open throughout the festival and showcases beer, whiskey, artisan food and entertainment, including live music.
  • Starkbierzeit, Munich, Germany – March in Munich offers the chance to attend festivities similar to Oktoberfest, but without the big crowds and higher prices. Starzbierzeit translates to “Strong Beer Time,” and takes place throughout much of the month. It includes, of course, lots of beer, as well as singing to drinking songs and dancing on tables in a celebration of Bavarian culture.

Europe in April

  • Holy Week and Easter – Holy Week is celebrated from Palm Sunday to Easter Sunday, sometimes falling in late March, but most often in April. Throughout Europe, there are many festivities for Easter, in the squares, streets, and stores. For the non-religious, it means things like candy and the Easter Bunny, while for the religious it’s a time for church services and rituals. Each diverse culture celebrates the holiday in its own way – in some places there may be Easter markets and parades to attend, with some of the biggest festivities in Italy, Spain, France and Portugal.
  • Feria de Abril/April Fair, Seville, Spain – In mid-April, Seville hosts one of the largest and most elaborate festivals in Spain’s Andalucia region. It includes people wearing traditional Andalucian dress, a horse and carriage parade, music, street dancing and lots of food and drink.
  • Tulip Festival, Amsterdam, Netherlands – One of Europe’s most popular spring festivals, the Tulip Festival is hosted throughout the month of April, and features over a half-million colorful, and sometimes rare, tulips that can be viewed in the gardens of museums, private homes and a number of city institutions.
  • The Nuremberg Spring Festival, Germany – This annual festival held on the banks of Dutzendteich in Nuremberg, Germany is hosted for 2 weeks in April. It features theme park attractions as well as traditional music, food and drink.
  • Budapest Spring Festival, Hungary – Hosted for 3 weeks in April, this festival offers an impressive program that includes dance, world music, jazz, classical, opera and more, as well as a circus, theatre and the visual arts.

Europe in May

  • Labour Day/International Workers’ Day – Labour Day, also known as International Workers’ Day or May Day, is a holiday throughout Europe with the exception of the U.K. and the Netherlands. Celebrations vary depending on the country you’re in – in Croatia people come together to enjoy barbecuing together, in Italy you might find free concerts, and there are fairs hosted throughout Hungary. Political rallies and protests are also common in many major cities throughout the continent.
  • Cannes Film Festival, France – The Cannes Film Festival is one of the most celebrated and glamorous of all film festivals around the world. It’s a time when tens of thousands of filmmakers and fans, including numerous big-name celebrities come to promote their creations and/or catch previews of new films of all genres.
  • Constitution Day, Oslo, Norway – Held annually on May 17th, Constitution Day celebrates Norway’s independence from Denmark with parades, traditional costume, folk music, and a host of other entertainment.
  • Athens Jazz Festival, Athens, Greece – Every year, the city of Athens hosts one of the best jazz festivals in all of Europe over five days in late May. The event features European as well as international artists and entrance is free.

Europe in June

  • Karneval der Kulturen, Berlin, Germany – This four-day urban festival typically takes place around the first weekend in June, bringing nearly a million visitors and thousands of participants to celebrate diversity and freedom. It includes dance, live music, parades and a variety of street festivals.
  • Isle of Wight Festival, Newport, England – This music festival takes place over 4 days in mid-June at Seaclose Park in Newport, England. It features big-name rock and indie acts as well as rising stars.
  • Istanbul Music Festival, Turkey – Istanbul hosts its big music festival, often ranked among the top music festivals in the world, throughout most of the month of June every year. Some 600 local and international artists perform, including big names in classical, opera and ballet.
  • Bordeaux Wine Festival, Bordeaux, France – One of the world’s best wine producing regions holds one of the world’s best annual wine festivals in mid-June. It offers the opportunity to taste the diversity of wines from the Bordeaux and Aquitaine regions, as well as to tour vineyards, attend wine workshops, and watch magic shows and fireworks.
  • Sonar Festival – Founded in Barcelona, the Sonar Festival is the biggest electronic and advanced music festival in Europe. It’s held annually over 3 days in mid-June.

Europe in July

  • Montreux Jazz Festival, Switzerland – This long-running festival began in 1967 and is hosted either in Montreux or on the banks of Lake Geneva. One of Europe’s major music events, and the second largest jazz festival in the world, it includes concerts and DJ sets.
  • Wimbledon, London, England – In July, London hosts Wimbledon, the oldest and arguably the most prestigious tennis tournament in the world, at The All England Lawn Tennis and Croquet Club.
  • Running of the Bulls/San Fermin, Pamplona, Spain – The most famous and most controversial festival in Spain is held annually July 6 to 14. The actual running of the bulls, which you can watch from a safe distance, occurs on the second day of the festival, July 7.
  • Bastille Day, Paris, France – Bastille Day, July 14, is celebrated throughout France, but Paris hosts the most elaborate festivities with parades, fireworks, and a wide array of parties that go on until the wee hours of the night.

Europe in August

  • Edinburgh Fringe Festival, Scotland – This 3-week festival features a unique collection of known and unknown artists. It includes comedy, theater, dance, musicals, operas, exhibitions and much more.
  • Tuscan Sun Festival, Cortona, Italy – This popular arts festival features renowned artists and musicians over nine days starting the first weekend in August. It includes music and art as well as cooking demonstrations and plenty of food and wine, including locally-made items and fine Tuscan wines.
  • Sziget Festival, Budapest, Hungary – The biggest annual rock festival in Budapest is hosted from August 8 to 15, featuring some of the biggest international music artists in the world.
  • Running of the Bulls San Sebastian De Los Reyes, Madrid, Spain – The second most famous bull-run in Spain is held during the last week of August in Madrid. Participants wear red and white, and spill as much sangria as they drink while trying their luck outrunning the massive creatures.
  • Festa de Sant Roc, Barcelona, Spain – Festa de Sant Roc is the oldest festival in Barcelona, celebrated annually for more than four centuries. It’s focused around the Placa Nova, and takes place in mid-August. Catalan traditions are featured, including lots of dancing, sea shanty singing groups, street games, parades and fireworks.

Europe in September

  • Oktoberfest, Munich, Germany – Oktoberfest actually begins in September and runs for 16 to 18 days, depending on the year. Some six million people from across the globe come to join the Germans who drink loads of beer, eat tons of sausage and enjoy raucous drinking as well as a range of attractions like games and amusement rides.
  • Regata Storica di Venezia, Venice, Italy – This historic Regatta is one of the most spectacular events in Venice, and the most important event on the rowing calendar. It highlights the city’s reliance on boating and waterways and takes place on the first Sunday of September each year. It’s made up of four different races and involves many different types of boats, including the gondola, which race a course along the Grand Canal, and is accompanied with lots of food, drink and music.
  • Amsterdam Fringe Festival, Netherlands – This event held annually during the first half of September, hosts a wide range of productions by cutting-edge local and international artists, as well as producers, at over 25 venues across the city, including theater, musical theater, art, comedy and dance.
  • Festes de la Merce, Barcelona, Spain – This festival is the biggest to honor the patron saint of Barcelona, Our Lady of Merce (La Merc). The four-day event is typically held around the first weekend of fall, and includes free music concerts, parades, a harbor swimming race, a run and Catalan dances.
  • Galway Oyster Festival, Galway, Ireland – The oldest oyster festival in the world celebrates oysters and other bounties from the city in the beautiful Irish city of Galway around the start of the autumn season. It’s not only a time for indulging in oysters and a few too many beers, but there are cook-offs, culinary demos and the famous oyster shucking championships.

Europe in October

  • Festival of Lights, Berlin Germany – Held for 10 days in mid-October, the Berlin Festival of Lights illuminates the city’s most famous historical monuments and landmarks, like the Berlin Cathedral and Brandenburg Gate via light projections and video art. The festival also includes a variety of art and music events.
  • Eurochocolate, Perugia, Italy – Eurochocolate is one of the biggest chocolate festivals in Europe and is hosted for 10 days in mid-October. This is an opportunity for tasting chocolate from around the world as well as participating in cooking classes, viewing elaborate chocolate-sculpting displays, sipping wine and taking in all sorts of performances.
  • Amsterdam Music Festival and Dance Event, Netherlands – The Amsterdam Music Festival is part of the annual Amsterdam Dance Event conference, which takes place over 4 days in mid-October. The experience celebrates some of the biggest names in electronic music, and typically includes over 2,000 world-class acts from around the world.
  • Halloween – Halloween is celebrated throughout much of Europe, but it isn’t as lavish as it is in the U.S. In most places there is no trick-or treating, instead there are parties, costume contests and other events. As Halloween’s origins date back to the ancient Celtic festival of Samhain, many of the biggest and best festivities can be enjoyed in Ireland. The Spirit of Meath Halloween Festival includes events at various venues across the county that can be enjoyed throughout much of October and into early November.

Europe in November

  • Bonfire Night, London, England – Annually on November 5, London’s skies light up to celebrate Bonfire Night, a tradition that dates back to the early 17th-century, when Guy Fawkes tried to blow up the House of Parliament. Today, it’s all about fireworks.
  • The Rome Jazz Festival, Italy – This jazz festival is one of the most popular November events in Rome, hosted throughout the second half of November. It includes performances from Italian as well as international musicians that take place in the Auditorium Parco della Musica.
  • Sinterklaas Parade, Amsterdam, Netherlands – The arrival of Saint Nicholas, or Santa Claus, who is known to Dutch children as Sinterklaas, launches the Christmas season in mid-November. He arrives on a ship into Amsterdam from his home in Spain, bringing presents and treats for the children.
  • Weihnachtsmarkt, Koblenz, Germany – In many places around Europe, the Christmas markets and festivals begin, including the Koblenz Weihnachtsmarket which takes place in Old Town Koblenz. It runs through just a few days before Christmas and includes some 100 decorated stalls that sell an impressive array of traditional German cuisine and beverages, and all sorts of goods, including handcrafted toys. There are a variety of concerts and other performances throughout the festival as well.

Europe in December

  • Lyon Festival of Lights, Lyon, France – Lyon hosts its popular Festival of Lights over four days in mid-December. There are impressive lighting displays throughout the city to honor Mary, the mother of Jesus. Tradition dictates that every house in Lyon places candles along the outside of windows, which produces an incredible effect throughout the streets. These days, there is lots of high-tech lighting used as well.
  • Christmas Markets – There are Christmas markets in many locations throughout Europe in December. Some of the best can be found in Dresden and Hamburg, Germany; Innsbruck and Vienna, Austria; Birmingham, England; Brussels, Belgium; Belfast, Northern Ireland; Bologna, Italy; Copenhagen, Denmark and Trondheim, Norway.
  • Christmas Eve/Christmas Day – For many Europeans, the main event of the holiday season is Christmas Eve, celebrated with Midnight Mass and a big feast. Others focus more on Christmas Day and gift-giving. On Christmas Day, December 25, nearly all attractions will be closed, and most restaurants, though in some cities you may still find quite a few eateries open.
  • New Year’s Eve – December 31st, New Year’s Eve, is celebrated with fireworks and parties across Europe, many lasting well into the night. No matter where you are, you’re likely to find a fun event to attend. Some of the best New Year’s Eve festivities can be enjoyed in London, Paris, Vienna, Berlin, Edinburgh, Rome, Lisbon and Prague, although celebrations can be found in many small towns and other major cities throughout the continent.

Read More

  • The Best Places To Visit in Europe
  • Best Time to Visit London
  • Best Time to Visit Paris
  • Best Time to Visit France
  • Best Time to Visit Italy
  • Best Time to Visit Greece
  • Best Time to Visit Santorini
  • Best Websites for Booking Hotels
  • Best Travel Books




Privacy Policy

Affiliate Disclosure

25+ Million Annual Readers

Get My Travel Newsletter

Best Places to Visit in February in Europe


hours are on the rise and festival season is in full swing across Europe during
this exciting month. Deciding where to go in Europe in
February is half the fun, with world-famous carnivals, exhilarating ski
slopes and winter wonderland scenes still decorating enchanting cities. In
terms of cheap February vacations, this can also
be one of the most budget-friendly times to visit the continent.

Everything from flight fares to hotel prices and admission fees attract discounts to coincide with the quiet time after the busy holiday season, in many of the biggest cities. While this is great news for your wallet, it also means crowd-free moments to yourself with some of the world’s most incredible sights. Best of all, you may have the opportunity to get more than just a glimpse at local life beyond the tourist facade.

Best European Cities to Visit in February

Carnival fever begins to sweep through some of the best places to visit in Europe in February, taking place every year before the season of Lent. Each celebration is imbued with local flavour depending on where you are, with colourful public parades and riotous parties spilling into the streets. Ski resorts are often at their snowy best during the month and you certainly won’t miss out on magical streetscapes wrapped in white.


many ski fans across the globe, a Europe trip in
February simply translates to Zermatt. With the sun higher in the sky,
the best of two worlds collide via exceptional snow coverage and the ability to
sit outdoors on charming terraces after a day of action. Resting on the
backdrop of the mighty Matterhorn and literally surrounded by summits, the
car-free town is a Swiss chocolate box dream of church bells ringing in the air
and narrow streets decorated by quaint chalets.

There are 360 kilometres of runs to discover, along with a lift that’ll take you to ski in Cervinia, Italy. At an altitude of approximately 3883 metres, it’s also home to the highest ski area in Switzerland, the Matterhorn ski paradise.

Small children don’t miss out on the fun with the mascot, Wolli the little Blacknose sheep, popping up in town and on the slopes just for them. When hunger strikes, get set for decision paralysis with everything from traditional mountain restaurants to Michelin gourmet restaurants vying for attention.


Carnival of Venice is perhaps the most famous of them all in Europe, with the
flamboyant masquerade masks available in stores year-round as a symbol of the
floating city. It’s a bucket list event for people across the globe, so this
isn’t among the cheap holiday destinations in February,
but it is one of the most exciting! With masquerade balls, candle-lit canals,
food fairs and an endless parade of elaborately costumed people, there’s really
nothing quite like it.

For romantic winter getaways in Europe on Valentine’s Day, it’s also pretty hard to beat gondola rides along the Grand Canal, strolling through a maze of mysterious laneways and sipping prosecco in Saint Mark’s Square. But those visiting Venice with kids will find plenty to amuse little ones too.

There’s no doubt that it’s chilly at this time of year, but there’s a dazzling world of art and culture indoors to explore too, including the Gallerie dell’Accademia and the opera season at La Fenice.


Tucked away in the Austrian Alps and dressed in winter white, Hallstatt is one of the most beautiful places to visit in Europe. Pastel-coloured, wooden houses, shimmering icicles and a glassy lake rest against a mountainous landscape, creating a surreal fairytale picture. Really, it’s enough to settle in at a variety of cosy cafes, cradle steaming cups of speciality coffee and stare in awe at fantasy scenes right outside the window.

If you do feel the need to move, do so to stand on the 360 metre-high Skywalk and capture those views from up high. Then, sink into a sauna or hot tub, both of which are likely found in your hotel or at wellness spas.

Visit the world’s oldest salt mine, Altaussee, and slip inside the World Heritage Museum for an interactive tour through time. Of course, if you want to ski, snowboard or toboggan, winter sports are on the doorstep.

Read More: Hallstatt in Winter


Madrid is among the best places to go in Europe in February for shopping, visiting iconic attractions, and museum-hopping in the low season. That’s not to say there’s no fun to be had though, in this city that never sleeps.

Carnival sets the scene for five days of the month, with theatre troupes in Plaza de la Villa, masked balls and the symbolic Burial of the Sardine to mark the end of the party. This tradition is also responsible for chocolate sardines that serve as the main Carnival treat for the taste buds.

If you love pounding the pavements, daytime average highs of about 12°C keep you refreshed for shopping on the famous Gran Vía and getting lost down intriguing cobbled streets.

Pop in and out of world-class museums unheeded by crowds, including Museo Del Prado, which is Spain’s most prestigious. When the temperature drops at night, it’s the perfect time to snuggle in with tapas along Calle Cava Baja or follow your nose to piping-hot churros.


Papier-mache figures, flower-filled floats and Mardi Gras highlight Carnival in Nice, one of the oldest festivals in the world. The 13th century saw the first pagan celebration, which now announces the coming of spring and makes the city one of the best places to go on holiday in February.

Battle of Flowers is arguably the highlight, where thousands of freshly-cut
blooms are thrown from floats to rain down on the enchanted crowd. The last
night sees the Carnival King puppet go up in flames, along with spectacular
fireworks over the Baie des Anges.

While it’s a little too cold to take a dip, it’s generally sunny with mild temperatures for walking around the warren of streets in the Old Town. Visit Castle Hill for panoramic views, the Baroque cathedral of Saint Reparata, and the Museum of Modern and Contemporary Art for works by Andy Warhol and Yves Klein.

The cooler weather is a great time to hike along the Riviera, with coastline pathways winding towards medieval towns and seafront restaurants.


If you’re
looking for a glittering dose of luxury with your snow, St. Moritz is among the
best places to ski in February. This fairytale
ski resort in the middle of the Swiss Alps offers an abundance of natural
beauty. However, it’s also lavishly adorned with boutique shops, galleries,
museums, spas, nightclubs and grand hotels for a truly indulgent escape.
Festivals during February include White Surf and Turf, as well as Ice Cricket
featuring world champions.

Among all the glitz and glamour, it might be hard to remember to pick up your skis and get out on the snow. But, if you do, the home of two Winter Olympics boasts 350 kilometres of pistes, the steepest start slope in Switzerland, one of the oldest natural ice bob runs in the world and 150 kilometres of winter walking trails.

Ice skate at Eisarena Ludains rink or check out Bavarian curling on certain days of the week. After all that, head out for mulled wine at a sleek bar and keep your eyes peeled for celebrities.


offers some of the best winter city breaks in Europe and
Carnival season here actually starts on November 11th, at 11:11, with the
planning community donning costumes in readiness. Once February rolls around,
Cologne is the place to be as the air fills with the spirit of celebration.

tend to be more hilarious than elaborate and sequinned, so feel free to fancy
dress however you like. Floats often highlight caricatures of German
celebrities and politicians, and there’s plenty of beer drinking,
doughnut-eating and cheering through the streets.

If you’re not in a clown suit, warm up by climbing the 509 steps to the top of Cologne Cathedral. The UNESCO World Heritage site is the second tallest building in the city and offers panoramic views.

If visiting Cologne with kids, you’ll have the perfect excuse to visit the Cologne Chocolate Museum and indulge at the Chocolat Grand Cafe after a tour. To shop for quirky treasures, explore the trendy boutiques in the Belgian Quarter or find designer stores on the Schildergasse.


For ice caves, glacier hiking and the wonders of the Northern Lights, Iceland is among the best European countries to visit in February. This is certainly a trip for those who truly embrace winter activities in Iceland, as the cold temperatures that make them possible. With scenes straight from a snow-filled fairyland though, rugging up in extra warm clothes is worth it.

annual Winter Lights Festival kicks off the month in Reykjavik, with incredible
light installations illuminating the city. A Pool Night allows visitors to try
some of the city’s thermal pools for free and Museum Night sees a wealth of
theatre, dance, live music and lectures.

Many of Iceland’s top attractions are at their dramatic best at this time of year and there’s an increased opportunity to spot the Northern Lights. Take a tour to go ice caving in naturally-formed tunnels or try glacier hiking to see electric blue icicles. Within a day trip of the city, the Golden Circle of Þingvellir National Park, the Geysir Geothermal Area and Gullfoss Waterfall look magical under blankets of snow, with partially frozen waterfalls and frost glistening on the landscape.


Spring hints at its arrival with blooming, white almond blossom trees throughout the province of Malaga, just in time for travel in February. Within the pretty surrounds you’ll see the city’s top sights, like the Roman amphitheatre, Gibralfaro Castle and the Malaga Picasso Museum, without the high season crowds. This is a special blessing at the famous Alcazaba. The best-preserved Moorish fortress in Spain thrills hundreds of thousands of tourists per year, with its storybook courtyards, bubbling fountains and Islamic art.

If your
visit coincides with Carnival, get set for traditional flamenco dances, street
bands and fancy dress parties. Celebrations take place in the Historic Center,
however, it’s often the local neighbourhoods that put on the most colourful
shows. The last day is marked not with sardines, but with the symbolic Burial
of the Anchovy.

average highs of about 18°C,
many sunny days and those luminous almond blossoms, this is the perfect time
for hiking through the spectacular countryside. Take a trail through the
Guadalhorce Valley and stop in at the white-washed villages of Alora, Almogia,
Cartama and Pizarra. 


The romantic birthplace of the Renaissance is one of the best cities to visit in Europe at any time of the year. The problem with that is the accompanying crowds of tourists who can’t wait to soak up the splendour too. Shorter queues in February mean you’ll get to enjoy the art in peace, along with strolling along the river Arno and across the Ponte Vecchio without bumping elbows.

Carnival takes place throughout Tuscany across a few dates each February, with a focus on family fun. Stay in Florence for the revelry or visit surrounding towns to see local celebrations.

It’s also a popular time for art exhibits, so check out the top venues to see what’s on. The Uffizi Gallery is sure to be among them. One of the most famous museums in the world, the works of Leonardo, Raffaello, Michelangelo, Botticelli and so many more live here permanently.

Perhaps best of all though, winter simply seems to suit Florence. Shopping sales let you rug up in style and on a budget, to meander across atmospheric cobblestones with a hot chocolate and the chance to see beyond the tourist trail.


If you want to experience Carnival in the warmest place in Europe in February, set your sights on the Spanish island of Lanzarote. The holiday hotspots of Arrecife, Puerto Del Carmen, Costa Teguise and Playa Blanca all hold dazzling events late in the month and into early March each year. Expect glittering costumes, parades and dancing in the streets, along with salsa and bachata tunes ringing through the air.

With an average high of about 20°C and sunshiny days, Lanzarote is one of the best February beach holiday destinations in Europe. Pick your own sun-splashed stretch of sand from a variety of landscapes, including the towering cliffs of Papagayo, natural rock pools at Caleton Blanco and the restaurant-lined Playa Blanca.

Beyond the beach, this UNESCO-listed Geopark boasts 300 volcanic cones, lava fields and the incredible Timanfaya National Park. Thanks to the famous architect and environmentalist, Cesar Manrique, nature blends perfectly with art across a range of innovative attractions.

Read More: Best Beaches in Lanzarote

What to pack when visiting Europe in February

you’re going to the Canary Islands, most of the top
European cities are still cold, if not freezing at night, throughout
February. However, all it takes is a little bit of preparation to ensure you’re
warm and snuggly during your explorations.


During winter in Europe, expect to be chilly outside and very warm inside basically everywhere you go. The best way to deal with this is to pack layers like leggings, cardigans and undershirts, so it’s easy to go from one temperature to the next. Opt for breathable fabrics like cotton and wool.


Depending on where you’re going, you’ll usually only need one really warm winter coat to go over your layers and it’s even better if it doubles as a raincoat (like this lightweight coat by Columbia). If not, pack one of those too.


be thankful for a warm pair of gloves, scarves, wool socks and hats or beanies.
Plus, accessories are easier to take off than clothes when you go inside.


Cobblestones require fairly sturdy wheels, so make sure your suitcase is up to the task. A cross-body handbag or backpack is best for daily outings, to keep your hands free.

When you pack to suit the weather and ensure your comfort, you won’t even notice the cold. From dazzling ice glaciers to mighty mountains, fairytale towns and the sounds of Carnival, Europe’s best places to holiday in February are nothing short of spellbinding.

Pin this for later!


February Temperature Averages in European Cities

Average temperatures for February at major cities throughout Europe are listed below in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit.

The cities range from Amsterdam to Zurich and from Reykjavík to İstanbul. They are listed alphabetically and you can jump ahead to the section for Amsterdam to Kiev, Leeds to Pristina and Reykjavík to Zurich.

Included in this list are Europe’s national capitals plus cities with a metropolitan population of over one million people.

The tables give the normal maximum and minimum monthly temperatures based on historical weather data collected over a long period, in most cases 30 years.

Average February temperatures
High °F Low °F City High °C Low °C
43 33 Amsterdam, Netherlands 6 1
52 34 Andorra la Vella, Andorra 11 1
57 45 Athens, Greece 14 7
58 42 Barcelona, Spain 15 5
45 32 Belgrade, Serbia 7 0
40 29 Berlin, Germany 4 -2
45 34 Birmingham, United Kingdom 7 1
41 28 Bratislava, Slovakia 5 -2
44 33 Brussels, Belgium 7 1
39 26 Bucharest, Romania 4 -3
41 31 Budapest, Hungary 5 -1
35 24 Chisinau, Moldova 2 -4
44 30 Cologne, Germany 7 -1
37 29 Copenhagen, Denmark 3 -2
47 36 Dublin, Ireland 8 2
44 34 Glasgow, United Kingdom 7 1
40 30 Hamburg, Germany 4 -1
27 16 Helsinki, Finland -3 -9
50 39 İstanbul, Turkey 10 4
18 5 Kazan, Russia -8 -15
30 20 Kiev, Ukraine -1 -7
Average daily temperatures in February
High °F Low °F City High °C Low °C
42 33 Leeds, United Kingdom 6 0
44 34 Lille, France 7 1
61 49 Lisbon, Portugal 16 9
43 29 Ljubljana, Slovenia 6 -2
47 37 London, United Kingdom 9 3
40 29 Luxembourg, Luxembourg 4 -2
47 34 Lyon, France 8 1
54 39 Madrid, Spain 12 4
46 35 Manchester, United Kingdom 8 2
55 38 Marseille, France 13 4
48 33 Milan, Italy 9 0
28 16 Minsk, Belarus -3 -9
56 43 Monaco, Monaco 13 6
24 12 Moscow, Russia -4 -11
40 26 Munich, Germany 4 -3
56 40 Naples, Italy 14 5
56 43 Nice, France 13 6
21 9 Nizhny & Novgorod, Russia -6 -13
30 20 Oslo, Norway -1 -7
47 37 Paris, France 8 3
52 38 Podgorica, Montenegro 11 3
37 24 Prague, Czech Republic 3 -4
42 27 Pristina, Kosovo 6 -3
February temperatures: daily averages
High °F Low °F City High °C Low °C
37 28 Reykjavík, Iceland 3 -2
29 19 Riga, Latvia -2 -7
57 37 Rome, Italy 14 3
32 20 Rostov-on-Don, Russia 0 -7
44 33 Rotterdam, Netherlands 7 1
25 15 Saint Petersburg, Russia -4 -10
19 6 Samara, Russia -8 -15
49 34 San Marino, San Marino 10 1
43 28 Sarajevo, Bosnia & Herzegovina 6 -2
47 31 Skopje, Macedonia 8 -1
41 27 Sofia, Bulgaria 5 -3
31 22 Stockholm, Sweden -1 -5
29 19 Tallinn, Estonia -2 -8
56 37 Tirana, Albania 13 3
48 31 Turin, Italy 9 -1
18 -1 Ufa, Russia -8 -19
43 29 Vaduz, Liechtenstein 6 -2
60 49 Valletta, Malta 16 9
41 30 Vienna, Austria 5 -1
29 18 Vilnius, Lithuania -2 -8
24 13 Volgograd, Russia -4 -11
34 23 Warsaw, Poland 1 -5
44 29 Zagreb, Croatia 7 -2
41 26 Zurich, Switzerland 5 -3

12 Best February Destinations in Europe in 2023

The destinations below at least have decent February weather, and plenty to see this month

Rome, Italy

  • February avg high: 57F/14C
  • February avg low: 40F/4C
  • February avg precip: 2. 9″/7.3cm

As one of the world’s greatest tourist cities, it’s a good thing that February temperatures aren’t any lower than they really are. You can expect cool weather and it might rain on you a bit if you get unlucky, but it should still be fairly pleasant. Perhaps the best reason to visit Rome in February is that crowds are nowhere to be found, so you can roam the city as you please and not waste a lot of time in queues.

When crowds are low it also means that hotel prices are as well, which really helps in a city like Rome where hotels feel overpriced most of the year. You’ll be able to afford a nice hotel in a neighborhood that might feel out of your grasp if you came in summer and had to pay double. Flights should also be quite cheap as well, so this is a good city to start and/or end a tour of Europe.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €47 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €64 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €16 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Rome
>>>Rome prices and travel tips

Florence, Italy

  • February avg high: 54F/12C
  • February avg low: 37F/3C
  • February avg precip: 3. 7″/9.3cm

Pretty much everything we wrote about Rome above also applies to Florence this time of year. You’ll want to bring warm clothes and dress in layers, but you won’t need snow shoes. Florence is quite a compact city so most of your sightseeing will be within a small area in the center of town. With this in mind, you won’t have to deal with cooler temperatures for more than a few minutes at a time.

And again, hotel prices in Florence will be far cheaper than in summer. Unlike Rome, which can still feel a bit manic with the crush of locals even in winter, Florence is more relaxed and easier to deal with. This is a city where you can linger a bit and mix in a day trip to nearby Pisa or one of the hill towns. With lower hotel prices, Florence is a city to take a breather on a longer trip.

By the way, Venice is usually a bit colder and sometimes wetter in February, but the crowds are also much smaller than normal so you might think about including a night or two there.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €47 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €62 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €19 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Florence
>>>Florence prices and travel tips

Paris, France

  • February avg high: 47F/8C
  • February avg low: 40F/4C
  • February avg precip: 1.8″/4.5cm

The best news about Paris in February is that it actually doesn’t get much rain in most years. As you can see above, it’ll be chilly, but it rarely spends much time below freezing. This also means that you’ll be able to show off some of your better stylish outfits complete with scarves and gloves in the evenings.

Paris is also a business city so business-oriented hotels won’t be fantastic bargains in February, but hotels in the more touristy districts will have excellent off-season rates. Try to book a hotel in the wonderful Rue Cler neighborhood next to the Eiffel Tower. It’s friendly, convenient, and far more tourist oriented than businessy.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €73 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €98 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €15 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Paris
>>>Paris prices and travel tips

Nice, France

  • February avg high: 56F/16C
  • February avg low: 43F/6C
  • February avg precip: 2.4″/6.0cm

Even though it’s on the Mediterranean coast, Nice isn’t a slam-dunk recommendation for a February visit. It’s mainly a beach and sunshine destination so most things are oriented towards summer and some things are closed for the winter. Still, the weather is mild enough that it’s enjoyable, and since it’s a fairly large city it is still very full of life even when most other tourists are gone.

Nice is an ideal city to visit after Paris and on your way to Italy. Not only is the city itself really lovely, but it’s also a 20-minute train ride to Cannes in one direction and to Monaco in the other. Both are very worthwhile, but both also have extremely high hotel rates so doing them by day trip from Nice is ideal. The food in this part of France is also worth a trip because it’s excellent and also different from what you’ll find up north.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €48 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €73 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €16 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Nice
>>>Nice prices and travel tips

London, England

  • February avg high: 46F/8C
  • February avg low: 37F/3C
  • February avg precip: 1.4″/3.5cm

London is one of a few European cities that often feels like a victim of its own popularity. During the warmer months it can feel so crowded with tourists that you expect to see Mickey Mouse walking around greeting guests. In February, it’s chilly and so there are very few tourists to compete with at the top attractions.

As you can see, London gets surprisingly little rain in February, and usually no snow. So as long as you dress properly you can move around quickly and visit all the free museums and other famous attractions with almost no wait. The cozy pubs are even cozier in winter, and it’ll be mostly you and some colorful locals lining up at the taps. You’ll be able to afford a much nicer hotel with a better location for the same money this time of year, and it’s always nice inside the stores.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from £57 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from £107 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from £23 per person

>>Check hotel deals for London
>>>London prices and travel tips

Barcelona, Spain

  • February avg high: 58F/14C
  • February avg low: 42F/6C
  • February avg precip: 1. 1″/2.8cm

Being on the Mediterranean coast, Barcelona has fairly mild winters, with almost no rain most years. And of course, few other tourists will be there, so you can actually see the inside of the Sagrada Familia and Park Guell without fighting or waiting for hours like you have to most of the year.

Barcelona has fantastic nightlife and a noted food scene, so this is a good destination for culture vultures even in winter. Flights into Barcelona are cheap this time of year, of course, and so are short flights from Barcelona to other European destinations. The city has become so crowded with tourists in the summer months that February will actually be very pleasant by comparison.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €49 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €74 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €18 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Barcelona
>>>Barcelona prices and travel tips

Madrid, Spain

  • February avg high: 54F/12C
  • February avg low: 39F/4C
  • February avg precip: 1. 4″/3.5cm

Even though it’s more south, Madrid is in the center of Spain so it’s a bit cooler in winter than coastal Barcelona. Still, February is usually fairly mild (compared to other European capitals), and the city doesn’t get much rain. Madrid is mostly an indoor city in terms of its top attractions, and there are many great town squares in the center area, which will shield you from chilly winds.

If you are considering a trip to Barcelona you should also include at least 3 nights in Madrid as well. The cities are very different from each other, and both excellent for tourists. They are connected by a 3-hour high-speed train ride that is cheap if booked weeks in advance.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €42 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €67 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €22 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Madrid
>>>Madrid prices and travel tips

Malaga, Spain

  • February avg high: 64F/18C
  • February avg low: 46F/8C
  • February avg precip: 2. 1″/5.3cm

Malaga, a bit like Nice mentioned above, is not an obvious winter destination even though the temperatures are quite reasonable. The city itself is really charming and generally underrated, as most tourists land at the airport and then head straight for one of the smaller towns along the Costa del Sol. Those towns can be ghost-town-like in winter, so staying in Malaga proper is probably the better idea.

The key attraction of Malaga is that it has probably the best winter weather on continental Europe, so those not willing or able to take the extra two hours flying down to the Canary Islands will enjoy it here. And again, the city of Malaga itself has a lot to offer, so spending a few days here in the off season will be worthwhile.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €54 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €86 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €17 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Malaga
>>>Malaga prices and travel tips

Lisbon, Portugal

  • February avg high: 61F/16C
  • February avg low: 49F/9C
  • February avg precip: 3. 6″/9.0cm

Lisbon easily has the best winter weather of any European capital city, and the year-round weather tends to be excellent compared to the rest of Europe as well. This is a wonderful city that too often gets overlooked by those touring the continent because it’s remote and not easy to reach. From Madrid you have to take a night train, or fly.

Fortunately the flights are usually reasonably priced, and especially so in months like February. While Lisbon is on the waterfront, it’s mainly an indoor city in terms of attractions. You’ll be seeing castles and museums during the day, and enjoying excellent food and listening to fado singers in the evenings. It’s worth going out of your way to reach Lisbon, especially in February.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €41 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €62 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €17 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Lisbon
>>>Lisbon prices and travel tips

Athens, Greece

  • February avg high: 56F/13C
  • February avg low: 42F/6C
  • February avg precip: 1. 8″/4.5cm

Athens has a fairly mild winter climate and it doesn’t get much rain in a typical February. If you can get a cheap flight from another nearby city you are visiting, Athens is worth 3 days. The famous archeological sights are outdoors, of course, but with little rain you should have no problem. And the museums and nightlife are all indoors, so you won’t need too many clear days to enjoy it.

During the warm months, most people who visit Athens are on their way to or from one of the famous islands such as Santorini, Mykonos, or Rhodes. But in February those islands are mostly closed down except for their larger towns, so it’s better to skip them this time of year. As a result, hotel rates in Athens in February are very affordable, and getting to and from the airport is easy.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €42 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €58 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €13 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Athens
>>>Athens prices and travel tips

Interlaken, Switzerland

  • February avg high: 41F/5C
  • February avg low: 27F/-3C
  • February avg precip: 2. 8″/7.0cm

The rest of the destinations above are all top cities with decent February weather, but Interlaken is different. Many people who decide they want to “visit Switzerland” really don’t know where they should go. If you want to see the most dramatic views of the Alps with the most charming towns and best winter infrastructure, you should head to the Interlaken area.

The top sights here are the Schilthorn observation deck and the Jungfraujoch railway. Both of those are amazing when the weather at high elevations is clear, and almost pointless when it’s foggy or raining. The weather can be unpredictable in February so you have to time your visits carefully and only after you arrive. Still, they are worth doing and the crowds are much smaller, of course. This is also a winter ski resort so some areas near slopes do have high hotel prices, though bargains can be found not far away.

  • Good 3-star hotels in February from €68 for two people
  • Good 4-star hotels in February from €141 for two people
  • Hostel dorm beds in February from €33 per person

>>Check hotel deals for Interlaken
>>>Interlaken prices and travel tips

Additional photo credits: Rome photo by Sam Ross at thehammockhombre. com.

The 13 BEST Places to Vist in Europe in February & Winter

Planning a trip to Europe in February and looking for some fun winter destinations to visit!? Well, I’m more than happy to help out with that! While you may think that the peak summer season of June- August is the best time to embark on a Euro trip, I’d argue that winter in Europe is where it’s at. Namely, the month of February!

It may be below freezing in some parts of the continent, but in others, things are just heating up. Whether your scene is partying the night away at Carnival, hitting the snow of the Alps or lazing under the Mediterranean sun, February has something for everyone in Europe. 

I’ve put together this mega guide to 13 incredible cities to visit in Europe in February. It’s jam-packed with winter getaway guides that may even inspire you to discover a destination you never even considered before…



1) Barcelona, Spain

Let’s face it. Barcelona is a brilliant destination year-round and has something for every style of traveler. It’s vibrant, fun, surprising and exciting. But even if you’re swinging by this Spanish city outside of the peak summer season, you’re guaranteed a good time. February in Barcelona, while still on the chilly side, doesn’t experience the intensely low temperatures other parts of Europe do – thanks to its Mediterranean location. Plus, there’s tons going on in Barcelona in February to stay busy for the duration of your stay! 

What’s on in Barcelona in February: 

Barcelona Carnival (“Carnaval de Barcelona”)

Held in the week leading up to Ash Wednesday and the start of Lent, Barcelona Carnival is a quintessential loud and proud Spanish celebration held across this awesome city. TimeOut calls Barcelona Carnival a week of “costume parties, traditions and general debauchery. ” Kicking off on the famous central Barcelona strip of Las Ramblas, a week at Barcelona Carnival is a non-stop party. 

Sitges Carnival (“Carnaval”)

An offshoot of Barcelona’s massive carnival, Sitges Carnival is held in the coastal town of Sitges just 35km south of Barcelona. Held concurrently to Barcelona Carnival, the week-long Sitges Carnival is a wild time! Widely considered one of the best festivals in the world, Sitges Carnival is an explosion of music, parades, dancing and constant partying for its 250,000 attendees. 

Carnaval Sitges 2016 – Sitges carnival 2016

Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 15 (59 Fahrenheit)

Average low temperature in February: 8 (46.4 Fahrenheit)

Getting there: Fly directly into Barcelona El Prat Airport from many European and international cities. If you’re coming in by road from other Spanish cities, you’re sure to see some stunning sights along the way. I recommend the high speed train ride from Madrid to Barcelona. It takes just under 3 hours and has many services throughout the day. 

Where to stay in Barcelona: 

Fresh, Relaxing Studio at Iconic Las Ramblas

Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review: “We had a great time here. Centrally located which allows you to explore a lot of Barcelona by foot. Would recommend and come back if I was in Barcelona again!” – Artie

Claris Hotel & Spa GL

Price: $200+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Beautiful hotel, staff were so accommodating and attentive. Thank you for an amazing stay. The rooftop is stunning. Would definitely return.” – Claire, United Kingdom

2) Venice, Italy

The famous Italian “floating city” of Venice is a summer hotspot sure, but February in Venice marks the city’s most famous annual event – Carnival (or “Carnevale” in Italian). Traditional Venetian masks are on full display around Venice, and the energy is fun-filled and excitable. The temperatures in the north of Italy may be considerably cooler than its southern counterparts during February, but the vibe down the canal side laneways and in the sprawling public squares of Venice is palpable. 


What to see and do in Venice in February

Venice Carnival: February 8-25, 2020


One of the world’s most famous annual festivals, Venice Carnival (“Carnevale”) runs for a fortnight each February. Wrapping up at the onset of the Christian holiday Lent, Carnival is a colorful tradition that features participants wearing beautiful Venetian masks around the streets of Venice. Lots of events are held throughout “Venezia” for Carnevale, including elaborate masked balls. It’s a great family-friendly event the kids will love, but solo travelers and couples will find something special too.

Average high temperature in February: 9

Average low temperature in February: 1

Getting there: Fly directly into Venice Airport, or travel by train, bus or car from many other major Italian cities as well as bordering countries. The Rome to Venice drive is 3.5 hours and Florence to Venice is 3 hours. 

Where to stay in Venice:  

(Read my article on the Best Airbnb Venice rentals for more top recommendations)

Gdhouse 806 – modern flat few steps from Biennale

Price: $80+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Very nice place, not a crowded neighborhood within 10 minutes to San Marco Square by vaporetto. Big space, with everything necessary!” – Magdalena 

Hotel Il Moro di Venezia

Located just footsteps away from Venice Santa Lucia Station, this well-reviewed and priced hotel will be a great home-base for your two-day stay in the city!  Delicious free breakfast included to save some cash, comfortable and clean rooms, and helpful staff to assist with all your Venice travel questions!

Venice Carnival in 4K HDR 60P (UHD)

Watch this video on YouTube


3) Cologne, Germany

The northern city Cologne (“Köln”) is a stunning, historical German destination on the Rhine river, famed for its cathedral and stunning Old Town.  

The German city, the fourth largest behind the capital of Berlin, Munich and Hamburg, is usually home to around one million permanent city residents, and is known for its “college town” aesthetic. But in February each year, an influx of Germans from other cities and international visitors mean that for one week, the charming, historical city limits swell to maximum capacity to party away the “crazy days of Carnival.” 

What’s on in Cologne in February: 

Cologne Carnival

Carnival season continues across Europe in February with Cologne Carnival kicking off a week  of annual festivities that include massive street parties and parades, and a suspension of closing times for bars and pubs across the city for the duration of the event. The festival has technically been running in Cologne since the Middle Ages,  but the massive event it is today has been celebrated for around 200 years. Be prepared for a crazy, action-packed and German beer laden week of celebrations, wrapping up on Ash Wednesday.  


Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 7

Average low temperature in February: 1

Getting there: Cologne Bonn Airport is a major hub for many local and international flights. Alternatively, by road Cologne can be reached in 6 hours from the capital Berlin or from Munich, or in 2 hours from Frankfurt. 

Where to stay in Cologne in February: 

Originally furnished apartment, flooded with light and with sun terrace

Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Gil’s place was absolutely beautiful. We never met Gil but he left helpful instructions and we found the place fine. The apartment is very close to the centre and is not a long walk to the train station or city centre. The apartment is very spacious and beautifully decorated. There was complimentary sweets and drinks left for us which was a lovely touch. The whole apartment was fully kitted with kitchen utensils to toiletries. It even had dry shampoo!! (something I usually forget) The views from the terrace are amazing too and we sat out there in the evening. Probably my favourite airbnb that I have stayed in and my and my partner plan to stay again when in Cologne! Thanks again Gil!” – Meadow 

Hyatt Regency Köln

Price: $250+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Excellent location, beautiful views of the river & cathedral. Fantastic service and extremely clean. I would highly recommend a stay in this hotel. The food was exceptional. I would give this hotel 10 out of 10.” – Tanya, Ireland 

Scenes from Carnival in Cologne, Germany

Watch this video on YouTube



Helsinki, Finland + Arctic Circle Adventures

February in the Finnish capital of Helsinki rarely climbs above freezing, and snow is commonly falling most days. If you’re a snow bunny, you’ll love this magical winter wonderland and if you’re a fan of winter sports – even better! 

While Helsinki in February doesn’t have any major events, per se, it made my list because it’s a fantastic winter destination and renowned for its majestic, frozen landscape. It’s also the best place to catch a flight up to Kittilä, which is where I went on this trip: “Flashpacking Finland | My Northern Lights Bucket List Trip in the Artctic Circle“. But here are a few recommendations to get you started if you decide to visit Finland in February: 

Helsinki cityscape with Helsinki Cathedral in winter, Finland | Adobe Stock


What to see and do in Helsinki in February

  • Shop at Market Square and Old Market Hall: These traditional Finnish markets in Helsinki sell local foods and handcrafted products. Market Square is an outdoor market located by the Harbor. Don’t worry, they have a warm cafe tent!  Old Market Hall offers the same experience, but inside and directly next door to Market Square.  
  • Have a sauna, obviously: Saunas are a dime a dozen in Northern Europe, and Finland is no exception. Many public saunas in Helsinki have sadly closed down, but a few of the original – and the best – remain. Head to Löyly Sauna for a traditional Finnish sauna experience, with a spot to jump into the freezing Baltic Sea between sauna sessions like the locals do.
  • Visit a UNESCO listed Finnish island: Suomenlinna Island is one of Finland’s seven UNESCO heritage sites, and is a great day trip to escape the city for a bit. After all, it’s just over ten minutes by ferry! This island is historically significant, dating back to the 1700’s, and has seen a range of wars and battles, with many historical remnants remaining. And if the cold proves too much, it also has a brewery to enjoy a pint or three.

Average high temperature in February: -2 

Average low temperature in February: -7

Getting there: Helsinki Airport is Finland’s biggest international airport and is the main way to arrive into the capital due to its remote location in relation to mainland Europe.  

Where to stay in Helsinki: 

Elegant Three-story Town House in a Quiet Park

Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review: “We absolutely loved staying in Aleksi’s beautiful home. Our group consisted of people aged between 9 and 70 years old and the place served all of our needs perfectly. The kids loved the playgrounds across the park road and the adults appreciated the quiet area – and we could very easily get to the city center and different attractions around Helsinki by public transport. I would definitely recommend the place to anyone wanting peace and city life at the same time!” – Mirka

Marski by Scandic

Price: $200+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Amazing facilities, room, location, amenities, and the staff, wow, the lady that checked me in was super helpful and kind since there was a change in my booking. Super recommended place and way better than other more expensive hotels in Helsinki.” – Daniel, Netherlands 


Watch this video on YouTube


5) Crete, Greece

The huge island of Crete is just 160km south of the mainland of Greece, and is a fantastic escape from the hubbub of Athens and is significantly less heaving with visitors than the quintessential Greek Islands of Mykonos or Santorini. 

It’s not so much that Crete has any major events during the month of February to plan your trip around, it’s more about the fact that Crete is one of the warmest parts of Europe in the depths of winter. While many parts of Europe are freezing through sub-zero temperatures, Crete is relatively mild and sunny even during their off-season.

If escaping the cold is on the top of your February to-do list, Crete is where it’s at. And filling your time should be easy, as this huge expanse of the island covers over 8000 square kilometers and has thousands of kilometers of gorgeous coastline.   Here are a few things to keep you busy…

What to see and do in Crete in February: 

  • Swim at one of Crete’s many beaches: Crete has over 500 beaches, and even in February you’ll see locals and visitors having a splash around – minus the throngs of tourists blocking the view. The sea is actually calmer in winter than in summer and the winds less intense. This also makes February ideal for surfing in Crete. 
  • Take advantage of winter specials: In winter, prices across Crete are half the price as the same thing would cost in the booming summer months. This means you can have a luxury stay with cheap flights there and back, plus enjoy an endless array of activities dirt cheap. Add to that few queues, shorter waits in restaurants and cafes and an overall feeling of more space. 
  • Go chasing waterfalls: The landscape of Crete is primarily one that is hot and dry, but in February the winter rainfall of the previous months have replenished creeks, gorges and rivers, and the island’s waterfalls are flowing gloriously once again. Visiting Crete in February means that you’ll have a chance to see what the peak visitors don’t get to – the lush natural wonders of this ancient island. This time of year brings global fans of canyoning to Crete, so give that a go while you’re at it! 

Exploring Crete Island, Greece | Is It Worth Visiting?

Watch this video on YouTube


The average high temperature in February: 16

The average low temperature in February: 9

Getting there: Crete has two major airports on opposite ends of their massive island – Heraklion and Chania. If you want to arrive in true island style, catch a 2.5 hour ferry to Crete from the Greek Islands of Santorini or Mykonos and experience other incredible island destinations along the way. If you’re feeling particularly adventurous, a popular ferry route travels from Brindisi (Italy) to Crete daily and takes a full day and night. 

Where to stay in Crete in February

Chic Apartment with Views of Koules Fortress


Price: $120+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Fokion was extremely hospitable responding quickly to messages which was helpful to me as I booked very last minute. Fokion goes beyond just the stay, he picked me up from the port making check in very easy and also left a brochure with wonderful recommendations and information on public transport. The apartment was perfect, with an extraordinary view, making my stay at Crete even more enjoyable. I didn’t want to leave! Will definitely be returning, hopefully soon!” – Jess 

Domus Renier Boutique Hotel – Historic Hotels Worldwide 

Price: $100+ USD per night

Guest review: “The staff treated us like royalty. The room was immaculate and warmly decorated as well as very big and designed for comfort. The location was idyllic with our view looking out over the harbor. ” – Chris, Netherlands 


6) St Moritz, Switzerland 

Switzerland’s snowfields of St Moritz are a playground for the rich and famous in the winter months and one of Europe’s most esteemed winter destinations, and February is the peak season for snow bunnies. And don’t think the fun ends at hitting the slopes on your skis or snowboard for a taste of the best powder in Europe. St Moritz’s February calendar is jam-packed with events to make your Swiss Alps trip unforgettable.  

What to see and do in St Moritz in February: 

White Turf & Night Turf

“White Turf, a unique, exclusive, top-class event with exciting horse-racing, gourmet catering, lively music and inspiring art exhibitions, all taking place in winter sunshine on the frozen lake among the stunningly beautiful, snow-capped mountains of St Moritz. This spectacular, major event is not just one with Champagne on ice for the rich and beautiful but an annual event where race-horse owners, trainers and jockeys from all over the world meet up as well as being an unmissable fixture on the calendar for local people. It is thanks to the sponsors as well as the municipality of St Moritz and the local tourist board, who have been supporting White Turf for decades, to make this top-class race-meeting possible.

Club Dracula

Its name may be daunting, but this well known members-only nightclub is the place to be seen in St Moritz – if you can wrangle a pass of course! 

Treat yourself to a Swiss spending spree

St Moritz is all about money money money, so it comes as no surprise that it’s full to the brim with luxury shops. Head to Via Serlas for a Rodeo Drive style retail therapy experience in St Moritz. Jimmy, Gucci and Louis are waiting. 

White Turf Promovideo 2017

Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 0

Average low temperature in February: -16

Getting there: St Moritz is easily reached from a range of European cities including Milan and Munich, but the nearest major airport is Zurich Airport in Switzerland. Most visitors either drive or take the train from here to St Moritz. The renowned Glacier Express (Chur [Switzerland] to St Moritz and Bernina Express (Tirano [Italy] to St Moritz) heritage railway services take you through the mountains with unparalleled Alps views. 

Where to stay in St Moritz:

Chesa Talvo, Samedan

Price: $100+ AUD 

Guest review: “The apartment was simply perfect. Clean and very well organized. Marina even prepared a cot for our baby. The place is perfect for visiting the whole Engandine valley. We did it by train and it was great. Marina helped us whenever we needed.” – Guillem

Kulm Hotel St. Moritz

Price: $800+ USD per night 

Guest review: “All first class, the staff were extremely welcoming, helpful, polite and couldn’t do enough to make our stay more perfect. Overall the hotel, staff, facilities and location were all 5 star. ” – Martin, United Kingdom 

7) Reykjavik, Iceland 

Iceland has exploded in popularity and is now a bonafide part of the European backpacking trail, despite being located off the traditional beaten track. The capital city, Reykjavik, has so much to offer the tourism industry, it’s no wonder 2 million international visitors now head there for volcanoes, spas, lagoons and a true sense of rest and relaxation. February is no exception despite having the coolest annual temperatures. But be warned – Iceland is significantly more expensive than mainland European countries, so start saving your Icelandanic króna’s now. It’s also a fantastic jumping-off point for exploring the rest of this unbelievable country.


What to see and do in Reykjavik in February: 

Winter Lights Festival

This annual Reykjavik festival marks midwinter each February with a generous splash of much needed color and light installations across the city. The best part is that all events are free, so it’s a great time to visit this fantastic city. 

Rainbows Winter Festival

This Reykjavik LGBTQI festival is a winter pride celebration anyone is welcome to attend and enjoy. Held over 3 days every February, Rainbows Winter Festival is smaller than other major European pride events, but is just as memorable and fun. There’s a Masquerade Ball, queer bingo events and Aurora Borealis trips to see the majestic Northern Lights for yourself. 

Experience the Northern Lights 


November to February is the peak season to see the elusive Northern Lights of Northern Europe, and Reykjavik is the ideal base to experience this popular travel bucket list item. There’s a range of tours that leave from Reykjavik, but I recommend Happy Tours, who run nighttime tours to the best vantage points most nights of the week during winter. What sets them apart is that you sail on a traditional fishing vessel away from the city to see the lights at their best and clearest. What if the tricky lights don’t appear? This tour company has a “sighting guarantee”, which means you can join their tour again any other night for free to try again. 

Hello Iceland | Blue Lagoon, Northern Lights, Golden Circle

Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 3

Average low temperature in February: -2

Getting there: Fly into Reykjavik’s major international airport, Keflavik Airport, from many destinations across the world. To have a stopover in Reykjavik as part of your flight, you’ll need to be flying with their airline, Icelandair. 

Where to stay in Reykjavik in February

Arty and Renovated Century House in a Quiet Central Area

Price: $300+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Staying at the lovely renovated Century House has made our first visit to Iceland a wonderful memory. Everything was so thoughtfully displayed and decorated. From retro to whimsical decor, it was a joy walking into this cozy place after a long flight from California. Everything we needed was there and the beds were so comfy. The Century House is located in a quiet darling neighborhood and is only a short walking distance to the city which was a welcoming plus. Thórhildur’s communication was very responsive, friendly, thoughtful and helpful. We couldn’t be more happy. Definitely recommend this warm and comfortable place and we for sure would come back when we visit the charming city of Reykjavik again.” – Family 

Hotel Reykjavík Centrum

Price: $120+ USD per night 

Guest review: “The hotel was amazing. It was like an enormous dolls house from the outside and inside so bright and airy. We will stay here again must definitely.” – Paul, United Kingdom  

8) Prague, Czech Republic

In my opinion, whether it’s winter, spring, summer or autumn – I’ll visit Prague anytime in an absolute heartbeat. The capital of The Czech Republic, there’s a reason Prague is often the favorite world city of any seasoned traveler you ask. It’s magical in snow, it’s breathtaking in summer and it has so much to see and do on any given day, I guarantee you’ll walk away from Prague with memories you’ll cherish forever. 


What to see and do in Prague in February

February in Prague is cold, mystical and magical. The snow caps on the Tyn Church, Astronomical Clocktower and Prague Castle blend together to create an adult Disneyland of sorts. The winter markets are brewing hot mulled wine and whipping up crepes, and the warm and toasty restaurants and cafes are serving up mouth-watering Czech dishes. In winter in Prague it’s also totally socially acceptable to enjoy a shot of warming rum in your morning tea or coffee, so they are ahead of the pack already. There’s also far fewer tourists, shorter queues and cheaper rates on almost everything. 

Be sure to add these February events to your Prague itinerary… 

Experience world class Czech beer at the source 


Escape the nighttime winter chill and join a beer tour of Prague that will take you to some of Prague’s most legendary pubs and give you the chance to taste some of the Czech Republic’s best brews. All capped off with a traditional Czech dinner. 

Tour Prague’s centuries old Jewish Quarter

Josefov, Prague’s Jewish Quarter has withstood the worst of humanity and still stands strong in the centre of the city. A walking tour is the best way to really begin to understand the history of Prague’s Jewish population and the foundations of Josefov. You’ll visit beautifully preserved synagogues and Jewish cemeteries and will be educated by some of Prague’s best tour guides. Unmissable and sobering. 

Cruise Prague’s Vltava River

https://www.prague-boats. cz/one-hour-river-cruise

The windchill may be intense, but a winter cruise up Prague’s Vltava will take you past some of the city’s most beautiful architecture, including Prague Castle and Charles Bridge, and teach you so much about this epic city at the same time. 

Average high temperature in February: 5

Average low temperature in February: -1

Getting there: The Czech Republic is located in central Europe, so it’s right on the popular tourist trail. Its nearest major city neighbors via road are all heavily trafficked destinations in their own right. Budapest (Hungary) and Krakow (Poland) are both 6 hours away and Vienna (Austria) is just short of 4 hours by train. Otherwise, Prague Airport is a major international hub to fly directly into.  

Where to stay in Prague in February

Stylish Two Bedroom Apartment near Charles Bridge

Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review: “I would highly recommend staying here. Josef was so helpful and accommodating. The apartment felt luxurious and comfortable. The little touches like shower gel, shampoo and great coffee made a weary traveller so grateful. Thank you Josef.” – Niki

Mosaic House

Price: $60+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Location. About a 15 minute walk to old town and plenty of cafes and restaurants close by. Close to transport too. Private rooms were so clean and spacious and modern. I had the best stay. The lounge areas had activities for socialising.” – Danielle, Australia 

Prague – Czech Republic – Prag Winter Tour

Watch this video on YouTube


9) Bruges, Belgium 

The medieval Belgian city of Bruges is totally charming, with its canals, cobblestone laneways and ornate architecture. The reasons behind its nickname “The Venice of the North” are obvious. February in Bruges doesn’t see extreme temperature dips, but it’s still pretty cold. However, that doesn’t mean that Bruges slows down even for a second, or that the iconic Belgian beer stops flowing…

What to see and do in Bruges in February: 

Bruges Beer Festival

One weekend in February. 400 beers from 80 breweries. Free entry. Thousands of beer fans. Need I say more about why Bruges Beer Festival is a major reason to hit this city in February?

Climb the Belfry

The Belfry of Bruges is its most famous medieval landmark, and if you can climb all 270 feet of this tower you’ll be rewarded with jaw dropping views of the city and beyond.  

Average high temperature in February: 7

Average low temperature in February: 2

Getting there: Fly directly into Oostende-Brugge International Airport or larger Brussels Airport. The Belgian capital Brussels is just over an hour train trip to Bruges, Paris is 2. 5 hours and Amsterdam is 3 hours. 

Where to stay in Bruges in February

Sunny and cosy apartment with bikes!

Price: $150+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Stunning view of the canal and the lights is particularly beautiful at night. Open and spacious apartment with plenty of room for 3 people to relax during our 3 night stay. Very quiet and comfortable for sleeping. Bus close to go to main town or walkable. Restaurants and supermarket nearby and plenty of facility to prepare own meals too if you wish. We enjoyed our stay and happy to recommend!” – Margie

Hotel Dukes’ Palace Brugge

Price: $180+ USD per night 

Guest review: “A beautiful traditional hotel with bags of character. The staff were really friendly, helpful and informative and really made me feel welcome. I also received a free upgrade for my stay as the hotel was not full (weekday stay). Everything about the hotel was stunning and made my stay very special.” – Rebecca, United Kingdom

How to Spend the PERFECT Day in Bruges, Belgium

Watch this video on YouTube


10) York, England 

The ancient northern city of York is one of England’s most beautiful, historically significant and charming, famed for the enormous Gothic cathedral, York Minster, its cobblestone streets (including the historical “Shambles”) and its fascinating history. York in February may be frosty, and regularly snowy, but that only contributes to its magical lore…

What’s on in York in February

In February, York embraces its Nordic roots for its annual week-long Viking festival. In addition, there’s always a pint and a roast to enjoy in a warm Northern English pub, friendly Yorkshire locals to chat to and a city steeped in history to enchant you…

Jorvik Viking Festival


York is the home of the largest Viking festival in Europe, believe it or not, and it’s well worth timing your visit to ensure you get to experience the action for yourself. For a week each February, York’s hotels are fully booked out as visitors head to the city for this Norse celebration. Expect lots of staged Viking skirmishes and combats, workshops and markets dotting the cobblestone streets of York. 

The Original Ghost Walk of York

Rug up against the freezing February night and join York’s longest running nighttime ghost tour. Hear haunting ghost stories from the best storytellers in the business, traveling on foot to all of the places the scary tales took place. Haunting, hair raising and a hell of a good time. 

48 Hours In York | UNILAD Adventure

Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 7

Average low temperature in February: 1

Getting there: Manchester has the nearest major airport to York, but the United Kingdom is best explored from the ground, especially the sheer beauty of Yorkshire. York is reachable from London in just over 3 hours, and there’s lots of train and bus services between the two daily. The major northern city of Leeds is only 45 minutes from York. 

Where to stay in York: 

Stroll to Historic City Centre From Refurbished Flat (AirBNB Plus)

Price: $120+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Brian was a wonderful host, very responsive to every message. The unit is very large and spacious and very tastefully decorated and so close to town. A Spar supermarket was located just down the road and such an easy walk into town only about 5 mins. The bed was wonderful with crisp linen, big fluffy towels and amazing shower, best shower we have had since arriving in the UK and spotlessly clean. We were able to park at the front door with no issues and Brian supplied parking permits for the 2 days we stayed. We literally parked the car when we arrived and didn’t get back into it until we left as we could walk everywhere. Great Italian food at Little Italy but suggest you book as very busy. Highly recommended.” – Jacqueline 

Guy Fawkes Inn, Sure Hotel Collection by Best Western

Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review:  “Amazing atmospheric place with excellent staff. A must in York for a genuine historic lovely stay!!!” – Brenda, United Kingdom

11) Chamonix, France 

Chamonix-Mont-Blanc (or simply “Chamonix”) is a popular ski resort at the base of the famous Mont Blanc – the tallest peak of the Alps region. All year Mont Blanc is a draw for tourists due to its breathtaking views, but in February the snow attracts serious alpine sports fans and is widely considered the best spot to ski in the entire Alps. Chamonix is located at the junction of Italy, Switzerland, and France, offering amazing accessibility on your trip to other major destinations. 

What’s on in Chamonix in February: 

Take a husky ride 


Dogsledding is a tradition in Chamonix, so be sure to book your place on a husky ride across the white snow of this majestic Alps location. 

Experience Aiguille du Midi

The #1 recommended activity in Chamonix and Mont Blanc is climbing to the peaks of this mountain in the Mont Blanc region in a cable car. You’ll reach the heights of 3,842m, so prepared to be a little breathless with the altitude. But the sweeping views of the French Alps are so worth it. 

Patagonia Chamonix – 30th Anniversary

Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 5

Average low temperature in February: -1

Getting there: The majority of visitors to Chamonix fly into Switzerland’s Geneva Airport, which offers daily connections direct to Chamonix. Lyon Airport in France also offers a high-speed train to Chamonix. 

Where to stay in Chamonix: 

Luxury one bedroom apartment with jacuzzi! (Airbnb)


Price: $120+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Giles’s place is one of the best airbnb’s I have ever stayed in. The studio Grace is set in a beautiful location surrounded by mountains with the outdoor Jacuzzi looking out to this view. The studio itself is amazing looks exactly like the picture if not better. There is everything you need here in a very stylish but homely space. The hosts are the most kind and generous people helping us with supplying food when we arrived very late due to being delayed. They even did a load of washing for us! Everything about this place and the hosts are perfect and I would stay here again with no hesitations :)” – Marley 

Alpina Eclectic Hotel

Price: $80+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Nice surprise. The room are stylish. The view of Mont Blanc is amazing from the balcony. And the breakfast is full of options and high quality. There is a spa where you can relax in a nice jacuzzi. Very well located. We will return for sure.” – De, Italy 

Freeriding The Steep Mountains Of Chamonix | Frozen Mind FULL SNOWBOARD/FREESKI FILM

Watch this video on YouTube



Tenerife, Spain 

The largest of Spain’s Canary Islands, Tenerife is a tourist magnet year-round, and even in February, it enjoys an average daily high of 20 degrees celsius. Being one of the warmest parts of Europe even in the depths of winter is just one reason Tenerife has made my list of the best European locations to visit in February. On top of that, it’s beautiful, the beaches are stunning, the water turquoise, the vibe relaxed as hell – plus it has one of the worlds biggest carnivals kicking off in February. You’re really closer to the West Coast of Africa when you visit Tenerife, so sit back, sip a cocktail and enjoy escaping the February chill for a little while…

Coastal village in Tenerife Canary Islands Spain

What’s on in Tenerife in February: 

Carnaval de Santa Cruz


Another massive part of the European carnival scene, Carnaval de Santa Cruz is Tenerife’s biggest annual celebration and sees in the beginning of Lent. In fact, it’s right behind Brazil’s world-famous Carnival on the list of the world’s biggest. Parades, parties, music and huge celebrations are held all across this beautiful island, and recent years have seen more than half a million attendees spill onto the island for the fortnight-long party. 

Winter on Tenerife North, Impressions 2018

Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 20

Average low temperature in February: 15

Getting there: The easiest way to reach Tenerife is to fly directly into Tenerife South Airport, which many European airlines service. 

Where to stay in Tenerife: 

Ocean & volcano views, terrace, wifi, concierge, in Villa (Airbnb)


Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Great location, in the beautiful and quiet north part of Tenerife. Close to all the interesting activities, beautiful beaches and authentic villages. The apartment is stylish, spotless and very comfortable. Great place to take off for your adventure in Tenerife.” – Shimrit

Iberostar Heritage Grand Mencey

Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review: “Our stay was exceptional. The rooms were impeccable, the decor stunning, the facilities fantastic, the staff attentive and polite. This hotel is close to faultless.” – Catherine, Netherlands

Tenerife Travel Guide: Top 10 Things To Do (4K)

Watch this video on YouTube


13) Innsbruck, Austria 

The beautiful Alps city of Innsbruck has always been beloved by European travelers, especially during the winter months. The Winter Olympics have even been hosted in Innsbruck twice thanks to its epic alpine sports stage. A more modern Austrian destination than its larger counterparts Salzburg and Vienna, Innsbruck still has so much of the charm (and perfection) you should be accustomed to if you’ve ever been to this pristine country. February in Innsbruck is a busy time for tourism, and also one of the best months of the year to hit this chic city. 

What’s on in Innsbruck in February

Air & Style

Now in its 25th year, Air & Style is a European snowboarding competition and music festival held annually in Innsbruck. It’s the only event of its kind in all of Europe and is held for a weekend each February. 


 Kristallwelten (“Crystals World”) is a massive exhibition and art experience from brand giant Swarovski. Using the brands famed crystals, there’s art installations, films, massive gardens and visual experiences everywhere you look. There’s also a handy shuttle direct from Innsbruck to Wattens, where the exhibit is housed. 

Alpine Zoo Innsbruck

Open daily, Innsbruck’s Alpine Zoo has achieved the title of the highest elevated zoo in Europe, but it is also the sanctuary for over 2000 animals and plays an important role in animal conservation. You won’t miss when the church bells chime in the hour in Innsbruck, because the wolves of the Alpine Zoo join in, howling along with it. 

Air + Style Innsbruck-Tirol 2017 – Recap Video

Watch this video on YouTube


Average high temperature in February: 6

Average low temperature in February: -3

Getting there: You can fly into Innsbruck Airport with a series of European airlines. Alternatively, the Eurail system makes it easy to access the Austrian city from a range of other locations. Salzburg is less than 2 hours away, Munich is less than 3 hours away and Zurich is 3.5 hours away. The Austrian capital of Vienna is 4 hours by train. 

Where to stay in Innsbruck: 

Explore Innsbruck From a Chic Apartment in a Trendy Area

Price: $70+ USD per night 

Guest review: “We only had one night in Innsbruck but it was made super memorable because we stayed in Matteo’s place. A brilliant location 5 mins from old town and station. Super stylish and well equipped and so clean. Bathroom was great and the kitchen had everything you needed. Our son loved sleeping on the mezzanine. We loved the area with local bars and cafes and really appreciated all the insider tips including our wonderful dinner at Olive just around the corner. The host was really responsive and helpful. Could not have asked for more and had a bonus view of the alps from the front window for our last night in Austria. Thanks so much. Highly recommended.” – Emily 

Hotel Mondschein

Price: $100+ USD per night 

Guest review: “We loved the hotel! The staff were very professional and friendly. The room was lovely and included a seating area by the windows overlooking the river. The location was excellent for exploring the old town of Innsbruck. Would definitely recommend!” – Sally, Australia 

Am I Missing Any Places to Visit in Europe in February…?

Now, I probably could have extended this list to like 30+ different places, because I absolutely love visiting Europe during winter! If you think there are any specific cities, festivals, or events that I need to add to my list, please do let me know! I’d love to hear where you enjoy traveling!

Essential European Winter Travel Tips:

  • Pack accordingly for the weather! February in Europe is the coldest month, and visitors from more temperate climates really can’t comprehend the kind of cold they are about to experience. It’s icy, bone-chilling cold you can’t escape, so excellent quality winter jackets, boots and clothes equipped to withstand snow and ice (and a TON of thermals) are just the beginning of what you should be packing. The best part is that European stores are equipped with clothing and footwear designed for their own plunging temperatures, so if you forget anything – or just want to go on a shopping spree – you can guarantee you’ll find what you’re looking for in any major city!
  • Purchasing adequate travel insurance well in advance of your winter Euro trip goes without saying, but if you’ll be skiing, snowboarding or taking part in winter sports, add the mandatory extras. Trust me, falling and breaking your leg on a mountain without travel insurance is not only stupid, but it will set you back hundreds of thousands of dollars – at least. Even catching a winter cold could require medical treatment if you get particularly sick. Travel insurance to cover you in Europe is totally affordable and a MUST. No excuses. 
  • It’s pretty obvious, but be aware of your surroundings at all times, especially during big events. Huge annual carnivals like those across Europe in February are prime time for pickpockets and thieves to get busy – so even if it means channeling your Dad and wearing a money belt with your belongings safely tucked away, you won’t regret it. 
  • Most of all, enjoy visiting some of Europe’s best city’s at this magical time of year! 

7 Best Winter Destinations In Europe | STA Travel x Contiki European Magic Vlog

Watch this video on YouTube


Looking for some more travel inspiration?

My travel blog is filled with helpful articles and itineries that I’m sure you’ll love! Take a look through a few of my favorites below, and let me know what you think!  Also, feel free to reach out to me with any questions!

  • The 50 Best Explore Quotes To Fuel Your Wanderlust
  • Flashpacking Finland | My Northern Lights Bucket List Adventure
  • LA to San Diego Drive | 15 Must Visit Places in Southern California
  • The 12 Safest Countries to Visit in Africa
  • 10 Days in Italy Itinerary | How to Plan the Perfect Italian Vacation
  • 30 Music Festivals in Australia To Experience Before You Die
  • The 20 Best Paris Hotels with Eiffel Tower View
  • 40 Wild Parties in 40 Countries To Experience Before You’re 40
  • The Ultimate BALI Itinerary | The Best Places to Visit & Things to Do
  • Top 20 Singapore Rooftop Pool Hotels
  • The 20 Best Beaches in Malaysia To Visit Before You Die
  • The Deccan Odyssey | The Luxurious India Train Journey for the Bucket List
  • 2018 In Review | The Most Epic Year of Travel & Festivals
  • The Ultimate Music Festival Camping Packing List
  • Top 25 Tips For Backpacking Thailand
  • The Ultimate SYDNEY Itinerary | How to Spend 4-7 Days Exploring Sydney, Australia
  • The 40 Best Festival Quotes to Inspire Your Next Adventure


Thanks for reading about these awesome places to visit in Europe in February!

Share the Europen Winter love with your travel squad!

Where to go to Europe in February – Vinsky’s website


  1. Where to go to Europe in February
  2. Italy in February
  3. Venice for 9 thousand rubles
  4. Rome for 8 thousand rubles
  5. Verona for 1006 thousand rubles Milan for 7 thousand rubles
  6. Battle of oranges
  7. Carnival in Aalst Belgium
  8. February in Europe

Where to go in February in Europe

Where to go in February 2021 inexpensively in Europe? Many places. Where to go in February 2021 to Europe without a visa – nowhere.
Without a Schengen visa, they won’t let you go anywhere except for a couple of Balkan countries, which are completely uninteresting in February.

February is the last month of winter in Europe.
But not here in Russia, although part of Russia is in Europe – here spring will begin only in April.
In northern and central Europe, February is rather cold and dank.
Therefore, if you go to Germany, Austria, Switzerland or France (as well as to Poland, Slovakia, Bulgaria), then only if you go skiing.

Italy in February

But in Italy, especially in the southern part, real spring is in February.
What’s with the air tickets to Italy (yesterday, while writing the article Beach holidays in February 2021, I also checked Europe)?
All is well with air tickets:

Rome = 8 thousand rubles
Milan = 7 thousand rubles (though this is the Victory in Bergamo)
Verona = 10 thousand rubles
Venice = 9 thousand rubles

And what happens in Italy in February?

Venice for 9 thousand rubles

That’s right – in February, the main Italian event is the Venice Carnival in Venice from 06. 02 to 16.02.2021.
It’s good that in 2021 the carnival takes place in February.

In 2016, the carnival started at the end of January and it was cold and damp in Venice at that time.
Here is an example of visiting the Carnival in Venice in 2017, when Venice had nice dry weather.

Rome for 8 thousand rubles

The Eternal City.
The sights of centuries of aging, like good cognac, become even better.
In the narrow streets of the Old City it is up to +20, so sitting down at a table, drinking a glass of cold prosecco and thoughtfully chewing prosciutto with melon is like buying shawarma in Moscow at the entrance to the metro.
Damn tangerines and oranges on the trees will add bitterness to the aching feeling of nostalgia for the Western Degunino residential area.
Shopping in Rome is good in its own way.

And when you get bored with Rome, you can rent a car and rush to Castelli Romani or, in general, leave Lazio and move to Tuscany.
The sun is shining, it’s not hot – why not take a ride with the breeze to Lake Bolsena?

Verona for 10 thousand rubles

The arena in the center with Juliet’s house is connected by Giuseppe Mazzini street with shops.
And on Piazza Erbe, souvenir sellers have pitched their tents.
Verona has its own carnival in February.
Verona is the gateway to the Alpine ski resorts and Lake Garda with pretty retirement towns in winter.
In the spring Sirmione, Desenzano, Bardolino will be full of different glamorous personalities in expensive cars, but now you can safely take a walk here.

Milan for 7 thousand rubles

From Milan you can get to the most beautiful village in Italy in an hour 2019but I do not advise you to do this.
It’s better to go to Piedmont via Piedmont’s Romantic Road.
How romantic to celebrate Valentine’s Day on the terrace of a restaurant overlooking the snowy peaks of the Alps on the horizon.
It’s a bit chilly, but there is no snow or rain. You can walk in sneakers, throwing on a down jacket freshly bought at shopping.

The Battle of the Oranges

500 tons of oranges are brought to Ivrea (a city between Milan and Turin), where the Battle of the Oranges will take place on February 23, 24 and 25 as part of the historical carnival.
Annual event. This is how it was last year: Battle of the Oranges in Italy 2019.

Ivrea Italy from 17 to 20 February 2021 Battle of the Oranges (Battaglia delle Arance) as part of the Storico Carnevale di Ivrea.
Between Milan and Turin, in the city of Ivrea, there will be a historical carnival (little known to the Russian public), a gastronomic festival (dishes of Piedmont, of course, palenta from the cauldron).
Flights to Milan | Rent a car in Italy | Hotels in Ivrea.

Aalst Carnival Belgium

Aalst is located between Brussels and Ghent. In 2021, the dates of the carnival fall in mid-February: from 14 to 16.
Carnival in Aalst is famous for its funny costumes and installations on the topic of the day, which is why it was removed from the UNESCO list.
By the way, the city authorities answered that they themselves did not want Aalst to be on this list.

Flights to Brussels ||| Car rental in Belgium ||| Hotels in Aalst

February in Europe

Europe is good in February.
And off-season air tickets don’t bite.
What you need for a trip to Europe in February: a Schengen visa, a desire for a change of scenery and money.

Hell, every year there is less and less money: housing and communal services, gasoline, food prices are rising.
And the VAT has increased.
But this is no reason to deny yourself the pleasure.
Otherwise, why do we live?

Weather Po in February 2023: Temperature and climate

Are you planning a nice weather vacation in Pau in February 2023? Here you can find all weather information for Pau in February:

  • >>Overview: By Weather and climate in February
  • >>Weather by month
  • >>According to the weather in February
  • >>Current temperature and weather forecast for Po

Monthly weather


Average temperature (°C) minimum temperature (°C) maximum temperature (°C) Precipitation rate (mm) Humidity (%) Rainy days (D) day length (hours)
January 5. 3 1.8 9.3 116 80% 10 5.0
February 5.6 1.7 9.9 104 76% 9 6.0
March 8.6 4.1 13.5 107 73% 10 7.0
April 11 6.4 15.7 148 73% 12 8.0
May 14.3 9.7 18.8 165 74% 12 8.0
June 18.1 13.5 22.7 133 73% 10 9.0
July 19.7 15.2 24.2 111 73% 10 8.0
August 19. 9 15.5 24.6 109 73% 10 8.0
September 17.3 12.9 22 100 72% 8 8.0
October 14.1 9.9 18.8 127 75% 10 7.0
November 8.6 5.2 12.6 144 80% 10 5.0
December 6 2.6 10.2 109 78% 10 5.0
January February March April May June July August September October November December
Average temperature (°C) 5. 3 5.6 8.6 eleven 14.3 18.1 19.7 19.9 17.3 14.1 8.6 6
minimum temperature (°C) 1.8 1.7 4.1 6.4 9.7 13.5 15.2 15.5 12.9 9.9 5.2 2.6
maximum temperature (°C) 9.3 9.9 13.5 15.7 18.8 22.7 24.2 24.6 22 18.8 12.6 10.2
Precipitation rate (mm) 116 104 107 148 165 133 111 109 100 127 144 109
Humidity (%) 80% 76% 73% 73% 74% 73% 73% 73% 72% 75% 80% 78%
Rainy days (D) 10 9 10 12 12 11 10 9 9 10 11 10
day length (hours) 4. 9 5.7 7.1 7.6 8.0 8.6 8.2 8.3 8.1 7.1 5.4 5.3

Data: 1991 – 2021 minimum temperature (°C), maximum temperature (°C), Precipitation (mm), Humidity, Rainy days.
Data: 1999 – 2019: day length

Weather and climate for the following months

PO in January

PO in March

PO in April

PO in May

Plant in June

to July

PO in August

PO in September

PO in October

PO in November

To December

According to the weather in February // average weather



Temperature (°C) Temperature Max. (°C) Temperature Min. (°C) Rainfall (mm) day length (hours)
1. February 6 °C 10°C 2 °C 5.8mm 5.0
2. February 6 °C 10°C 2 °C 4.7mm 4.3
3. February 5 °C 10°C 1 °C 4.1mm 5.8
4. February 6 °C 10°C 2 °C 4.8mm 5.8
5. February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 5.1mm 5.5
6. February 6 °C 10°C 2 °C 5.4mm 5.3
7. February 6 °C 10°C 2 °C 5.0 mm 5.6
8. February 5 °C 10°C 1 °C 5.7mm 5.8
9. February 6 °C 11 °C 1 °C 3. 8mm 6.4
10. February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 5.4mm 5.9
11. February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 5.1mm 5.9
12 February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 5.4mm 6.2
13 February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 4.3mm 6.4
14 February 6 °C 11 °C 3 °C 6.2 mm 4.5
15 February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 3.9 mm 5.4
16. February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 2.8mm 5.2
17. February 6 °C 10°C 2 °C 4.6mm 5.1
18. February 6 °C 10°C 2 °C 3.3mm 5.1
19 February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 4.4mm 4.8
20. February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 4.2mm 6.3
21 February 6 °C 11 °C 2 °C 5.4mm 6.8
22 February 6 °C 10°C 1 °C 5.4mm 6.6
23 February 6 °C 11 °C 3 °C 4.4mm 5.0
24 February 7 °C 12 °C 3 °C 3.2mm 5.8
25 February 7 °C 12 °C 3 °C 4.5mm 6.6
26 February 7 °C 11 °C 3 °C 5. 7mm 6.6
27 February 7 °C 11 °C 3 °C 6.3mm 6.3
28 February 6 °C 11 °C 3 °C 5.1mm 5.3

Data: 1991 – 2021. Sun Hour Data 1999-2019.

Where is the hottest place in Spain in February? – Reviews Wiki

Tenerife. In February , the temperature in Tenerife is about 20 degrees, it is one of the hottest D ‘ Spain .

Or where is the hottest place in Europe in winter? Don’t miss no plus to take a tour of Mykonos. This island is famous for its windmills, pelican and nightlife. If you are looking for city hot D ‘ Europe en beekeeper , be aware that the record in Athens is 24 ° in February, it makes you think.

Where is the hottest place in Spain in November?

C ‘ is in Andalusia that you will plus probably swim in the month November . Seville is often city hottest D ‘ Spain but of course the climate can change and rain is possible. Average temperatures in Malaga at November ranges from 11°C in the morning to 19°C in the afternoon.

Where to go in Spain in February?

  • Almeria – a worthy place in February .
  • Barcelona – worthy place in February .
  • Benidorm is a badly recommended destination in February .
  • Bilbao is a badly recommended destination in February .
  • Cordoba – worthy place at February .
  • Granada – worthy place in February .

Where is the hottest time of the year in Spain?

Beach at Spain in April

We recommend the region of Alicante in Carthage (Murcia) because this region is often sheltered from the weather from the Atlantic Ocean and this is where the water is found. is hotter than during this period (possible 20 degree points).

Where is the hottest place in Europe?

The moment is hotter than theoretically falls in mid-July, in the middle of this period, hence the difference with the calendar, which actually spend the summer from about June 21 to September 21. ️ The previous warmest years 2010 and 2018 are only 0.1°C colder, a small margin.

Where is the hottest place in Europe right now?

Country hot D’ Europe : Greece.

Where is the hottest October in Europe?

Greece is the perfect place for a sunny holiday in October . Temperatures reach plus often 23 degrees and rarely drop below 20 degrees.

Seafront in Greece

  • Paros;
  • Sifnos;
  • Corfu;
  • Mykonos;
  • Santorini;
  • Rhodes;
  • Ridge.

Good weather in Spain in November?

Month November en Spain – this is most often characterized by sunny weather. … This month November , the average minimum temperature is 8 ° C and the maximum 15 ° C.

Which city to choose in Spain in November?

  • Almeria recommended for Nov .
  • Barcelona is a worthy place in November .
  • Benidorm – worthy place in November .
  • Bilbao – worthy place in November .
  • Cordova – a worthy place in November .
  • Granada – worthy place in November .

What is the temperature in Andalusia in November?

We can count on 22 sunny days, but il expect 17% rate usually threatens heavy rain. For this month November then temperatures average minimum 9°C and maximum 17°C.

Where to go in southern Spain?

Le southern spain in winter: where to go ?

  1. Malaga. Malaga is a city of undeniable charm that extends far beyond the beach.
  2. White villages. Andalusia is full of beautiful typical villages that you can visit all year round. …
  3. Seville. …
  4. Cordova. …
  5. Baeza and Ubeda. …
  6. Sierra Cazorla. …
  7. Grenade. …
  8. Jerez de la Frontera.

How is the weather in Spain in February?

At this time of the year Spain awaits you under the temperature of fluctuates between 19 and 21 ° C, enough to enjoy the wonders of the country during your holiday in February .

When is the best time to go to Spain?

You can drive all year round Spain , but if you wish, you need to give preference to different seasons: from June to September, as a rule, very hot and dry, ideal for beach and sun lovers; Winter is often cool but still pleasant, except north or rainy are frequent …

Where to go in Spain in April?

  • Almeria recommended for April .
  • Barcelona is the recommended destination for April .
  • Benidorm is the recommended destination for April .
  • Bilbao – worthy place in April .
  • Córdoba is the recommended destination for April .
  • Granada is the recommended destination for April .

How is the weather in Andalusia in April?

The month April en Andalusia is favorable for tourism with a weather comfort index of 51/100. In , the temperature of ranges from 13°C to 21°C, with an average of 17°C, and there is almost no rainfall (40mm).

How is the weather in Spain in April?

Le month April en Spain is most often characterized by pace sunny. We can count on 19 sunny days, but il expect 23% pace threatens usually heavy rain. For this month April , the minimum temperature is on average 9 ° C and the maximum is 18 ° C.

Which is the sunniest city in Europe?

1. Valletta, Malta. Prancing at the top of our list of cities sunny , we present to you Valletta, the capital of Malta.

What is the hottest region in the world?

Ethiopia, record number hot

Definitely one of the hottest hot on the planet, Ethiopia sees temperatures hovering between 45°C and 60°C at the Dallol site. Enough to be at the top of our rankings.

Which country has the best climate?

The city of Loja, Ecuador has the best climate in the world. Neither too hot nor too cold all year round. This stability of is due to its equatorial location.

Which country is currently the hottest in the world?

Ethiopia record country le hot

Definitely one of the countries le hot On the planet, Ethiopia sees temperatures hovering between 45°C and 60°C at Dol. Enough to be at the top of our rankings.

What is the hottest place?

We don’t know the Sonoran Desert. You will tell me: this is after all, the desert. Yes, but still: there, in this Lucky Luke-worthy desert, between Mexico, California, and Arizona, 80.8 degrees were measured.

Which city is the hottest today?

Toulon, the hottest city of France With an average annual temperature of 16.5 ° C, is Toulon, which is in the top 20 cities hottest from mainland France.

What is the weather in Germany in the month of February is highly dependent on the region. The air warms up at night to +4.5°C, and during the day up to +8.7°C, it rains 9days and 18.6 mm of precipitation falls per month. And, for example, in Bremen, the weather conditions are not very good, since the air is up to + 7. 5 ° C, cloudy and rainy days are at least 3. The best cities to relax at this time are Bad Mergentheim, Dillingen, Gestacht. The air temperature in February is +4.0°C.


Average temperature during the day: +4.0°C
Sea water temperature: +2.4°C
Number of sunny days: 9 days
Rainy days:
9 days
18.6 mm

Water temperature in Germany in February

Should you visit Germany in February?

The weather in Germany in February is good for holidays, this month’s rating is 4.2 out of five. The weather is not very good, there are few tourists. At this time, the cold sea temperature is +2.4°C. It rains a lot, about 9 days a month, with 18.6 mm of precipitation. Sunny skies for at least 9 days. The weather in Germany at the end of February at the beginning and middle of the month is presented on the chart. The air temperature in February is +4.0°C. At this time, the best climatic conditions in 3 cities:

Weather in February Mühlhausen Weather in February Bad Aibling Weather in February Rosenheim


air: +2.8°C
rain: 8 days
sun: 8 days


air: +2.1°C
rain: 9 days
sun: 10 days


air: +2. 1°C
rain: 9days
sun: 10 days
Best climate in cities in February

City Air temperature Water temperature Rainy days (precipitation)
Gotha +2.9°C 5 days (6.96mm)
Lar +4.7°C 12 days (29.64mm)
Nördlingen +2.7°C 8 days (25.62mm)
Saalfeld +1.3°C 5 days (18. 40mm)
Wunstorf +4.2°C 10 days (24.09mm)
Hanover +7°C 0 days (18.4mm)
Bensheim +5.0°C 10 days (15.14mm)

Full list of cities

Quick city search

Air temperature in Germany in February

The difference in daily air temperature throughout the year is 20.7°C, but due to the presence of the sea, the climate in Germany is quite mild for months. The coldest month is January when the air warms up to +2.7°C, and the warmest month is July with +23. 4°C. The air temperature in February is +4.0°C.

Water temperature in Germany

The beach season here lasts: . The temperature in the sea at this time of the year is from – to – conducive to a pleasant swim. Worst weather in Germany and water temperature recorded in November -. The air temperature in February is +4.0°C.

Number of rainy days and precipitation in February

Unlucky month for travel – July, it rains on average 16 days. The maximum monthly rainfall is 44.3 mm. The air temperature in February is +4.0°C.

Rating of comfortable rest in February

The rating is calculated by months, taking into account the average air temperature, the amount of rain and other indicators. Over the course of a year in Germany, the score ranges from 4.2 in December to 5.0 in August, out of a possible five. The air temperature in February is +4.0°C.

Month Air temperature during the day Water temperature Solar
Rainy days (precipitation)
December +4.2°C 6.5 13 days (42.7 mm)
January +2.7°C +0.0°C 5.3 11 days (37.9 mm)
February +4.0°C +0.0°C 8.9 9 days (22.9 mm)
March +8. 9°C 9.2 11 days (22.1 mm)
April +14.4°C 12.9 12 days (19.9 mm)
May +17.8°C 15.8 15 days (38.1 mm)
June +20.9°C 14.9 15 days (39.2 mm)
July +23.4°C 16.4 16 days (44.3 mm)
August +23.1°C 20.1 14 days (35. 5 mm)
September +19.0°C 16.6 11 days (25.2 mm)
October +13.5°C 9.5 11 days (26.3 mm)
November +8.3°C 7.8 11 days (27.2 mm)

Number of sunny days in February

Beautiful sunny weather will delight tourists in August – as many as 21 sunny days per month. Great time to visit Germany. The air temperature in February is +4.0°C.

    Please note:

  • Weather in Germany in January: rating 4.2 (out of 5), air +2. 7°C , sea: +3.7°C, rain 11 days
  • Weather in Germany in March: rating 4.2 (out of 5), air +8.9°C , rain 11 days

Holidays in February 2023: where to go to relax in February at sea or on an excursion?

February is far from the most popular month for traveling to other countries, because the New Year holidays and school holidays are behind us, and summer is not going to come yet. But do not despair, because the crowds of annoying tourists managed to leave the beaches, and the prices in the last winter month are very economical. Some tourists go to explore Asia, others travel to European countries.

Beach holidays in February

Snowy and cold February drives the inhabitants of our countries to hot lands, to the sea or ocean. If you decide to go to Thailand, you should carefully consider the region to visit. After all, the weather will directly depend on the region of the country. Experts advise purchasing vouchers to the southeastern regions or nearby islands. An excellent choice would be Pattaya or Koh Chang. Not a bad alternative would be Phuket, Samet or Phi Phi. During this period, there is not much precipitation, the sea is calm and warm, and the sun has managed to warm the air up to 26 degrees. At night, the thermometer does not drop below 20 degrees.

The United Arab Emirates also continues to attract tourists with its mild climate. It is believed that the most successful time for tourism in the country lasts from October to May. Modern rest in luxury hotels with developed infrastructure will be offered to you by the capital – Abu Dhabi. You can go to Sharjah. The city has many parks and greenery. You can swim in the blue lagoon. The February weather will delight you with a warm temperature of 25 degrees, while the water warms up to 18 degrees. The Gulf area can often be windy and occasionally rainy, so take a couple of warm clothes with you for evening outings.

Maldives is an excellent choice. Thanks to the tropical maritime climate, the temperature stays at around 25 degrees even at night. The water temperature stays the same. The islands are famous for their atolls, each resort is an individual world, with snow-white beaches and clear water.

The most budget option would be a tour to Egypt. For local areas, the weather is considered quite cool. Speaking of climate, you should rely on luck. Despite the fact that the water in the sea is not the warmest of the year, Russians are happy to swim here.

The Canary Islands, in particular Tenerife, are also attractive places to visit. The island of eternal spring will delight guests with a mild temperature of 20 degrees. There is no better place to come up with for those who cannot stand the sweltering heat. Emotions are guaranteed: walks along the coast, swimming in the ocean, volcanoes and exotic nature.

Exotic destinations for travel in February

Unparalleled exotic holidays await you in Cuba. The average annual temperature reaches above 25 degrees and February is no exception. Local beaches are ready to welcome new guests almost all year round. Cuba is ready to offer you not only beautiful beaches and infrastructure, but also interesting excursions and its rich history. The Caribbean Sea is simply not able to leave anyone indifferent. The sun heats the air up to 30 degrees. In addition to a beach holiday, the Dominican Republic is able to give you unforgettable emotions of its carnival processions. Puerto Plata and Samana are favorite resorts for tourists.

Mexico offers hot, sunny, dry weather in February. In the southern part of the country, the air warms up to 30 degrees, the water is not much cooler. Of course, the weather in different regions of the country may vary. The cost of tours to these countries may vary. Hotels will offer accommodation for any budget. More exotic than in the Maldives is almost impossible to get. Coral beaches and blue sea, why not paradise? A huge number of underwater beaches, coral reefs, rich tropical vegetation and the originality of the villages of the local people are waiting for you.

When choosing Vietnam, be vigilant! A vacation can be spoiled by a muddy sea, occasional rain and wind. If these factors do not stop you, feel free to purchase vouchers to these regions. February vacation prices are not very expensive, and the air temperature is 30 degrees during the day and 24 at night. If you are into diving or surfing, you can buy tickets to Phan Thiet or Phu Quoc Island.

India is the birthplace of Buddhist temples of ancient culture. Surprisingly, trips to the southern part of the country are somewhat cheaper than to the north. It is better for young people to turn their eyes to the north of the country, but if you want to relax with your family, then perhaps it is better to go to the south. You will get plenty of good service, white sand and miles of beaches.

If you are not afraid to take risks, buy a ticket to Bali. If you are lucky, you will be able to fully enjoy the beautiful beaches, and if not, then the rest will turn into rains and winds for you. An ecological, clean corner of our world – Cambodia is increasingly gaining popularity among the Russian people. Local hoteliers do not spare money at all for the development of their service. There is no place for smoking pipes here, only clean air, sea and beaches. The weather gives real heat – 30 – 35 degrees. Light rains still sometimes happen, but they only carry a saving coolness.

Festivals and holidays in February

February is considered the month of love and many romantic couples are eager to get in and decorate Valentine’s Day with themed festivals. Belgium to the fullest begins to celebrate Shrove Tuesday. One of the most colorful holidays in the world takes place in the city of Binsha. On the first day, you can watch the parade in carnival costumes, then the youth and culinary days pass. Tables are laid on all the streets of the city. You can try a variety of pancakes with delicious fillings right in the open air. On the last day of the festival, the city is overflowing with fairy tale characters, where it is customary to throw oranges.

Nearly 500,000 tourists from all over the world come to Brazil for one of the most famous festivals in the world. Everyone seems to be going crazy, songs are pouring from everywhere, people are dancing samba and drinking wine on the streets. Behind the carnival masks, no one will recognize you by sight and you can walk as you please, no one will be able to condemn you for frenzied dancing and hateful kisses.

Meanwhile, in Germany, namely in Cologne, a festival in honor of a woman is being celebrated. The beautiful half of humanity on this day without hesitation cuts off the ties of any man passing near the town hall. At the end of the month, festivities begin in honor of the beautiful Venetian festival. Venice is already full of people all year round, and during this period it is simply overcrowded that it seems the city is about to burst. Before the main event of the year, a competition is held for the most beautiful and graceful girl. The festival opens on the main square. Initially, there is a parade with carnival masks and costumes. The next day is marked by a carnival dove, which is traditionally released on a tightrope. The iron bird portends a march towards the regatta. On the main channel, gondoliers dressed in themed outfits will be waiting for you, ready to ride you through the narrow streets. Every day there are events, fireworks, fireworks, and all residents and tourists try to outdo each other in the brightness of their costume.

Cigarettes smoke in Cuba, but there is a lot of noise, because at the end of winter there is a cigarette festival. Who just does not take part in this procession. For tourists, educational excursions to the plantation are carried out. There is an opportunity to participate and win in the competition, get valuable prizes and even purchase something of value at the auction.

Japan tries to keep up and holds a flower festival in honor of the Orchid. Tokyo is filled with flowers, the spectacle is truly breathtaking. It is believed that taking part in the show is very profitable, because the winner is awarded a worthy cash prize and, in addition, he will receive honor and respect from the audience. The new lunar year in this country is celebrated with a festival and nudity, which has a long history. Only a loincloth hides nudity, and in this form, local residents drink sake, take an active part in lotteries that determine the “Divine Man”. And here the most interesting begins. As soon as that same man is identified, thousands of hands will reach out to him to touch him, because according to beliefs, bodily contact with the chosen one promises happiness and health.

Ski resorts in February

In February, many European resorts become much calmer and quieter, because vacations and holidays are long over. Prices for some resorts are already starting to fall, which cannot but please tourists. But in France, on the contrary, you can expect an influx of tourists, as school holidays begin here. Winter sports are inconceivable without key Alpine resorts.

Austria welcomes you with snowy peaks and groomed trails. The peculiarity of the area is the presence of a diverse landscape, where you can get both a classic vacation and more extreme ones, such as snowboarding, climbing or trekking. February Switzerland is especially good. Winter is in a hurry to please you with frosts, it already feels the end of the season. In the last winter month, snowfalls and northern winds dominate here, and the sky is covered with gloomy and gray clouds. But the ski resorts still have perfect snow cover. During the day the temperature does not fall below -3 degrees. In the highlands, the thermometer drops a few degrees lower. Be sure to get thermal underwear and other warm clothes, as it is still not too warm here. Tourists have always been attracted by French resorts: Courchevel, Chamonix or La Plagne. The infrastructure is well developed, and the tracks are provided for different levels of training. In addition, in February there are attractive weather conditions, the temperature ranges from zero to -6 degrees. At such resorts, you can please yourself not only with skiing, but also with saunas, swimming pools, horseback riding and sleigh rides.

You can also go to Italy. Rest on the mountain peaks can be combined with shopping trips and excursions to the historical parts of the country. You can also purchase tickets to other European countries. For example, the Ore resort is located in Scandinavia, and in neighboring Finland there is far from one ski center. Lillehammer has brought fame to Norway in terms of ski holidays.

If you are too lazy to apply for visas, you can simply go to the Caucasus, visit Krasnaya Polyana, Dombay or Elbrus. If you want to break out of the country and save money at the same time, a trip to Bulgaria will be a more budget option.

In any case, February is an amazing month that will give you both a beach holiday on the sea coast and luxurious ski tours with good snow cover. This is the month of romance, which is able to give a vacation outside the country without a large influx of tourists.

Not Found (#404)

Not Found (#404)

Whoops…something went wrong!

Sorry, we did not find the page you are looking for




Dog sled tours

Snowmobile tours

Quad tours

Walking tours


Bike tours


Ski tours

Diving and snorkeling

Jeep tours

Surfing and SUP tours

Combined tours

Horse tours


Excursion tours

Ski trips

Helicopter tours

Fishing tours

Fitness and yoga tours


Railway tours

Are you looking for one of the sections below?



Railway tickets



We have made a selection of interesting articles for you!

Leave a review


Thank you very much 🙂

Your feedback is very important to us and will be posted on the service as soon as possible.

La palma attractions: 15 Best Things to Do in La Palma, Canary Islands, Spain + MAP

Опубликовано: March 28, 2020 в 10:12 am


Категории: Miscellaneous

15 Best Things to Do in La Palma, Canary Islands, Spain + MAP

There are many wonderful things to do in La Palma, the most beautiful of the Canary Islands. La Palma is also one of the quietest since, despite having lots of tourist attractions and spectacular landscapes, it’s not as visited as other islands.

That said, this is the best Canary Island if you enjoy hiking, natural scenery, and stargazing, as La Palma has some of the darkest night skies in the world. Without a doubt, there is no better place to go for tranquility, relaxation, and disconnection from the busy world. If you’re looking for nightlife and parties, I’d recommend another island. Of course, there are many activities in La Palma, so I’m sure you won’t get bored here.

The best way to see all the points of interest in La Palma is by renting a car. We always go through Rentalcars since they guarantee the best prices.


In this guide, I’ll explain the different places to visit in La Palma, as well as where to stay, where to eat, and how to get here. I’ll also leave you a map at the end, so you can easily locate all my recommended attractions, restaurants, and accommodations.

1. Caldera de Taburiente National Park

Caldera de Taburiente National Park is a must-see in La Palma. This national park encompasses nearly 12,000 acres and has become one of the most popular natural areas in La Palma and all of the Canary Islands.

Here, you’ll find the park’s namesake, the famous Caldera de Taburiente, a 5-mile-wide crater that has been the site of several volcanic eruptions. Water also plays a crucial role in this volcanic area, and there are several streams and waterfalls, like the beautiful Cascada de los Colores that have eroded and shaped this park’s landscape.

1. Caldera de Taburiente National Park, an awesome place to visit in La Palma

Also, in this national park, you can do one of the most popular activities in La Palma, hiking! There are lots of trails, although I recommend the one that goes to Roque de los Muchachos, the highest point in the park. The route through Barranco de las Angustias, which goes to the waterfall, and the path to the Mirador de la Cumbrecita, which leads to a lovely panorama, are also popular.

If you want to take advantage of your time in the park, I suggest taking this guided tour, which goes to all the most interesting areas. This excursion, which goes to the park’s highest points, is also a great option for hikers. You can also camp in the park and, although it requires you to apply for a permit, it’s an experience I highly recommend.

2. Roque de los Muchachos, the most stunning lookout in La Palma, Spain

Roque de los Muchachos is in Caldera de Taburiente National Park, and it’s the highest point in La Palma, at 7,960 feet. There is an astrophysical observatory here, and it’s considered one of the top places in the world to stargaze. I definitely recommend doing this tour if you want to enjoy the starry sky!

2. Roque de los Muchachos, the most stunning lookout in La Palma, Spain

La Palma, along with the other Canary Islands, has the optimal conditions for astronomical observation, which is why it’s a designated Starlight Tourist Destination. I suggest taking a look at our guide on how to photograph the Milky Way so you can take full advantage of your time here. You can also visit other astronomical viewpoints on the island, like the Mirador del Molino in Barlovento, the Salto del Enamorado in Puntallana, or the Molino de Buracas in Garfafía. There are many others too, which you can research here.

Roque de los Muchachos is also a fantastic place to visit in La Palma during the day since it has lots of hiking trails on which you can see the beautiful flora and fauna.

3. Visit La Cumbrecita, the best thing to do in La Palma, Canary Islands

La Cumbrecita is another top attraction in La Palma. It’s also in Caldera de Taburiente National Park and offers stunning views of the natural area. If you’re going to drive here, be aware that you must apply for a permit here.

There are various hiking trails in this area, although the one that goes to Lomo de las Chozas is the most popular since it’s short, simple, and has beautiful lookout points.

3. Visit La Cumbrecita, the best thing to do in La Palma, Canary Islands

From La Cumbrecita, you can go to the shrine of the Virgin of El Pino, although this route is a bit more difficult and takes about 3 hours to complete. You could also make the ascent to Pico Bejenado, which is 6,080 feet above sea level and boasts amazing panoramic views. It’s a more challenging route and can take up to 5 hours to complete. If you’re doing either of these two routes, make sure your parking permit is valid for several hours.

As you can see, visiting La Cumbrecita is one of the best things to do in La Palma if you want to enjoy some time walking in nature.

4. Fuencaliente de La Palma, something you can’t miss in La Palma, Spain

Fuencaliente de La Palma is one of the places you must see in La Palma. It’s an area with great volcanic activity, and you can find both the San Antonio and the Teneguía volcanoes here, the latter of which is the youngest volcano in the Canary Islands.

Another top attraction in La Palma that you can find here is the Fuencaliente salt fields. Located at the foot of the lighthouse, the salt pans cover over 9 acres and were declared a place of scientific interest.

4. Fuencaliente de La Palma, something you can’t miss in La Palma, Spain

I also suggest visiting the La Palma Marine Interpretation Center, which has exhibits showing the current state of the seabed, as well as conservation efforts that the island is undergoing to protect it.

Fuencaliente is also popular for having some of the best beaches in La Palma, such as Playa del Faro. Without a doubt, it’s one of the top places to visit in La Palma, thanks to its many attractions.

If you don’t have much time to explore the south of La Palma, I recommend this excursion, which will take you to the key points of interest. Moreover, I think this winery tour is perfect for couples, as it visits the vineyards of Teneguía and includes insights into the island’s wine tradition, as well as a tasting.

5. Whale-watching from Tazacorte, the best thing to do in La Palma for families

Whale watching is definitely one of La Palma’s top 10 activities, and any time of year is good to see dolphins and whales off the coast of this island. Many species live permanently in the waters around La Palma and the Canary Islands in general, so don’t miss out!

5. Whale-watching from Tazacorte, the best thing to do in La Palma for families

While there is a high chance that you’ll see dolphins and whales, remember that they’re wild animals living in their natural habitat, so their movements can be unpredictable. This means that each whale-watching tour will be different, but I’m sure you’ll have a blast.

Best of all, this activity is one of the best things to do in La Palma with kids. I recommend this tour in particular, which starts from Puerto de Tazacorte and goes through some lovely areas like Cueva Bonita. I also suggest taking a look at our guide on where to see dolphins in La Palma if you want to know more about this exciting experience.

6. Bosque de los Tilos, a spectacular place to go in La Palma

Hiking through Bosque de los Tilos is one of the best La Palma activities if you love being in nature. This area is considered one of the most important laurel forests in the Canary Islands, and it was declared a Biosphere Reserve in 2002.

6. Bosque de los Tilos, a spectacular place to go in La Palma

The forest has become one of the top attractions in La Palma, thanks to its dense, green vegetation, which makes you feel like you’re walking into a fairytale. Here, you’ll find laurels, strawberry trees, fayas, heather, ferns, and other plant species, as well as various bird species and invertebrates. The forest also has a pretty waterfall, a few tunnels, and other natural wonders.

To make the most of your time here, I suggest visiting the Interpretation Center, where you can learn all about this place. Then, you can choose to take one of the many trails that start here. I promise that this is one of the best things to do in La Palma, and there are trails for all fitness levels.

7. Charco Azul, the most beautiful natural pool in La Palma, Canary Islands

Another must-see in La Palma is Charco Azul. This natural pool originates from the Atlantic Ocean, but its waters are calm so it’s an ideal place for the whole family to swim. Plus, it has a ladder leading into the water, and there are showers and changing rooms. Thanks to its natural beauty and convenient amenities, Charco Azul has been internationally recognized.

7. Charco Azul, the most beautiful natural pool in La Palma, Canary Islands

While I recommend including Charco Azul in your itinerary, there are other natural pools in La Palma that you should visit. One of these is La Fajana, which consists of three separate pools where you can enjoy a swim.

El Charco Azul is on the coast of San Andrés, while La Fajana is in Barlovento. If you’re looking for things to do in La Palma, you should definitely consider these two swimming holes!

8. Volcano Route, one of the best hikes in La Palma, Spain

The Ruta de los Volcanes, or Volcano Route, is one of the most well-known hikes to do in La Palma. The trail is about 12.5 miles long, although the length depends on where you start.

Most hikers start at El Refugio del Pilar and end at Los Canarios, and this route travels from the center of the island to the south. If you’re starting at El Refugio del Pilar, check out the Interpretation Center where you can learn more about the route. That said, you can do the route in reverse if you want.

8. Volcano Route, one of the best hikes in La Palma, Spain

Along the way, you’ll see a dozen volcanic cones, among which are the Birigoyo, Duraznero, Deseadas, Martín, and San Antonio volcanoes. You’ll also see the Fire Mountains and the Hoyo Negro crater, from which you can get a view of the islands of El Hierro, La Gomera, and Tenerife.

For sure, this is one of the most demanding hikes in La Palma, but it’s also one of the most stunning and interesting. You’ll pass through the municipalities of El Paso, Mazo, and Fuencaliente, which is in Cumbre Vieja Natural Park, another attraction in La Palma.

You can do this hike on your own or by taking this guided tour, but either way, make sure you pack enough food and water.

9. Cubo de la Galga, another hike to do in La Palma

If you’re looking for a nice, simple hike to do in La Palma, Cubo de la Galga is the best option. This circular route is about 7 miles, so you’ll need about 3 hours to complete it.

The trail is in the northwest part of the island, so it’s a great way to see the famous Canarian laurel forests. These dense forests are one of the most striking points of interest in La Palma.

9. Cubo de la Galga, another hike to do in La Palma

Although this is a circular route, there are a few ways to do it. You can first go to the Interpretation Center to learn more about the area, then walk to the trailhead and start there. You could also do the hike on your own or take this guided tour through the forest.

There’s no doubt that this is one of La Palma’s top 10 hikes, and its fairytale-like scenery makes it even better. Along your route, you’ll be able to stop at the Somada Alta viewpoint, from which you can see the island of Tenerife and La Gomera if the weather is clear.

10. San Antonio volcano, an incredible attraction in La Palma

The San Antonio volcano is another La Palma sight that you should witness. Besides, it’s along the Volcano Route, and it’s part of the Volcanes of Teneguía Natural Monument.

Before going to the volcano, I suggest visiting the San Antonio Volcano Interpretation Center in Los Canarios to learn more about it. You can park your park there and begin the ascent, which isn’t complicated, on foot.

10. San Antonio volcano, an incredible attraction in La Palma

When you get to the lookout point, which is about 1,970 feet above seas level, you can take in the incredible views of the crater and surrounding area. That said, my recommendation is to go at sunset and wait for it to get dark so you can enjoy the spectacular night sky and photograph the Milky Way. It’s one of those things to do in La Palma that will leave you breathless.

11. Las Palomas lava tube, one of the best attractions to visit in La Palma

The Palomas lava tube is a cave-like volcanic structure formed in 1949 after the eruption of the San Juan volcano. Today, the lava tube, which is over half a mile long, is one of the top places to visit in La Palma.

11. Las Palomas lava tube, one of the best attractions to visit in La Palma

I recommend taking this tour, which explores the inside of the tube and includes all the necessary safety equipment. You’ll also have a guide who can explain how the animals in the area have adapted to the conditions of the lava tube, and the tunnel’s geological importance.

Before you enter the lava tube, check out Caños de Fuego Interpretation Center, where you’ll find all the information you need about the volcanic tunnel. From there, you’ll find some walkways leading to Las Palomas, the only area that can be visited.

12. Playa de Nogales and other beaches in La Palma, Canary Islands

Another must-see in La Palma is the beautiful beaches on the island. Of all the beaches, Playa de Nogales is among the most popular. It’s in the northern part of the island and is known for being between mountainous cliffs and having black volcanic sand. Playa de Nogales is ideal for surfing, although when the waters are calm, it’s the perfect swimming spot, too.

12. Playa de Nogales and other beaches in La Palma, Canary Islands

Another awesome beach with clean and serene waters is Puerto Naos which, despite being in a touristy part of the island, isn’t very crowded. I also recommend visiting La Veta Beach, as it’s located right at the foot of a cliff. It’s one of the quietest places to visit in La Palma, particularly because you have to walk a bit down the cliff to get there.

Some other beaches worth visiting are Tazacorte Beach, which is the longest on the island, and Nueva Beach, where you can see lovely sunsets.

13. Santa Cruz de La Palma, a must-visit in La Palma

As the island’s capital city, Santa Cruz de La Palma must be on this list of La Palma points of interest.

While there are many attractions in this city, there are a few that you can’t miss, such as Plaza de España, which is considered the heart of the city and an area with a rich history.

13. Santa Cruz de La Palma, a must-visit in La Palma

Some other attractions in La Palma that are in the capital are the Barco de la Virgen Naval Museum and La Recova Market. The former exhibits historical naval objects from the city’s days as an essential European port in the 16th century. At the market, you can witness daily local life on the island, and find the freshest products. Another cool place to go is the Cigar Factory since cigars are an indigenous product in La Palma and are considered to be of the highest quality.

The best way to explore Santa Cruz de La Palma is to walk through its streets and neighborhoods. In my opinion, you should end your day at the Mirador de la Concepción, which overlooks the entire city.

14. Walk along the cliffs of La Palma’s northern coast

As I’ve already mentioned, hiking is one of the best activities in La Palma for all ages, and there are tons of options here. If you’re going to be in the north, you should definitely take a hike along the coastal cliffs.

Ideally, you’d start in Barlovento and hike the coastal area through the cliffs and ravines that characterize this island. Along the way, you can enjoy the laurel forest, which is a must-see in La Palma and all the Canary Islands.

14. Walk along the cliffs of La Palma’s northern coast, a must-do in La Palma, Spain

However, of all the attractions you’ll see on this route, the La Tosca viewpoint is one of the most beautiful, as it offers a wondrous panorama of the northern part of the island. The ravines are also impressive, particularly those of La Vica and Gallegos.

As with the other hikes in La Palma, you can do this route on your own or take this guided tour through the area.

15. Proís de Candelaria and Cueva Bonita, two more places to see in La Palma

One of the most impressive points of interest in La Palma is Proís de Candelaria. It’s a town hidden between rocks that faces the Atlantic Ocean. The homes, which are small and appear to be perfectly embedded in the stone, are mostly inhabited by vacationers, although some people live here permanently.

15. Proís de Candelaria and Cueva Bonita, two more places to see in La Palma

This secret place is one of the most stunning attractions in La Palma, and since it’s near Tirajafe, you can take advantage of your visit by also seeing Cueva Bonita. This cave, which has two entrances, was used by fishermen in the 17th century to flee from pirate attacks. These days, you can journey into the cave by booking a kayak tour.

Where to stay in La Palma

The capital city of Santa Cruz de La Palma is a good place to stay since it’s located near the airport and has many points of interest in La Palma. We stayed at the Quinta Los Naranjos rental home, which is just a few minutes from the capital by car. This accommodation offers a peaceful ambiance and is ideal if you want to go hiking during your stay.

Where to stay in La Palma

If you prefer to stay in a hotel in La Palma, one of the best places is the h20 Taburiente Playa, considered one of the best all-inclusive hotels in Spain and located between Santa Cruz de La Palma and the airport, to the east of the island. If you want to stay on the western end of the island, near the whale-watching areas of Puerto Naos or Tazacorte Beach, I recommend the Sol La Palma.

Moreover, it’s easy to find cheap accommodations in La Palma, so if you’re on a tight budget but don’t want to compromise on location, Pensión La Cubana, in the capital, is the best choice.

La Palma visitor information

Now that you know all the points of interest in La Palma and the best accommodations, here is some extra info to help you organize your itinerary.

How to get to La Palma

If you’re traveling from Spain, the best way to get to La Palma is by plane. La Palma Airport is about a 10-minute drive from Santa Cruz de La Palma, the island’s capital. Also, you can find the best offers on the Kiwi and Skyscanner websites. There are direct connections from Barcelona, Madrid, and the other Canary Islands.


In case you’re visiting another Canary Island and you want to go to La Palma, you can take a plane or the ferry. Getting there by boat is one of the best ways to get to La Palma from the other islands since there are more frequent departures. You can take the ferry to La Palma from Tenerife, Lanzarote, Gran Canaria, and La Gomera. We use the Direct Ferries website to find the best times and prices.


How to get around La Palma

The optimal way to get around the island is by rental car, as it gives you total freedom. We always book through Rentalcars without any problems, and the website guarantees the best rates.


If you don’t want to drive around the island, La Palma has a good bus system, so it’s still possible to get around. That said, I recommend checking schedules and prices on the official website so you can better plan your itinerary.

Where to eat in La Palma

Don’t worry; you’ll have no problem finding good restaurants in La Palma, particularly those with authentic Canarian food.

One of the top restaurants is El Jardín de la Sal, which is located on the salt flats of Fuencaliente. In addition to delicious dishes made with local products, you’ll get fabulous sunset views while you dine.

Another interesting place to eat is Enriclai in Santa Cruz de La Palma. It’s the smallest restaurant on the island, but the food is delectable. I also recommend Casa Osmunda, where they serve simple dishes with amazing flavors. It’s in Breña Alta, which is very close to the capital city.

Finally, another place that won’t disappoint your taste buds is El Asador del Campesino in Barlovento. Here, they serve traditional Canarian dishes at fairly affordable prices, so you’ll get a good meal for your money.

Map of La Palma

Now that you have all the info you need about what to do in La Palma, here is a map of the island so you can find all my recommended tourist attractions, accommodations, and restaurants.

I hope you have fun organizing your trip to La Palma, Spain. If you have any questions, leave me a comment below so I can help you out. I’m sure you’ll love this island, and I wish you a happy trip!

The 6 Best Things to Do in La Palma in Canary Islands

Skip to content Best 6 Things to Do in La Palma in the Canary Islands

La Palma is one of the seven Canary Islands located in the Atlantic Ocean. This island attracts travellers mainly due to its natural beauty, volcanoes, black sand beaches and bright night sky. Its pleasant temperatures and a minimum number of tourists make it the ideal place to visit. Welcome to La Palma and check out the six best things to do there.

At first glance, it’s obvious that the Canary Islands were formed by volcanic activity. The whole island of La Palma is cone-shaped and resembles an enormous volcano. Its tallest peak, the Roque de Los Muchachos, is located 2426 meters above sea level. So it’s not surprising that there aren’t 100 meters of straight road on the island. La Palma is the most volcanic active island compared to the rest of the Canary Islands, but the last eruption was recorded in 1971.

Tom on top of Roque de Los Muchachos

The local infrastructure is in great condition, and we must to admire the builders of these roads. The best way to get around the island is to rent your own car (we recommend you rent a car at or, even though there are several bus lines in La Palma that connect to all the important places. Keep in mind that the roads are twisting in very sharp turns, and there is no escaping the sharp bends even in the towns.

The roads on La Palma are full of turns

The temperature in La Palma is pleasant throughout the year, which earned it the nickname “Island of eternal spring.” During the winter, the temperatures don’t drop below 15 °C and even during the hottest summer months, the thermometer shows a pleasant 28 °C. The differences in temperatures are mainly noticeable with increasing altitude. The seaside is wonderfully warm, while at the top of the volcano, you will be forced to put on a warm jacket.

Eve on the terrace – the best accommodation is in your own apartment

Each visitor to the island will find something they enjoy because there are many things to do in La Palma. Lovers of good food will enjoy exquisite cuisine, which includes fish, seafood, and other delicacies at very reasonable prices. Those who appreciate the beauty of nature will be delighted by the number of hiking treks that La Palma offers. There is also something for those of us interested in culture, as the island offers several interesting museums and also walks through lovely little towns with adorably colourful houses. You can sunbathe on the black sand beaches, only the temperature of the ocean is a bit cold. The biggest advantage of La Palma is, however, the magical isolation from the outside world and the minimum number of tourists. Every visitor forgets the problems of the outside world and fully enjoys the peace and tranquillity this island offers.


Get Full ebook for Free. You will Get actionable steps you can use yourself to plan your travels anywhere.

1. Astronomical Observatory – Stargazing on La Palma

La Palma is one of the best places on Earth for stargazing. Thanks to its distance from the European and African continents, light pollution is minimal. The island isn’t densely populated, so the sky is absolutely clear at night. The local climate is also ideal – it causes the clouds to form relatively low, about 1,000 – 2,000 meters above sea level. That is why in the highest parts of the island can offer a clear sky almost all year round. There are up to 13 telescopes at the top of the Roque de Los Muchachos, where scientists from around the world are working together. Here stands the largest astronomical observatory in the Northern Hemisphere. The sky in La Palma itself is actually protected by the astronomical quality law by the Observatory of the Astronomical Institute.

There are the world’s observatories at the top of La Palma

Some companies in La Palma offer night sky observation tours using the telescope, together with professional commentary. Check out their websites and make sure you book a tour in advance. There are two companies doing these tours – Ad Astra La Palma and La Palma Stars. The interest in stargazing is quite high. The tours are dependent on the weather, so be aware that in the event of unfavourable weather conditions, the stargazing tours can be cancelled – which is what happened to us 🙁

La Palma offers the best conditions for observing the night sky


Museums and Historic Colonial Style Towns

The island of La Palma also offers a unique atmosphere where you can enjoy walking through the colonial-style towns. Worth mentioning is the historical centre of the capital city, Santa Cruiz de La Palma, with its magical streets and corners. This city has historically been an important strategic point for commercial purposes by the Spaniards who colonized the Canary Islands. Considerable wealth had passed through Santa Cruiz from America straight to Europe. Today, you can admire a great number of monuments, colourful mansions and cobbled streets.

The cities are full of beautiful colonial houses

Several other towns are also worth mentioning. For example, Los Llanos de Aridane or Villa de Mazo both offer a wonderful walk around the picturesque town centre. Those interested in culture should check out the fascinating museums. The best ones are the Naval Museum, Cigar Museum, Silk Museum, or the Archaeological Museums.

Walking around the city is a great experience

3. Dolphins and Whales Watching

The Canary Islands are the best place in Europe to watch dolphins and whales. Various companies in the small town of Tazacorte on the west side of La Palma organize trips to the open sea. There are several options to choose from, beginning with a short trip in a motorboat to a several hour-long cruise on a large ship. The coast of the island is permanently inhabited by several kinds of dolphins, and when the visitors are lucky, they may be able to see cetaceans as well.

Read our review of GetYourGuide, where you can book tour online.

Not far from the harbour is a gorgeous black volcanic sand beach that offers a pleasant place to relax. The beach has changing rooms, showers and several restaurants. The only drawback is the water temperature, which isn’t very high. But those of us hardy enough may enjoy at refreshing swim.

Groups of dolphins living near the coast

The selection of companies is quite varied, and the chance to see some animals is very high. If none of the dolphins or whales appear, the company usually offers some compensation. We chose a small group trip on a glass-bottomed motorboat from, and we can definitely recommend this company.

There are several boats in the harbor that drive tourists for tours

4. Trekking in a Beautiful Landscape – the Best Things to Do in La Palma

The natural beauty of the Canary Islands is absolutely unique. Other things to do in La Palma are the spectacular pine forests, massive volcanos rising to tremendous heights, deep canyons or crystal clear waterfalls. The landscape changes every few kilometres, so you definitely won’t be bored as an observer. The first thing that every visitor notices are the vast plantations of banana trees. They are located mainly at lower altitudes and can be found almost anywhere. A drive between the rows of banana trees is one of the exciting experiences that every visitor takes home with them.

Be prepared to meet the locals – black ravens. These very intelligent birds can be seen in several places, but they thrive in tourist destinations. They became used to people a long time ago – tourists often feed them. That’s why there is no need to be afraid of admiring them up close.

Ravens are used to tourists

Parque Nacional de la Caldera de Taburiente is definitely worth visiting. The million-year-old stratovolcano that is part of this National park actually formed the entire shape of the park. This area offers a great number of hiking trails, and each one will show you a completely different face of La Palma. The most visited is, of course, the highest peak – Roque de Los Muchachos – that offers a spectacular view of the surrounding countryside. The Cascada de Los Colores hike is also a popular part of the National Park. This 10 km hike through the deep canyon will take you to the rainbow waterfalls, the colour of which is caused by the minerals.

Magical waterfall – Cascada de Los Colores

The local endemic pine trees create truly beautiful forests. Mirador de la Cumbrecita offers several different forest paths, as well as a couple of views of the entire island. The Los Tilos area is also worth mentioning, with its beautiful views of the local Mirador del Espigón Atravesado rainforest and a visit to the crystal clear waterfall Cascada De Los Tilos.

Unique pine forests grow at La Palma

The most beautiful hike in La Palma is the 17 km walk along the ridge of the extinct volcanos at Cumbre Vieja National Park called the Volcano Route. This is an absolutely unique trail that takes you to the desolate crater of the Volcan San Antonio volcano, located in the very south of the island. There are truly many paths and trails to choose from at La Palma, and everyone will surely be able to find the one for them.

A view into the crater of an extinct volcano Volcan San Antonio

5. Tasting Local Specialties – Fish and Seafood

Before the colonization of the Canary Islands, indigenous people had to eat what they could grow on the island. Luckily, the soil here is truly very fertile, as is evidenced by the great number of crops that thrive here. The main part of the local diet is fish and seafood. The inhabitants of La Palma are very fond of thick vegetable soups with either potatoes or fish. We definitely recommend trying it out, as it is a local speciality.

Chefs are skilled and seafood is tasty

Prawns with oil and garlic

You shouldn’t miss visiting some local restaurants, we recommend Restaurant El Jardín de la Sal at Faro de Fuencaliente (restaurant location map) with its magnificent view of the sea. The food is absolutely delicious, with a great price tag. The restaurant stands on the coast, where salt is actively extracted by the evaporation of seawater, so you can buy some sea salt right there as a souvenir to take home. There is also a very photogenic lighthouse not far away with a typical red colour.

Salt fields in La Palma

6. Swimming and Diving in the Ocean Full of Life

The Canary Islands are a sought-after destination not only for swimming but also for diving. This area is internationally recognized for how transparent its seawaters are, which offer great visibility. The seabed is very rugged with many different caves that offer dwellings to a plethora of aquatic animals. This makes La Palma Island ideal for diving and exploration of the seafloor. Those who like to keep close to the water surface can enjoy a refreshing swim at local black snad beaches or natural pools.

Before we set out to the Canary Islands, we thought long and hard about where the curious name comes from. Although there are wild canaries living in the area, the islands aren’t named after them. The islands were named after dogs – the canary Great Dane – that have been living in the area since the 15th century. Great Danes were abundantly used as cattle herders or for dog and bear fights.

Beautiful black sand beach in Tazacorte

Popular swimming destinations include natural lagoons on the northeast of the La Fajana Island. It is basically a tamed coastline. In places where the wild waves hit the rugged coast, artificial dams were built, which prevent waves from breaking on the bare rocks. This creates natural water tanks that are ideal for bathing.

Do you know other great things to do in La Palma? Let us know in comments.

Lagunas at Charco Azul are great for swimming

Liked this post? PIN IT FOR LATER!!


About the Author: Eva

Eva Novakova is the co-author of the blog ET Abroad. It provides mainly the production of articles she takes care of marketing and manages social media. She likes to encounters with new people and learning about different cultures and their customs. On the road, she enjoys photography and is not afraid of tasting exotic meals.

About Us